AQWA Reference Manual

Aqwa Reference Manual
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
ansysinfo@ansys.com
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Release 15.0
November 2013
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.
Copyright and Trademark Information

2013 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.
U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1. Conventions ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1. Axes Systems ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2. Wave/Wind/Current Direction .................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3. Phase Angle ............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2. The Structure Definition and Analysis Position ................................................................................... 3
1.3. Units ................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.4. Aqwa Files ........................................................................................................................................ 5
2. Analysis Stages ....................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1. General Description .......................................................................................................................... 9
2.2. The Restart Stages .......................................................................................................................... 10
2.3. Restart Stage 1 ............................................................................................................................... 11
2.4. Restart Stage 2 ............................................................................................................................... 14
2.5. Restart Stage 3 ............................................................................................................................... 18
2.6. Restart Stage 4 ............................................................................................................................... 18
2.7. Restart Stage 5 ............................................................................................................................... 22
2.8. Restart Stage 6 ............................................................................................................................... 23
3. Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite .................................................................................................... 25
3.1. Features Common to All Data Categories ......................................................................................... 26
3.1.1. Optional User Identifier .......................................................................................................... 27
3.1.2. Compulsory Data Category Keyword ...................................................................................... 27
3.1.3. Compulsory 'END' Statement .................................................................................................. 27
3.1.4. Format Requirements ............................................................................................................. 27
3.2. Classification of Data Categories 1 TO 18 ......................................................................................... 28
3.2.1. Stopping and Starting the Program During an Analysis .......................................................... 28
3.2.2. Data Categories 1 to 5 - Geometric Definition and Static Environment ..................................... 28
3.2.3. Data Categories 6 to 8 - The Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters ................................... 29
3.2.4. Data Categories 9 to 18 - Definition of Analysis-Dependent Parameters ................................... 29
3.3. Default Values Assumed by the Program ......................................................................................... 29
3.3.1. Omission of Data Categories ................................................................................................... 30
3.3.2. Omission of Data Records within a Data Category ................................................................... 30
3.3.3. Omission of Fields on a Data Record ....................................................................................... 30
3.3.4. Default Values ........................................................................................................................ 30
3.4. The Data Category Series for One or More Structures ....................................................................... 31
3.4.1. Data Category Series - Definition ............................................................................................ 31
3.4.2. The Data Category Series Terminator - FINI .............................................................................. 31
3.4.3. Omission of Data Categories within a Data Category Series ..................................................... 31
4. The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0) ............................................................................................... 33
4.1. The JOB Data Record ....................................................................................................................... 33
4.2. The TITLE Data Record ..................................................................................................................... 34
4.3. The OPTIONS Data Record ............................................................................................................... 34
4.4. The RESTART Data Record ............................................................................................................... 35
5. Node Number and Coordinates (Data Category 1) ............................................................................... 37
5.1. General Description ........................................................................................................................ 37
5.2. Data Category Header ..................................................................................................................... 37
5.3. The Coordinate Data Record ............................................................................................................ 38
5.4.The Coordinate Data Record with Rotational Node Generation ......................................................... 38
5.5. The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association ................................................................ 40
5.6. The Coordinate Data Record with Offset .......................................................................................... 41
5.7. The Coordinate Data Record with Translation ................................................................................... 41
Release 15.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
iii
Reference Manual
5.8. The Coordinate Data Record with Mirror Node Generation ............................................................... 42
5.9. The NOD5 Data Record - 5-digit node numbers ............................................................................... 43
6. Element Topology - ELM* (Data Category 2) ........................................................................................ 45
6.3. Element Topology Data Record ....................................................................................................... 46
6.3.1. The QPPL Element .................................................................................................................. 48
6.3.2. The TPPL Element ................................................................................................................... 48
6.3.3. The TUBE Element .................................................................................................................. 49
6.3.4. The STUB Element .................................................................................................................. 49
6.3.5. The DISC Element ................................................................................................................... 50
6.3.6. The PMAS Element ................................................................................................................. 50
6.3.7. The PBOY Element .................................................................................................................. 50
6.3.8. The FPNT Element .................................................................................................................. 50
6.3.9. Examples of Element Specifications ........................................................................................ 51
6.4. SYMX and SYMY Data Records - X and Y Symmetry .......................................................................... 52
6.5.The HYDI Data Record - Hydrodynamic Interaction .......................................................................... 53
6.6. The RMXS/RMYS Data Records- Remove Symmetry .......................................................................... 54
6.7. The MSTR Data Record - Move Structure .......................................................................................... 54
6.8. The FIXD Data Record - Fix Structure ................................................................................................ 55
6.9. The VLID Data Record - Suppression of Standing Waves. ................................................................... 55
6.10. The ASYM Data Record - Axisymmetric Structure Generation ......................................................... 56
6.11.The ILID Data Record - Suppression of Irregular Frequencies ........................................................... 58
6.12. The ZLWL Data Record - Waterline Height ...................................................................................... 59
6.13. The SEAG Data Records - Creation of Wave Grid Pressures .............................................................. 60
7. Material Properties - MATE (Data Category 3) ...................................................................................... 63
7.3. Material Property Data Record ........................................................................................................ 63
7.4.The STRC Data Record - Material Structure Association ..................................................................... 64
8. Geometric Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4) ................................................................................. 65
8.3. Geometric Property Data Record ..................................................................................................... 65
8.4. The STRC Data Record - Geometry Structure Association .................................................................. 67
9. Constant Parameters - GLOB (Data Category 5) .................................................................................... 69
9.3. The DPTH Data Record (Optional) - Water Depth .............................................................................. 69
9.4. The DENS Data Record (Optional) - Water Density ............................................................................ 69
9.5. The ACCG Data Record (Optional) - Acceleration Due to Gravity ....................................................... 70
10. Frequency and Directions Table - FDR* (Data Category 6) ................................................................. 71
10.1. General Description ...................................................................................................................... 71
10.2. Data Category Header ................................................................................................................... 71
10.3.The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters
are Computed ...................................................................................................................................... 72
10.4. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed ............. 74
10.5. The MVEF Data Record - Move Existing Frequency Parameters ....................................................... 75
10.6.The DELF Data Record - Delete Frequency Parameters .................................................................... 77
10.7.The CSTR Data Record - Copying Existing Hydrodynamic Parameters for a Specific Structure Number ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
10.8. The FILE Data Record - Copying Existing Hydrodynamic Parameters from an External File ............... 78
iv
Reference Manual
10.9. The CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records - Copy Frequency Parameters ................................................. 79
10.10. The CPYS Data Record - Copy Stiffness Matrix .............................................................................. 81
10.11. The CPDB Data Record - Copy Existing Hydrodynamic Data Base .................................................. 81
10.12. The FWDS Data Record - Define Forward Speed ........................................................................... 82
10.13. Database Import ......................................................................................................................... 82
11. Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters and Stiffness Matrix - WFS* (Data Category 7) .................. 85
11.1. General Description ...................................................................................................................... 85
11.2. Data Category Header ................................................................................................................... 85
11.3. The LSTF Data Record - Linear Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix ............................................................. 86
11.4. The ZCGE Data Record - Z Coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium .................................. 87
11.5. The BFEQ Data Record - Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium .................................................................. 88
11.6. The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Parameters are Defined ...... 88
11.7.The WAMS Data Record - Wave Frequency Added Mass Matrix and the WDMP Data Record - Wave
Frequency Damping Matrix ................................................................................................................... 89
11.8.The WDGA Data Record - Wave Frequency Diagonal Added Mass and the WDGD Data Record Wave Frequency Diagonal Damping ..................................................................................................... 90
11.9. The AAMS/ADMP Data Record - Additional Added Mass/Damping Matrices ................................... 91
11.10.The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Added Mass/Damping
Matrices ............................................................................................................................................... 92
11.11.The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Diagonal Added Mass/Damping ....................................................................................................................................................... 92
11.12. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Parameters are Defined ....................................... 93
11.13.The TDIF/RDIF/TFKV/RFKV/TRAO/RRAO Data Records - Wave Frequency Diffraction Forces and
Responses ............................................................................................................................................ 94
11.14. The GMXX/GMYY Data Record - User-Specified Metacentric Height .............................................. 95
11.15. The SSTR Data Record - Submerged Structure .............................................................................. 95
11.16. The ASTF Data Record - Additional Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix .................................................... 96
11.17. The SSTF/SPOS/SFRC Data Records - Additional Structural Stiffness .............................................. 97
11.17.1. The SSTF Data Record - Additional Structural Stiffness Matrix ............................................... 97
11.17.2. The SPOS Data Record - Equilibrium Position ....................................................................... 98
11.17.3. The SFRC Data Record - Force at Equilibrium Position .......................................................... 98
12. Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8) ............................................................................. 101
12.1. General Description .................................................................................................................... 101
12.2. Data Category Header ................................................................................................................. 102
12.3.The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Records - Frequencies/Periods at which the Drift Coefficients are
defined ............................................................................................................................................... 102
12.4. The DRFX/DRFY/DRRZ Data Records - Drift Force Coefficients ....................................................... 103
12.5. The CQTF Data Record - Import of QTF Database .......................................................................... 104
13. Drift Motion Parameters - DRM* (Data Category 9) .......................................................................... 107
13.3.The DGAM Data Record - Diagonal Added Mass Matrix ................................................................. 108
13.4. The DGDP Data Record - Diagonal Damping Matrix ...................................................................... 108
13.5.The LFAD Data Record - Use Lowest Wave Frequency Added Mass and Damping for Drift Frequency
Analysis .............................................................................................................................................. 109
13.6. The YRDP Data Record - Yaw-Rate Drag Parameters ...................................................................... 109
13.7.The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Diagonal Added Mass and
Damping ........................................................................................................................................... 110
13.8.The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Added Mass/Damping
Matrices ............................................................................................................................................. 111
14. Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster Forces - HLD* (Data Category 10) ............................................ 113
Reference Manual
14.3.The CUFX/CUFY/CURZ Data Record - Current Force Coefficients and the WIFX/WIFY/WIRZ Data Record
- Wind Force Coefficients ..................................................................................................................... 113
14.4. The THRS Data Record - Thruster Forces ....................................................................................... 115
14.5.The NLRD/BOFF/BASE Data Records - Non Linear Roll Damping .................................................... 116
14.6. The MDIN/MDSV Data Records - Morison Hull Drag ...................................................................... 117
14.6.1. The MDIN Data Record ........................................................................................................ 117
14.6.2. The MDSV Data Record ....................................................................................................... 118
14.7. The IUFC/RUFC Data Records - External Forces ............................................................................. 118
14.8. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Drag Coefficients are defined .............................. 119
14.9. SYMX and SYMY Data Records - X AND Y Symmetry ..................................................................... 120
14.10. The DPOS Data Record - Position for Drag calculation ................................................................. 120
14.11. The DDEP Data Record - Depth for current measurement ........................................................... 121
15. Current/Wind Parameters - ENVR (Data Category 11) ...................................................................... 123
15.3. CURR/WIND Data Records - Uniform Current/Wind Velocity .......................................................... 123
15.4. CPRF Data Record - Profiled Current Velocity ................................................................................ 124
15.5. CDRN Data Record - Current Direction ......................................................................................... 124
15.6. The TOWS Data Record - Tether Tow Speed .................................................................................. 125
16. Motion Constraints on Structures - CONS (Data Category 12) .......................................................... 127
16.3. The DACF Data Record - Deactivate Freedom at the Center of Gravity ........................................... 128
16.4. The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position ..................................................................... 129
16.5. The KCON/CCON/FCON Data Records - Define Articulation Stiffness, Damping and Friction ........... 132
16.5.1. KCON and CCON Data Records ............................................................................................ 132
16.5.2.The FCON Data Record ........................................................................................................ 133
17. Wind/Wave Spectrum Definition - SPEC (Data Category 13) ............................................................ 135
17.3. Wind Spectra Definition .............................................................................................................. 135
17.4. The HRTZ Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz ........................................................ 137
17.5. The RADS Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Radians/Second ....................................... 138
17.6. The SPDN Data Record - Wave Spectral Direction ......................................................................... 138
17.7. The SEED Data Record - Wave Spectral Seed ................................................................................. 139
17.8. The CURR / WIND Data Records - Current and Wind Speed and Direction ...................................... 139
17.9. The PSMZ Data Record - Pierson-Moskowitz Spectrum ................................................................. 140
17.10. The GAUS Data Record - Gaussian Spectrum .............................................................................. 141
17.11. The JONS Data Record - JONSWAP Spectrum ............................................................................. 141
17.12. The JONH Data Record - JONSWAP Spectrum ............................................................................ 142
17.13.The UDEF Data Record - User-Defined Wave Spectrum and the FINI Data Record - User-Defined
Spectrum Separator ............................................................................................................................ 143
17.14. The NSPL Data Record - Number of Spectral Lines ...................................................................... 143
17.15. The NRST Data Record - Number of Spectral Rasters ................................................................... 144
17.16. Input of a Time History of Wind Speed and Direction .................................................................. 144
17.17. Input of a Time History of External Forces on Structures ............................................................. 145
17.18. The XSWL/GATP Data Records - Input of Cross Swell ................................................................... 146
17.18.1. The GATP Data Record - Use of peak period ....................................................................... 147
17.18.2. Where Cross-Swell is Implemented .................................................................................... 148
17.18.3. Where Cross-Swell is not Implemented .............................................................................. 148
17.19. The IWHT Data Record - Import of Wave Height Time History ...................................................... 149
vi
Reference Manual
17.20. The SSDN/UDDS/SSWT Data Records - User-Defined Spread Seas Spectrum ............................... 152
17.21. The NAME Data Record - Spectrum Name .................................................................................. 154
17.22. The NODR Data Record - No Drift Forces .................................................................................... 154
17.23. The SPGR Data Record - Spectral Group Keyword ....................................................................... 154
17.24. The SGNM Data Record - Spectral Group Name .......................................................................... 156
17.25. The TOWS Data Record - Tether Tow Speed ................................................................................ 156
18. Regular Wave (Aqwa-Naut) - WAVE (Data Category 13N) ................................................................. 157
18.3. The WAMP Data Record - The Regular Wave Amplitude ................................................................ 157
18.4. The PERD Data Record - Regular Wave Period ............................................................................... 157
18.5. The WDRN & WVDN Data Records - Wave Direction ...................................................................... 157
18.6. The AIRY Data Record - Linear Wave ............................................................................................. 158
18.7.The WRMP Data Record - Wave Ramp ........................................................................................... 158
19. Mooring Lines and Attachment Points - MOOR (Data Category 14) ................................................. 161
19.3. The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables ..................................................................... 162
19.3.1. The LINE Data Record - A Conventional linear elastic Cable .................................................. 163
19.3.2.The WNCH Data Record - A Winch Adjusted to Constant Tension .......................................... 164
19.3.3. The FORC Data Record - Constant Force .............................................................................. 164
19.4. The POLY Data Record - Polynomial Nonlinear Properties ............................................................. 165
19.5. The NLIN Data Record - Nonlinear Cables ..................................................................................... 166
19.5.1. Parameters Applied to a Polynomial (POLY) Mooring Line .................................................... 166
19.5.2. Parameters Applied to a Composite Catenary (COMP/ECAT) Mooring Line ........................... 167
19.5.3. Parameters Applied to a Steel Wire (SWIR) Nonlinearity ....................................................... 168
19.6. The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite Catenary Mooring Line .............................................. 168
19.6.1. The COMP Data Record ....................................................................................................... 168
19.6.2.The ECAT Data Record ......................................................................................................... 170
19.7. The ECAX Data Record - Nonlinear Axial Stiffness Polynomial ....................................................... 171
19.8. The BUOY/CLMP Data Records - Intermediate Buoys and Clump Weights ...................................... 172
19.9. Cable Dynamics - Additional Data Requirements ......................................................................... 173
19.9.1. Introduction to Cable Dynamics .......................................................................................... 173
19.9.2. The NLID Data Record - Non-linear Dynamic Cable .............................................................. 174
19.9.3. The ECAH Data Record - Elastic Catenary Hydrodynamic Properties ..................................... 175
19.9.4. The ECAB Data Record - Elastic Catenary Bending Stiffness .................................................. 175
19.9.5. The NCEL Data Record - Number of Cable Elements ............................................................ 176
19.9.6. The DYNM/DOFF Data Records - Cable Dynamics ON/OFF Switch ........................................ 176
19.10. The LBRK Data Record - Mooring Line Break ............................................................................... 177
19.11. The PULY Data Record - Linear Cables ........................................................................................ 178
19.12. The DWT0/LNDW/DWAL Data Records - Linear Drum Winches ................................................... 180
19.12.1. The DWT0 Data Record ..................................................................................................... 180
19.12.2. The LNDW Data Record ..................................................................................................... 181
19.12.3. The DWAL Data Record - Drum Winch Additional Length ................................................... 183
19.13. The FEND/FLIN Data Records - Fenders ...................................................................................... 183
19.13.1. The FEND Data Record - Fender properties ........................................................................ 183
19.13.2. The FLIN Data Record - Fender connections ....................................................................... 184
19.14. The LE2D/*RNG Data Records - 2-Dimensional Load Extension Database .................................... 185
19.14.1.The LE2D Data Record ....................................................................................................... 185
19.14.2. The ZRNG/XRNG/HRNG/VRNG Data Records ...................................................................... 187
19.15.The PRIC Data Record - Print Initial Condition of Mooring Lines ................................................... 189
19.16. The FINI Data Record - Mooring Configuration Separator ............................................................ 189
vii
Reference Manual
19.17.The FILE Data Record - Mooring Description ............................................................................... 189
19.18. The SWIR Data Record - Steel Wire Nonlinear Properties ............................................................. 190
19.19. Tether Additional Data Requirements ........................................................................................ 191
19.19.1.The TELM Data Record - Tether Element ............................................................................. 191
19.19.2. The TSPA/TSPV Data Records - Tether Anchor and Vessel Springs ........................................ 192
19.19.3. The TEIG Data Record - Tether Eigensolution ...................................................................... 192
19.19.4. The TFAT Data Record - Tether Fatigue Parameters (Aqwa-Drift only) .................................. 193
19.19.5. The TPSH Data Record - Tether Peak Stress Hours (Aqwa-Drift only) .................................... 194
19.19.6. The TSLK Data Record - Tether Printing when Slack ............................................................ 194
19.19.7. The TEGR Data Record - Tether Group Factor ...................................................................... 195
19.19.8.The TCAP Data Record - Tether End Cap Areas .................................................................... 195
19.19.9. The TIFL Data Record - Tether Internal Fluid Properties ....................................................... 196
19.19.10. The TIMP Data Record - Tether Impact Parameters ........................................................... 196
19.19.11. The TLOW Data Record - Tether Lower Stop Position ........................................................ 197
19.19.12. The TETH Data Record - Tether Vessel and Anchor/Trailing End Position ............................ 197
19.19.13. The TLAC/TROC/TLAV/TROV Data Records -Tether Constraint Data Records ...................... 198
20. Starting Conditions Definition - STRT (Data Category 15) ................................................................ 201
20.3. The POS* Data Record - Starting Positions .................................................................................... 202
20.4. The REA* Data Record - Initial Articulation Reactions .................................................................... 203
21. Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Drift) - STRT (Data Category 15D) ........................................ 205
21.1.1. Analysis Type - Drift only ..................................................................................................... 205
21.1.2. Analysis Type - Drift + Wave Frequency (WFRQ on JOB data record) ..................................... 206
21.4. The VEL* Data Record - Starting Velocities .................................................................................... 208
21.5. The SLP* Data Record - Slow Starting Positions ............................................................................ 208
21.6. The SLV* Data Record - Slow Starting Velocities ............................................................................ 209
22. Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Naut) - STRT (Data Category 15N) ........................................ 211
22.4. The VEL* Data Record- Starting Velocities ..................................................................................... 212
23. Time Integration Parameters - TINT (Data Category 16) ................................................................... 215
23.3. The TIME Data Record - Time Integration Parameters .................................................................... 215
23.4. The HOTS Data Record - For Hot-Start Run ................................................................................... 216
24. Aqwa-Librium Iteration Parameters - LMTS (Data Category 16B) .................................................... 219
24.3. The MXNI - Maximum Number of Iterations ................................................................................. 219
24.4. The MMVE Data Record - Maximum Movement Per Iteration ........................................................ 219
24.5.The MERR Data Record - Maximum Error Allowable for Equilibrium ............................................... 220
24.6. The STRP Data Record - Output Stability Report ........................................................................... 220
25. Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data Category 16L) ............................................ 223
25.3.The SCAL Data Record - Length Scale Factor ................................................................................. 224
25.4.The MASS Data Record - Mass Scaling Parameter .......................................................................... 224
viii
Reference Manual
25.5. The INER Data Record - New Inertia Values ................................................................................... 225
25.6. The NCOG Data Record - New Center of Gravity ........................................................................... 225
25.7. The REFP Data Record - New Hydrodynamic Reference Point ........................................................ 225
26. Hydrodynamic Parameters for Non-Diffracting Elements - HYDC (Data Category 17) .................... 227
26.3. The SC1/ Data Record - Scale Factor for Model Test Simulation ..................................................... 228
26.4. The DRGM/ADMM Data Record - Drag/Added Mass Multiplying Factor ......................................... 229
26.5. The SLMM Data Record - Slam Multiplying Factor ......................................................................... 230
27. Additional File Output - PROP (Data Category 18) ........................................................................... 231
27.3.The NODE Data Record - Nodal Position for Listing file Output ...................................................... 232
27.4. The ALLM Data Record - All Motions ............................................................................................ 233
27.5. The PCGP Data Record - Print Center of Gravity Parameters .......................................................... 233
27.6. The PREV Data Record - Print Every nth Timestep ......................................................................... 234
27.7. The PRNT/NOPR Data Record - Print/No Print Parameters Values ................................................... 235
27.8. The PTEN Data Record - Print Cable Tensions ................................................................................ 237
27.9. The ZRON/ZROF Data Records - Print Z Coordinate Relative to Wave Surface ON/OFF ................... 237
27.10.The ZRWS Data Record - Print Z Coordinate Relative to Wave Surface .......................................... 238
27.11. The PPRV Data Record - Print POS Every nth Timestep ................................................................ 238
27.12. The GREV Data Record - Graphics Output Every nth Timestep ..................................................... 238
27.13. The PRMD Data Record - Print Mooring Drag .............................................................................. 239
27.14.The PMST Data Record - Print Mooring Section Tensions ............................................................. 239
27.15. The SSPC Data Record - Print Sub-Spectrum Response ............................................................... 240
27.16. Tether Additional Data Requirements ........................................................................................ 240
27.16.1. The TPRV Data Record - Tether Printing Interval ................................................................. 241
27.16.2. The TGRV Data Record - Tether Graphics/Statistics Interval ................................................. 241
27.16.3. The TSTS/TSTF Data Record - Tether Start/Finish Timesteps for Statistics ............................. 241
28. Element and Nodal Loads - ENLD (Data Category 21) ...................................................................... 243
28.3. The ISEL and LSEL Data Records - Element/Nodal Load Record Selection ...................................... 243
28.4. The RISR Data Record - Nodal Load Output for a Riser Structure .................................................... 244
28.5. The TUBE Local Axes .................................................................................................................... 244
29. Options for Use in Running Aqwa Programs ..................................................................................... 247
29.1. Command Line Options .............................................................................................................. 247
29.2. Job Type Options ........................................................................................................................ 247
29.3. Program Options for Use in Aqwa Program Suite .......................................................................... 248
29.3.1. Printing of the Expanded Input Data List for each Data Category ......................................... 248
29.3.2. Printing Options for Output of Calculated Parameters ......................................................... 250
29.3.3. Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite ................................................. 252
30. External Force Calculation ................................................................................................................ 259
30.1. Example of Fortran Subroutine user_force ................................................................................... 259
30.2. Conversion of Euler Angles to LSA ............................................................................................... 261
ix
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Aqwa suite is a set of advanced hydrodynamic analysis programs. This document is the Reference
Manual for the Aqwa suite of programs.
The programs in the suite are:
Aqwa-Line
Aqwa-Librium
Aqwa-Fer
Aqwa-Drift
Aqwa-Naut
The Reference Manual defines the input data format for the above programs. Most of the input information is applicable to more than one program. When the information relates to only one program, this
is made clear in the text.
The manual also contains details of certain topics common to all the programs.
The Aqwa Reference Manual should be used in conjunction with the appropriate individual Program
User Manual when running any of the programs in the Aqwa suite.
1.1. Conventions
The following conventions are adopted in Aqwa programs. Users should keep them in mind during input
data preparation and results interpretation.
1.1.1. Axes Systems

Two sets of axes are used in the Aqwa suite; these are shown in Figure 1.1: Axes Systems (p. 2). They
are the FRA (Fixed Reference Axes) and the LSA (Local Set of Axes).
Fixed Reference Axes (FRA)X,Y,Z in the free-surface with Z pointing vertically

This is also known as the Global Axis Systerm. This system has its origin on the mean water surface with
Z axis pointing upwards, X and Y on the mean water surface. The mean water surface is at Z=0. This
axis system will not move at any stage of the Aqwa analysis.
Local System Axes (LSA)x,y,z with origin through the body's center of gravity
The Local System Axis (LSA) has its origin at the CoG of the vessel, with X, Y and Z axes parallel to the
FRA (see 1 above) when the vessel is in its initial definition position. With conventional modelling, X is
along the length of the vessel, Y along the beam to port, and Z in the direction of the cross product of
X and Y. This axis system moves with the vessel.
Introduction
Figure 1.1: Axes Systems
1.1.2. Wave/Wind/Current Direction

The Aqwa suite employs a single common sign convention with the axes defined as in the previous
section.
The wave direction is defined as the angle from the positive global X axis to the direction in which the
wave is travelling, measured anti-clockwise when seen from above. Therefore waves travelling along
the X axis (from -X to +X) have a 0 degree wave direction, and waves travelling along the Y axis ( from
-Y to +Y) have a 90 degree wave direction.
Forces and moments are positive in the same direction as corresponding motions.
The incident wave elevation h is measured positive upwards:
h = a cos (- t + k x cos () + k y sin())
where
a = wave amplitude
= wave frequency, in radians/second
t = time, in seconds
k = wave number
x,y = position in the FRA of the point at which the wave height is given by the above equation
= direction of wave propagation
The phase () of a quantity Q with amplitude Q0 is defined by the equation
Q = Q0 cos (- t + )
where
t = the time elapsed since the wave crest passed over the origin of the FRA
Q may represent forces, moments, RAOs, position, velocity or accelerations.
The Structure Definition and Analysis Position
1.1.3. Phase Angle

The phase angle defines the time difference between an oscillatory parameter and a reference point.
In Aqwa, the reference point for the phase angle of a parameter is the zero phase angle of the incident
wave, which corresponds to the time when the wave crest is at the CoG of the structure. In the AqwaLine output file, most calculated parameters are given in the form of an amplitude and a phase angle.
A positive phase angle indicates that a parameter reaches its peak value after the wave crest has passed
the CoG of the structure, and the time difference is decided by:
dt = T* Phase/360
in which T is wave period, and Phase is in degrees.
1.2. The Structure Definition and Analysis Position

In the description of the geometry and mass distribution, the user may define the structure in any position. There are, however, three considerations when choosing the position in which to define the
structure.
1. Having defined the structure in a particular position in the FRA axis system (this is termed the definition
position in the documentation), the user may then move the structure by specifying the appropriate
position for the particular analysis (this is termed the analysis position in the documentation). This means
that the user can define a barge with the keel on the X-axis of the FRA, and then lower the barge into
the water for analysis. The analysis position will depend on the type of analysis performed. The requirement
for each program is summarized as follows:
Aqwa-Line - Equilibrium position, vertical position specification only
Aqwa-Fer - Equilibrium position
Aqwa-Librium - Initial estimate of equilibrium position
Aqwa-Naut/Drift - Position at the start of the time history
When running Aqwa-Line, it is important to note that the structure may only be moved vertically
from its definition position (i.e., only the draft may be altered) for the diffraction/radiation analysis.
This restriction is imposed to ensure that the axes in which the hydrodynamic coefficients are defined
is the FRA. Therefore, if the user cannot achieve the correct position for the diffraction/radiation
analysis by altering only the draft of the structure, the definition position is not valid.
There are no restrictions for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut on the movement from the definition to
the analysis position.
2. If a structure is symmetrical about one or more axes, only a part of the structure is required to be defined.
This means that
(i) only or of the structure needs to be modelled
(ii) substantial saving in computer time in the diffraction/radiation analysis in Aqwa-Line may be
achieved. This saving is model-dependent but is typically
- for 2-fold symmetry = 50 - 75 percent
- for 4-fold symmetry = 75 - 90 percent
Introduction
3. Motions of the structure are often output in the Aqwa suite in the form of translations and rotations
about the X, Y and Z axis and are termed surge, sway, heave, roll, pitch, and yaw. These motions may
be successive 'LARGE' rotations about the X, Y and Z axes of the FRA axes system in the definition position
(Aqwa-Drift/Librium/Naut) or 'small' rotations in arbitrary order about the analysis position in the local
LSA axes system (Aqwa-Line/Drift/Fer). It can be seen that interpretation of the results can be made extremely difficult by an unsuitable choice of the definition position of the structure.
For example, if the structure is a ship or barge, conventional terminology for motion along, and rotation about, the longitudinal center line, is surge and roll. However, if the longitudinal center line
is defined parallel to the FRA Y-axis, then rotational motion about this axis will be termed pitch, and
translational motion along the axis, sway.
For other structures, e.g. semi-submersibles, this may not be relevant. The user must take due note
of the terms associated with the motions about the axes and is recommended to define all ship/barge
shaped structures with the longitudinal axis parallel to the FRA X-axis.
1.3. Units
The units used in Aqwa are decided by the input values for the water density and gravitational acceleration. For example, if metre, Newton are to be used as the units for the length and force, users should
use 1025 for the water density and 9.806 for the gravitational acceleration.
In the output, the unit for the rotational motions is in degrees (although they are originally calculated
in radians), while the rotational terms in the stiffness and damping matrices are output in radians.
The user is free to choose any system of units for the data, with the proviso that the system must be
consistent. This means that the unit of mass must be consistent with the units of length and force
already selected.
Examples of consistent sets of units are:
SI units Force in newtons, length in metres, mass in kilograms, time in seconds, acceleration in meters/sec2
Imperial units Force in poundals, length in feet, mass in pounds, time in seconds, acceleration in feet/sec2,
or Force in pounds, length in feet, mass in slugs, time in seconds, acceleration in feet/sec2
For any other set of units, the consistent unit of mass will be a multiple of the basic unit of mass because
it is a derived unit.
The consistent unit of mass is obtained by dividing the unit of force by the acceleration due to gravity,
which itself has units of length divided by time squared. A change in the unit of length, for example,
from feet to inches or metres to millimeters, requires a corresponding change in the unit of mass used
for calculating the density. A list of sets of consistent units is given below.
_____________________________________________________________________________
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Unit of | Unit of | Typical |
| Consistent | Density (mass/unit volume) |
| force
| length | value of| g | unit of
| -------------------------- |
|
|
| E for
|
| mass
|
Steel
| Sea Water
|
|
|
| Steel
|
|
|
|
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Newton | metre
| 2.1*E11 | 9.81| 1.0 Kg
| 7850
| 1025
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Newton | cm
| 2.1*E07 | 981| 100 Kg
| 7.85*E-5
| 1.025*E-5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Newton | mm
| 2.1*E05 | 9810| 1000 Kg
| 7.85*E-9
| 1.025*E-9
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Aqwa Files
| Kilopond| metre
| 2.14*E10| 9.81| 9.81 Kg
| 800
| 104.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Kilopond| cm
| 2.14*E6 | 981| 981 Kg
| 8.00*E-06 | 1.045*E-06
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Kilopond| mm
| 2.14*E4 | 9810| 9810 Kg
| 8.00*E-10 | 1.045*E-10
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| KNewton | metre
| 2.1*E8 | 9.81| 1000 Kg
| 7.85
| 1.025
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| KNewton | cm
| 2.1*E4 | 981| 1.0*E5 Kg | 7.85*E-08 | 1.025*E-08
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| KNewton | mm
| 2.1*E2 | 9810| 1.0*E6 Kg | 7.85*E-12 | 1.025*E-12
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Tonne(f)| metre
| 2.14*E7 | 9.81| 9.81*E3 Kg | 0.800
| 0.1045
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Tonne(f)| cm
| 2.14*E3 | 981| 9.81*E5 Kg | 8.0*E-09
| 1.045*E-09
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Tonne(f)| mm
| 2.14*E1 | 9810| 9.81*E6 Kg | 8.0*E-13
| 1.045*E-13
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Poundal | Foot
| 1.39*E11| 32.2| 1.0 lb
| 491
| 64.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Poundal | Inch
| 9.66*E8 | 386 | 12 lbs
| 2.37*E-2
| 3.095*E-3
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Pound(f)| Foot
| 4.32*E9 | 32.2| 32.2 lbs
| 15.2
| 1.985
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Pound(f)| Inch
| 3.0*E7 | 386 | 386 lbs
| 7.35*E-4
| 9.597*E-5
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Kip
| Foot
| 4.32*E6 | 32.2| 3.22*E4 lbs| 1.52*E-2
| 1.985*E-3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Kip
| Inch
| 3.0*E4 | 386 | 3.86*E5 lbs| 7.35*E-7
| 9.597*E-8
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Ton(f) | Foot
| 1.93*E6 | 32.2| 7.21*E4 lbs| 6.81*E-3
| 8.892*E-4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Ton(f) | Inch
| 1.34*E4 | 386 | 8.66*E5 lbs| 3.28*E-7
| 4.283*E-8
|
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note
1 Kip = 1000 pounds force
1 Kilopond = 1 Kilogram force
all times are in seconds
assumed specific gravity of steel = 7.85
assumed specific gravity of sea water = 1.025
1.4. Aqwa Files

The Aqwa Suite uses both ASCII files and binary files for its input and output. All the files are defined
by a generic name with a 3 character file extension. The maximum length of the filename is 28 characters
(32 with the extension). It is strongly recommended that the filename is related to the program used.
The extension names are related to the file type. The following is a list of the file extension names
commonly used in Aqwa and Aqwa Graphical Supervisor (AGS).
Input Files
DAT -- ASCII file for model definition and analysis parameters. Used by all Aqwa programs.
Introduction
XFT -- ASCII file defining a time history of external force on a structure or structures in six degrees of
freedom in local axis system. Used for time domain analysis (optional).
WVT -- ASCII file defining a time history of wind velocity and direction. Used for time domain analysis
(optional).
WHT -- ASCII file defining a time history of water surface elevation. Used for time domain analysis (optional).
LIN -- ASCII file defining ship offsets. Used by AGS Mesh Generator to define hull shape.
MSD -- ASCII file defining the mass distribution of a vessel. Used by AGS for shear force and bending
moment calculation.
SFM -- ASCII file defining the mass distribution of a vessel. Used by AGS for splitting force calculation.
EQP -- Binary file containing the equilibrium positions of structures. Created by Aqwa-Librium and used
(optional) by Fer, Drift or Naut; see RDEP option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa
Suite (p. 252)).
Output Files
LIS -- ASCII file containing model definition/analysis parameters and the analysis results.
MES -- ASCII file containing messages issued during an Aqwa analysis.
QTF -- ASCII file containing fully populated matrix of Quadratic Transfer Functions.
HYD -- Binary file containing the hydrodynamic results calculated in Aqwa-Line. Can be used for further
Aqwa analysis.
RES -- Binary file containing the model definition/analysis parameters and the hydrodynamic results calculated in Aqwa-Line. Can be used for further Aqwa analysis or structure visualisation etc in AGS.
EQP -- Binary file containing the equilibrium positions of structures. Created by Aqwa-Librium and used
(optional) by Fer, Drift or Naut; see RDEP option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa
Suite (p. 252)).
ENL -- Binary file containing Morison element/nodal loading. Only created for tether analysis, or tube
elements at analysis stage 6.
POS -- Binary file containing structures' positions at each time step. Used by AGS for generating animation.
PLT -- Binary file containing Aqwa analysis results. Used by AGS for plotting graphs.
POT -- Binary file containing potentials. Used by AGS or Aqwa-WAVE for element pressure calculation. This
file is only created by Aqwa-Line when LDOP option is on.
USS -- Binary file containing source strengths. Used by Aqwa-WAVE for Morison force calculation. This file
is only created by Aqwa-Line when LDOP option is on.
SEQ -- Binary file containing the animation of structure motion. Created and used by AGS.
TAB -- ASCII file containing the statistics table from Aqwa-Drift tether analysis.
PAC -- Binary file containing pressures at element centroids. Used by AGS for post-processing involving
pressures.
6
Aqwa Files
VAC -- Binary file containing fluid velocities at element centroids. Used by AGS for wave contour plotting.
Chapter 2: Analysis Stages

The following sections discuss the various analysis stages in a hydrodynamics analysis using the Aqwa
suite.
2.1. General Description
2.2.The Restart Stages
2.3. Restart Stage 1

All programs in the Aqwa suite have a facility for gradual progression through any given analysis. This
facility is made possible by structuring each program into a number of distinct stages, called Restart
Stages. These are common to all programs in the suite and the user may run, in sequence, any number
(there are six stages). Since the restart stages are common to all programs, this allows the user to run
more than one program within any analysis (e.g. the user may run the first three stages of Aqwa-Line
and then run the last two stages of Aqwa-Fer, to complete a specific type of analysis).
Aqwa-Line can also be used for geometrical scaling when comparing to model tests, and for requesting
nodal information related to the radiation/diffraction results.
When the restart facility is invoked, via a program RESTART option (see Administration and Calculation
Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)), input information must be supplied from a backing file from a
previous program run, and not from the normal data record input file. The required backing files, called
restart files, are created automatically when a program is run. This process is also used to transfer information from one program to another so that data input is minimized.
Each of the six Aqwa Restart Stages may be categorized by two classes of activity, which are:
Data Input and Processing of the Data.
Specific Analysis or Post-Processing Activity.
This Aqwa Reference Manual is mainly concerned with the format details required for the data input.
The individual Program User Manuals are concerned with the approach that should be adopted for a
specific type of motion analysis.
Drag Linearization
There are several types of nonlinear drag in Aqwa, most of which can be linearized and included in the
linear programs Aqwa-Line and Aqwa-Fer. TUBE, DISC and STUB elements have drag calculated according
to Morison's equation and can be included in both Aqwa-Line and Aqwa-Fer. Hull drag is modeled with
drag force coefficients input in Data Category 10. As with most other Stage 4 data, this is not used in
Aqwa-Line but can be included in Aqwa-Fer.
Analysis Stages
Aqwa-Line
The linearization is based on a spectrum that must be input in Data Category13. There can be only one
spectrum; i.e. a spectral group cannot be used for linearization. The spectral direction is ignored and the
same spectrum is used with each of the wave directions specified in Data Category 6.
In the linearization process the drag force term CD(1/2)v2 is replaced by CD(1/2)vVRMS where
VRMS is the rms velocity in the specified spectrum and is a factor calculated so that the total energy
dissipated is the same. Because the values of and VRMS depend on the spectrum, the revised RAOs
are strictly only applicable in that spectrum.
Aqwa-Line must be run for stages 1 to 5, either in one run or two.
If there are multiple structures they cannot be connected to each other by an additional stiffness
matrix. Connection to the ground ("structure zero") is allowed.
New RAOs including the linearized drag are output to the .LIS file, and are also available for
plotting in the AGS. Note that the new RAOs are NOT written to the database and are NOT used
for calculation of the 2nd order drift coefficients.
Aqwa-Fer
In Aqwa-Fer, the linearized drag will be applied in all spectra in all spectral groups. The same linearization
process is utilized as in Aqwa-Line.
2.2. The Restart Stages

The Aqwa suite Program Restart Stages may be identified as follows:
Stage 1 - Input of Geometric Definition and Static Environment.
This input is contained in Data Categories 1 to 5.
Stage 2 - Input of the Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters.
Stage 3 - The Radiation/Diffraction Analysis.
No input required.
Stage 4 - Input of the Analysis Environment.
Stage 5 - Motion Analysis or Post-Processing Activity.
No input required.
Stage 6 - Post-processing of loads on TUBE elements.
This input is contained in Element and Nodal Loads - ENLD (Data Category 21) (p. 243).
The Restart Stage activities for each program, together with the data that may be input, are described
in the following sections.
10
Restart Stage 1

Data Categories 1 to 5 - Geometric Definition and Static Environment
The primary function of these data categories is to describe the structure being modeled. This includes
the mass and inertia of the structure and its geometry, from which the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic
properties are calculated. In addition, the coordinates of all positions referenced in subsequent data
categories and the parameters relating to the environment (for example, density of water) are input.
These parameters are normally considered to remain constant for an analysis of a particular structure.
All the Aqwa programs require Data Categories 1 to 5, if starting an analysis from Stage 1.
The data that may be input via data categories 1 to 5 are as follows:
Data Category 1
Node and coordinate information
Data Category 2
Element topology
Data Category 3
Material properties
Data Category 4
Geometric properties
Data Category 5
Water depth
Water density
Gravitational acceleration constant
The following sections show the specific required data when including tethers in an analysis
Tethers may be included in a simulation either in a towing operation, or in an installed condition, subjected to wave environmental loading. Installed tethers may go slack and impact during operation.
Tethers are considered by Aqwa as flexible tubes whose diameters are small compared to the wavelength.
Tethers are classified as a type of mooring.
The analysis of towed tethers is an independent process and requires no backing files from other programs in the Aqwa suite. For installed tethers, an Aqwa-Line run is required for diffracting structures
but for non-diffracting structures which do not require an Aqwa-Line analysis, a tube model can be
used.
As tethers are regarded as a mooring capability, a nominal structure must be input for towed tethers.
This defines the position of the axis system, in which the towed tether displacements are output, and
in which the eigenvalue solution is performed. The structure plays no other part in the analysis.
The modelling techniques are based on the following limitations and assumptions of the program.
11
Analysis Stages
No Axial Motion - Towed tethers are not considered to move in the axial direction or rotate about the
axis of the tether; i.e., displacements of the tether are 2 translations and 2 rotations at each node. These
displacements are considered as small motions from the tether axis (TLA q.v.)
Note
Although current in the axial direction will produce stabilizing effects, if the tether spring
at the ends are very soft, large rotations (>30 degrees) may be produced, which will invalidate the analysis. The program also takes full account of the change in encounter frequency,
due to the component of the current in the direction of the waves.
Axial Tension - Both the wall and effective tensions in a towed tether are assumed to be zero, and hence
the bending stiffness is purely structural. The tether responses, especially in the fundamental mode, may
be inaccurate if this tension is significant.
Note
This also means that the tether may not be analyzed, if any point moves to a depth where
the effective tension is significant, i.e. for upending.
Small Motions - It is assumed that the lateral and rotational motions of the tether from the defined tether
axis are small. This means that the program is unsuitable for large rotations about the Y or Z axis, e.g. for
upending. However, full account is taken of the phase shift of the waves, due to movement in the direction
of the wave/wave spectrum.
Mass/Stiffness - The mass/stiffness ratio of any element must not be too small. Very short elements inherently have small mass/stiffness ratios. This gives rise to very high frequencies. These high frequencies may
cause stability problems and roundoff errors in the programs. A general rule is that natural periods of less
than 1/100th second are not allowed. These periods are output from the eigenvalue analysis.
Very short elements should therefore be modelled with a value of Young's modulus reduced so that
no periods less than 1/100th second are present. The user can check that the bending of short elements
is still small, using the graphical output.
Timestep - The timestep must be small enough to resolve the response motion of the tether. This includes
any transients that may be present either initially or, more importantly, throughout the analysis. Although
a good rule of thumb is that the timestep should be 1/10th of the period of any response, the best
method of checking the timestep is to re-run a short simulation with half the timestep and compare the
bending moments or stresses for both runs. These should be approximately the same for both runs.
Timesteps of 0.25 seconds are typically used.
For towed tethers, the local axis (TLA) must be defined parallel to, and in the same direction as, the
X axis of the fixed reference axes (FRA) i.e. XY in the water plane and Z vertical. The X axis coincides
with the zero current wave direction. The nodes of the tether increase with positive X. The last node
of the tether, at zero FRA displacement, lies at the TLA origin. For installed tethers, the TLA is parallel
to the FRA, when the tether is vertical. In general, the TLA X axis goes from the anchor node to the
attachment node, the Y axis is in the plane of the XY FRA, and the Z axis follows the right hand rule.
The TLA origin is at the anchor node.
12
Restart Stage 1
Input for Towed Tethers

Data Category 1
The coordinates of the nominal vessel center of gravity. This should always be zero, but must be input.
The coordinates of the trailing end of the tether. The X coordinate should be minus the total tether length.
The Y value must be zero. Z value may be input as zero but see below.
The Z coordinate may be input to define the TLA (tether axis) above or below the water surface. Input of
a Z coordinate will mean that:
the eigenvalue analysis will be performed with the tether axis at this Z value. Depending on the value
of Z, the tether may be
completely out of water (Z greater than the largest element diameter)
partially submerged
fully submerged.
all displacements will be output with reference to this Z value.
the initial position of the tether (for the motion response analysis stage) will have this Z value. It is not
recommended to "drop" the tether into the water from a height ( positive Z value) as this will produce
large initial transients.
The relative coordinates of the towed tether nodes are defined along the X axis, with the Y values zero.
Data Category 2
A point mass element to represent the vessel
Data Category 3
A mass to represent the vessel
One or more densities for the tether elements
Data Category 4
Inertia of the point mass representing the vessel
Diameter, thickness, drag and added mass coefficients for each different tether element
Data Category 5
Water depth
Water density
Gravitational acceleration constant
13
Analysis Stages
Input for Installed Tethers

For installed tethers the vessel must be described using the standard data requirements. For the tether
itself the following additional data is required.
Data Category 1
The coordinates of the tether attachment points to the vessel
The coordinates of the tether anchor points
The relative coordinates of the installed tether nodes are defined along the Z axis, with the X and Y values
zero.
Data Category 2
No additional data required for the tether
Data Category 3
One or more densities for the tether elements
Data Category 4
Diameter, thickness, drag and added mass coefficients for each different tether element
Data Category 5
No additional data required for the tether

Data Categories 6 to 8 - the Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters
The data input in these data categories relate to the equation of motion of a diffracting structure or
structures in regular waves, for a range of frequencies and directions.
The data that may be input via Data Categories 6 to 8 are as follows:
Data Category 6
Required Frequencies
Required Directions
Data Category 7
Linear Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix
The Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium
The Z coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium
Added Mass Matrix
Radiation Damping Matrix
14
Restart Stage 2
Diffraction Forces
Froude-Krylov Forces
Response Motions (or RAOs)
Data Category 8 - No Input or Drift Coefficients
Usually, not all of the above data are required for a particular mode of analysis, in which case, the user
may simply omit the data which are not applicable.
Note
Although the Radiation/Diffraction parameters calculated by Aqwa-Line can be transferred
to other programs in the Aqwa suite, this is not mandatory. This means that, if the backing
file produced by an Aqwa-Line run is not available (i.e. Aqwa-Line has not been run previously)
or if the user wishes to input values from a source other than Aqwa-Line, he may do so in
these data categories.
The following sections show the required data input for the available modes of analysis:
Input for Aqwa-Line with no previous Aqwa-Line runs

The Radiation/Diffraction parameters (i.e. added mass, wave damping, drift coefficients, etc) are to be
calculated.
Data Category 6
Required Directions
Data Category 7 - The Z coordinate of the center of gravity at equilibrium
Data Category 8 - No input required
Input for Aqwa-Line adding additional frequencies to a previous Aqwa-Line

run
If the whole range of frequencies at which the parameters are defined is specified in a single run, large
computer costs can be incurred if the program has to be re-run for any reason. Aqwa-Line therefore
permits the user to specify selected frequencies in the initial run and additional frequencies in subsequent
runs.
If Aqwa-Line has been run with the data input described in the previous section, the program may be
restarted at RESTART Stage 2. This is done by using the RESTART option and RESTART data record The
RESTART Data Record (p. 35), and omitting Data Categories 1 to 5. The user then specifies, in Data
Category 6, only the additional frequencies at which the parameters are to be calculated.
Data Category 6 - One or more additional frequencies
15
Analysis Stages
Note that the frequencies input in Aqwa-Line runs must differ from those in previous runs or they will
be automatically rejected. As all parameters are defined for a unique range of directions, these directions
may not be redefined General Description (p. 71).
Input for Aqwa-Line specifying known values of the radiation/diffraction

analysis parameters
The new user is advised to ignore this facility
Known Radiation/Diffraction parameters may be input in Data Categories 7 and 8. This applies when
using Aqwa-Line either initially or in RESTART mode (see notes A and B).
This facility may be used to input additional values of the parameters when the user is unable to describe
the structure fully with a conventional Radiation/Diffraction model (e.g. additional damping or added
mass due to a structural appendage). Additional linear stiffness is often used where the structure contributes to the water plane area but not to the Radiation/Diffraction model.
The user may also wish to extend the lower range of frequencies (where analysis costs can be prohibitive)
with experimental data.
Recovery from errors may also be achieved by manual input of previous results where the backing file
has been lost.
The data definition keyword (see Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters and Stiffness Matrix - WFS*
(Data Category 7) (p. 85) and Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8) (p. 101)) indicates
whether Aqwa-Line will:
(a) OMIT the calculation of those parameters which are input, or
(b) ADD the input parameters to those calculated.
In case (a), input of the linear hydrostatic stiffness matrix and its associated buoyancy force means that
Aqwa-Line will omit the calculations of these parameters. Input of the other parameters (which are all
frequency dependent) means that Aqwa-Line will omit all calculations at this particular frequency.
Data Category 6 - One or more frequencies
Data Category 7 - Input known parameters
Data Category 8 - Input known parameters
All parameters input, together with those calculated by Aqwa-Line, will be contained in the backing
file as input for further runs. The user should refer to the individual Data Category description for details
of the actual data record input format.
Input for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut with results from a previous AqwaLine run

The relevant Radiation/Diffraction information will be stored on the backing file created by a previous
Aqwa-Line run.
16
Restart Stage 2
Input for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut with results from a source other than

Aqwa-Line
All data appropriate to the analysis may be input in Data Categories 6 to 8. The parameters which are
input will depend on the type of analysis and the particular structure analyzed.
Data Category 6
Required Directions
Data Category 7
Linear Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix
The Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium
The Z coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium
Added Mass Matrix
Radiation Damping Matrix
Diffraction Forces
Froude-Krylov Forces
Response Motions (or RAOs)
Input for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut with results from a previous AqwaLine run and a source other than Aqwa-Line
If the user wishes to APPEND to or CHANGE the parameters calculated by a previous Aqwa-Line run for
the current analysis, this is achieved by using the backing file from a previous Aqwa-Line run (i.e.
automatically read), together with specifying the parameters to be appended or changed.
To APPEND to the parameters calculated in a previous run, additional frequencies which differ from
those existing may be input in Data Category 6, together with values of the appropriate frequency dependent parameters in Data Categories 7 and 8, at these additional frequencies. Note that, as all parameters are defined for a unique range of directions, these directions may not be re-defined (see Frequency and Directions Table - FDR* (Data Category 6) (p. 71)).
To CHANGE the parameters calculated in a previous run, these parameters are simply input in Data
Categories 7 and 8 and, depending on the type of input, (see Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters
and Stiffness Matrix - WFS* (Data Category 7) (p. 85) and Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category
8) (p. 101)), the parameters will be either overwritten with the input values or become the sum of input
values and original values.
17
Analysis Stages
Data Category 7 - Input Appended or Changed Data
Input for Towed Tethers

Towed tethers require specific data to describe the towing vessel.
Data Category 6
No input required (use NONE)
Data Category 7
Nominal linear hydrostatic stiffness matrix for the vessel
The depth below the still water level of the center of gravity, which must be the same as the coordinate
of the trailing end of the tether, input in data category 1
The hydrostatic force on the vessel, which must be equal to the weight (i.e. mass * acceleration due to
gravity)
Data Category 8
No input required (use NONE)
Input for Installed Tethers

For installed tethers no additional data is required.

Stage 3 is the Radiation/Diffraction analysis performed by the program Aqwa-Line. It has no analysis
activity in any of the other programs. When performing a Stage 3 analysis with Aqwa-Line, no input
data categories are required for this stage. If starting from Stage 1, then only the Stage 1 and Stage 2
data categories (i.e. Data Categories 1 to 8) are required.
If the user has progressed to Stage 2 within Aqwa-Line and wishes to perform the Stage 3 Radiation/Diffraction analysis alone, with no subsequent post-processing (i.e. Stages 4 and 5), then only the Preliminary Data Category is required and the associated restart data record will start at Stage 3 and finish at
Stage 3 (see The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0) (p. 33)).

The data input in these data categories relates to the type of analysis required and the program being
used.
The data that may be input via Data Categories 9 to 18 may be summarised for each program as follows:
Aqwa-Line
Data Category 9 - Drift Added Mass and Damping (only used for scaling, Data Category 16)
18
Restart Stage 4
Data Category 13 - No input required except:
Spectrum Information (PSMZ/JONS/JONH/UDEF), only used when linearizing Morison drag using the LDRG
option
Data Category 16 - Geometrical Changes
Length Scaling of Results
Mass Scaling of Results
Change of Body's Center of Gravity
Change of Body's Inertia
Definition of New Hydrodynamic Reference Point
Data Category 18 - Printing Options for Nodal RAOs
Aqwa-Librium
Data Category 9 - Drift Added Mass and Damping
Data Category 10 - Hull Drag
Current Drag Coefficients
Wind Drag Coefficients
Thruster Forces
Data Category 11 - Current Velocity Profile and Direction
Data Category 12 - Elimination of Degrees of Freedom
Articulations between Bodies
Articulations between Global Points and Bodies
Data Category 13 - Wave Spectra Details
Data Category 14 - Mooring Lines
Data Category 15 - Motion Analysis Starting Positions
19
Analysis Stages
Data Category 16 - Iteration Limits
Data Category 18 - Printing Options for Nodal Positions
Aqwa-Fer
Thruster Forces
Data Category 13 - Wave Spectra Details
Data Category 14 - Hawser/Mooring Lines
Aqwa-Naut
Thruster Forces
Data Category 11 - Current Velocity, Direction and Profile
Wind Velocity and Direction
20
Restart Stage 4
Data Category 13N - Regular Wave Properties - default analysis
Data Category 13 - Wave Spectrum Details - irregular wave analysis
Data Category 14 - Hawser/Mooring Lines
Data Category 16 - Time Integration Parameters
Data Category 17 - Hydrodynamic Scaling Factors for Morison Elements
Data Category 18 - Printing Options for Nodal positions
Aqwa-Drift
Yaw Rate Drag Coefficient
Thruster Forces
Data Category 11 - Current/Wind Velocity and Direction (only when no spectrum)
Data Category 13 - Wave Spectrum Details
Data Category 14 - Hawser/Mooring lines
Data Category 15 - Motion Analysis Starting Positions for both Wave and Drift Frequency Motions
Data Category 16 - Time Integration Parameters
Additional Data Requirements for Towed and Installed Tethers

For Aqwa-Librium, Aqwa-Naut and Aqwa-Drift the following data is required in addition to whatever
may be necessary for other modelling requirements, as given in the descriptions above.
21
Analysis Stages
Data Category 9
No additional input required
Data Category 10
Data Category 11 (for towed tethers)
Current speed and direction
Tow speed and direction
Data Category 12
Tow speed and direction
Data Category 14
Description of tether elements and boundary conditions
Fatigue and extreme value information (for towed tethers in Aqwa-Drift only)
Initial position of the vessel, which must be the same as the coordinate of the center of gravity
Data Category 16
Slam coefficient multiplier if required
Data Category 18
Frequency of tether information output to both the listing file and the plot file
Start and finish times for the statistical/fatigue analysis (for towed tethers in Aqwa-Drift only)

Following the input of analysis dependent parameters at Stage 4, Stage 5 performs the particular form
of analysis. No further input data is needed save the finishing restart level given on the Restart data
record (The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0) (p. 33)).
Note that the user need not progress through the analysis procedure one stage at a time. Each Aqwa
program may be run with multiple stages but, for the new user, it is best to progress slowly until confidence is gained in using the programs.
22
Restart Stage 6

Stage 6 is a post-processing stage used to calculate the loads on Morison elements for use in a structural analysis. At present, this is only available for TUBE elements in Aqwa-Drift and Naut.
23
24
Chapter 3: Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

Data input in the Aqwa suite of programs is divided into two or more sections called data categories.
All programs in the Aqwa suite have 18 main data categories. However, many of these data categories
will not be applicable in normal use. Only in highly specialized applications will the user need knowledge
of them all.
The first data category is called the Preliminary Data Category. This supplies the job type, user identification and options (which control the overall administration of the program).
The remaining data categories (referred to as Data Categories 1 to 18) consist of:
A data category header, which tells the program to expect a new category of data with (usually) a different
format of input.
One or more data records containing numerical input categorized by the name of the data category
keyword, for example:
_(1) Optional User Identifier (A2) (see Optional User Identifier (p. 27))
|
|
_(2) Compulsory Data Category Keyword (A4) (see Compulsory Data Category Keyword (p.
|
|
|
|
2
5|
11 |
- --- -- ---- ---- ---------------------|X|XXX| |XXXX|COOR|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX )
- --- -- ---- ---- ---------------------|
.
)
.
|
.
)
.
|
.
) etc.
---------------------------------------|
numerical input.....
) to 80
---------------------------------------|
) columns
- --- ---------------------------------|X|END|
)
- --- ---------------------------------|
|
|
|_(3) Compulsory END Code (see Compulsory 'END' Statement (p. 27))
The 'X' characters in columns 1-4, 7-10, etc. indicate that no data is to be input in these columns.
Note that the data category keyword for Data Category 1 is 'COOR' (COORdinate positions). The
keyword will be different for other data categories.
The precise format for every data record in every data category is given in the following sections:
The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0) (p. 33)
Node Number and Coordinates (Data Category 1) (p. 37)
Element Topology - ELM* (Data Category 2) (p. 45)
25
Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

Material Properties - MATE (Data Category 3) (p. 63)
Geometric Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4) (p. 65)
Constant Parameters - GLOB (Data Category 5) (p. 69)
Frequency and Directions Table - FDR* (Data Category 6) (p. 71)
Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters and Stiffness Matrix - WFS* (Data Category 7) (p. 85)
Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8) (p. 101)
Drift Motion Parameters - DRM* (Data Category 9) (p. 107)
Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster Forces - HLD* (Data Category 10) (p. 113)
Current/Wind Parameters - ENVR (Data Category 11) (p. 123)
Motion Constraints on Structures - CONS (Data Category 12) (p. 127)
Wind/Wave Spectrum Definition - SPEC (Data Category 13) (p. 135)
Regular Wave (Aqwa-Naut) - WAVE (Data Category 13N) (p. 157)
Mooring Lines and Attachment Points - MOOR (Data Category 14) (p. 161)
Starting Conditions Definition - STRT (Data Category 15) (p. 201)
Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Drift) - STRT (Data Category 15D) (p. 205)
Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Naut) - STRT (Data Category 15N) (p. 211)
Time Integration Parameters - TINT (Data Category 16) (p. 215)
Aqwa-Librium Iteration Parameters - LMTS (Data Category 16B) (p. 219)
Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data Category 16L) (p. 223)
Hydrodynamic Parameters for Non-Diffracting Elements - HYDC (Data Category 17) (p. 227)
Additional File Output - PROP (Data Category 18) (p. 231)
Element and Nodal Loads - ENLD (Data Category 21) (p. 243)
Options for to be used when running the Aqwa suite are discussed in Options for Use in Running Aqwa
Programs (p. 247).
3.1. Features Common to All Data Categories

The following features are common to all data categories:
3.1.1. Optional User Identifier
3.1.2. Compulsory Data Category Keyword
3.1.3. Compulsory 'END' Statement
3.1.4. Format Requirements
26
Features Common to All Data Categories
3.1.1. Optional User Identifier

This two character field is not used by the Aqwa suite of programs and is available for the convenience
of the user who may label the data record data category with any two characters. It may be left blank,
but many users find it helpful to put the data category number of the data category in this field.
3.1.2. Compulsory Data Category Keyword

The four character data category keyword is a predefined abbreviation or mnemonic indicating the
type of data that is to be input, e.g. COOR - COORdinate positions, MATE - MATErial properties, etc.
Every data category must contain at least a data category keyword. If a particular application of the
program does not require the information pertaining to a certain data category, then the user must
enter 'NONE' as the data category keyword to indicate this.
3.1.3. Compulsory 'END' Statement

The program must be able to recognize the end of the information contained in a data category. To
ensure this, the user must enter the characters 'END' on the last data record of every data category (in
columns 2-4).
3.1.4. Format Requirements

All Aqwa ascii input files will accept the following:
Comments starting in any column, but the 1st non-blank character must be one of * ! /
Blank lines
Upper or lower case
'Free format' files, i.e. those with values separated by commas or blanks, will also accept TAB characters.
In the descriptions of the data format for the Data Category Headers and Data Records, the following
syntax is used to describe the type of data required, and how many characters are provided for each
field:
An - Alphanumeric with n characters; e.g. A4
In - Integer (no decimal point) value with n digits; e.g. I5
Fx.y - Real number, with or without decimal point, with x digits in total, and y digits of precision after
the decimal point. Can be provided in exponent format. The precision of the real number is at the users
discretion, within the bounds of how many digits are available for that particular data item. E.g. F10.0
Real number formats may have an optional preceding value that allows for repeating of that format.
Thus 3F10.0 is for three values each with 10 digits.
Note that for some data the F prefix may be replaced by E; e.g. 6E10.0 These two forms represent
the same definition, but E is generally used where the magnitude of the numbers is expected to require
exponent form.
27
3.2. Classification of Data Categories 1 TO 18

This section is intended to give an overall understanding of the general format and function of the input
data required for an analysis of a particular structure or structures and to outline which information
usually remains constant and which information changes for each run of the program. The user should
refer to the sections on Data Preparation contained in each of the Aqwa Program User Manuals for
details of data input required for a particular type of analysis.
Note that in the following sections the term 'backing file' is used to describe a file which is read in by
the program at one stage of the analysis having been output by the same or another program in the
Aqwa suite from a previous run. This transference of data is essentially transparent to the user as it is
only required to indicate whether the file exists, or not, for the program to read this file automatically.
3.2.1. Stopping and Starting the Program During an Analysis

In order to minimize the computer costs, all programs in the Aqwa suite have the optional facility of
stopping and starting at various stages of the analysis. These stages are referred to in the documentation
as Restart Stages.
This facility enables the user to check the results of the preliminary stages and detect any misinterpretation of the data input instructions or errors before the more expensive stages of the analysis are performed. When the user is satisfied that the results are correct, the data categories relating to the previous
stages are removed for the remaining part of the analysis, as they are stored in a backing file.
When errors are detected, the user instructs the program to start the analysis again, at any of the preceding stages, before the error occurred. This process is referred to in the documentation as a restart.
If the previous stage was correctly performed, the user instructs the program to execute the next stage,
i.e. simply continue the analysis.
Use of the RESTART process thus implies that information is available on a backing file from a previous
program run and hence is also used to transfer information from one program to another program in
the Aqwa suite.
The data input in Data Categories 1 to 18 fall into three main categories which also correspond to Restart
Stages 1, 2 and 4. These categories are described in Data Categories 1 to 5 - Geometric Definition and
Static Environment (p. 28), Data Categories 6 to 8 - The Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters (p. 29),
and Data Categories 9 to 18 - Definition of Analysis-Dependent Parameters (p. 29) in the following text.
It is worth noting that Stages 3 and 5 are those which perform specific analysis tasks.
3.2.2. Data Categories 1 to 5 - Geometric Definition and Static Environment

The primary function of these data categories is to describe the structure or structures being modeled.
This includes the mass and inertia of the structure and its geometry from which the hydrostatic and
hydrodynamic properties are calculated.
In addition, the coordinates of all positions referenced in subsequent data categories and the parameters
relating to the static environment (e.g. density of water) are input.
These parameters are normally considered to remain constant throughout the analysis of a particular
structure. This means that for further program runs these data categories must be removed, as the information will be contained in a backing file and will be read automatically.
28
Default Values Assumed by the Program
3.2.3. Data Categories 6 to 8 - The Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters

The information in these data categories relates to the equation of motion of a diffracting structure in
regular waves.
For Aqwa-Line, the input specifies a range of frequencies and directions at which these parameters are
to be calculated.
For Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut, these parameters are read from backing file automatically or are input
manually.
Note that, although the parameters calculated by Aqwa-Line can be transferred automatically to other
programs in the Aqwa suite, this is not mandatory. This means that if the backing file produced by an
Aqwa-Line run is not available, e.g. Aqwa-Line has not been run previously, or the user wishes to input
parameters from a source other than Aqwa-Line, he may do so in these data categories.
These parameters usually remain constant for an analysis of a particular structure. This means that once
the values of the Radiation/Diffraction analysis have been calculated or input, these data categories must
be removed, as the information will be contained in a backing file and will be read automatically.
3.2.4. Data Categories 9 to 18 - Definition of Analysis-Dependent Parameters

The information input in these data categories is dependent on the type of analysis and the external
forces acting on the structure, additional to those due to wave diffraction or radiation. Additional hydrodynamic coefficients may also be required for analyses involving drift frequency and nonlinear current/wind forces.
These fall into the following categories, any or none of which may be required for a particular analysis
(see Default Values Assumed by the Program (p. 29)):
accuracy and conditions of analysis, e.g. initial position of structure
hydrodynamic coefficients for drift frequency forces or nonlinear current/wind forces
environmental conditions of current, wind, waves
external constraints of mooring lines or articulations
hydrodynamic coefficient multipliers for parametric studies
requests for additional output information
3.3. Default Values Assumed by the Program

The following sections describe the default behavior when various actions are taken:
3.3.1. Omission of Data Categories
3.3.2. Omission of Data Records within a Data Category
3.3.3. Omission of Fields on a Data Record
3.3.4. Default Values
29
3.3.1. Omission of Data Categories

As explained in Compulsory Data Category Keyword (p. 27), the user should enter 'NONE' for the data
category keyword, if the information contained in the data category is not relevant to his application.
Then simply omit the rest of the data category. This is quite common when running Aqwa programs.
Some data categories cannot be meaningfully omitted, for example, Data Categories 1, 2, 3 and 4 in a
Stage 1 analysis. (If the user does enter 'NONE' for the data category keyword, error messages will be
issued saying that the data is missing.)
The user should note that whenever 'NONE' is entered, the program will automatically supply default
values for all the quantities associated with that data category. The user may therefore use this mechanism as a default facility (but see Default Values (p. 30) below).
3.3.2. Omission of Data Records within a Data Category

The user may omit a data record from within a data category if the information contained on the data
record is not relevant to his application. This is quite common when running Aqwa programs.
Some data records cannot be meaningfully omitted, for example, the frequency data record (defining
the frequencies to be analyzed) in Data Category 6. (If the user does omit this data record, the program
will assume zero frequencies to be analyzed and will terminate normally without actually doing anything!)
The user should note that if a data record is omitted, the program may automatically supply default
values for all the quantities associated with that data record. The user may therefore use this mechanism
as a default facility (but see Default Values (p. 30) below).
3.3.3. Omission of Fields on a Data Record

Certain fields on a data record may be left blank. The program will supply appropriate default values.
The is the basic default mechanism for the Aqwa suite (but see Default Values (p. 30) below). The fields
which may be left blank are indicated in the appropriate places in the text (The Preliminary Data (Data
Category 0) (p. 33)).
Note that, due to a peculiarity of the Fortran language, the program cannot distinguish between a blank
field and one in which a zero value has been entered. Therefore, if zero is entered in a field which the
manual indicates can take default values, the default value (which may be non-zero) will be invoked.
3.3.4. Default Values

The actual numerical values supplied by the program are given in the appropriate places in the text
(The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0) (p. 33)).
Warning
THE DEFAULT VALUES SUPPLIED ARE IN S.I. UNITS
Therefore, where Aqwa returns non-zero default values (for physical quantities), only users employing
S.I. units may make use of the default facility.
In any event, all data either input by the user or assumed by the program are automatically sent to the
listing file, unless the user specifically requests otherwise.
30
The Data Category Series for One or More Structures
3.4. The Data Category Series for One or More Structures

3.4.1. Data Category Series - Definition
In the case of Data Categories 2, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10, all input data refers to that associated with a particular
structure. Therefore, each structure has its own data category, e.g. if there are three structures being
analyzed there will be Data Categories 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 etc. Such a group of data
categories (i.e. 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 or 6.1, 6.2, 6.3) is known as a data category series. The data category keyword
indicates this by having the structure number incorporated into the data category keyword, e.g. for
Data Category 6 (Frequency and Direction Tables) we have, for three structures, FDR1 as the data category
keyword for Structure 1, FRD2 as the data category keyword for Structure 2, etc. The documentation
will refer to these as Data Category FDR* to mean all three data categories, i.e. the Data Category Series
6.1, 6.2, and 6.3.
3.4.2. The Data Category Series Terminator - FINI

The number of structures is defined by the number of Data Category 2's where the structural, hydrodynamic and hydrostatic model is input, e.g. if the user inputs two data categories (Data Categories 2.1
and 2.2), the number of structures will have been defined as 2. However, as the program is unable to
anticipate that Data Category 2.3 will not be input, the Data Category 2 series must be terminated with
a 'FINI' data record, that is, a data record formatted as above with 'FINI' (FINIsh) as the data category
keyword. However, if the maximum number (50) of structures is input, the 'FINI' data record must be
omitted, as termination of the data category series is then mandatory.
3.4.3. Omission of Data Categories within a Data Category Series

The data category series terminator 'FINI' must subsequently be used, if necessary, to terminate the
series of Data Categories 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The program expects the number of data categories input
to be equal to the number of structures defined. If this is not the case, the last data category input
must be followed by a FINI data category series terminator. For example, if the user has three structures
and wishes to omit the data for Structure 2 from Data Category 9, the remaining data categories (9.1
and 9.3) must be followed by the data category terminator 'FINI'. If the user omits data for Structures
1 and 2 then the only remaining data category (9.3) must be followed by the data category terminator
'FINI'. However, if all Data Category 9s are omitted, the data category keyword 'NONE' must be used
to indicate that there is no input for any of the defined structures (see also Compulsory Data Category
Keyword (p. 27)).
31
32
Chapter 4: The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0)

The function of this Data Category is to define the overall administration parameters of the analysis.
This includes the type of analysis (JOB data record), various options (OPTIONS data record) controlling
facilities, printing etc, and the definition of the stages of the analysis at which the user wishes to start
and finish (RESTART data record).
The JOB data record defines the program and analysis type of the analysis that the user wishes to perform.
It is also used to input a 4-letter user-defined identifier for a particular run. As Aqwa-Drift, Aqwa-Fer
and Aqwa-Librium have two distinct types of analysis (drift and wave frequency for Aqwa-Drift/Fer and
static and dynamic stability at drift frequency for Aqwa-Librium) the user is able to select which type
of analysis to perform.
The TITLE data record is used simply to input a title for the program run. This is stored and output at
various stages, including the graphical plotting, and the annotation of the results.
The OPTIONS data record enables the user to select additional optional facilities and to control the
quantity of printing output by the analysis. Note that the OPTIONS relating to printing are supplemented
by further options in Data Category 18 (printing options). The latter are used to control output where
more detailed information is required to define its extent and format.
In order to minimize the computer costs, all programs in the Aqwa suite have the facility of stopping
and starting at various stages of the analysis. These stages are referred to as Restart Stages and are
specified using the RESTART data record.
4.1. The JOB Data Record

1
5
11
17
--- - ---- -- ---- -- ---|JOB|X|UDJI|XX|DRIF|XX|WFRQ|
--- - ---- -- ---- -- ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3)Analysis Type(A4)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Program Name(A4)
|
|
|
|_(1)User Defined Job Identifier(A4)
|
|_Compulsory data record keyword(A3)
(1) The 4-letter code is for the convenience of the user and is not used by the program. If the user
wishes to have the same title for several runs, the 4-letter character identifier (which should always be
unique) enables the user to distinguish between these runs. This is particularly relevant when using the
graphics, as this code is output on every plot.
(2) An abbreviation of the program name must be input to specify the overall data input format to be
expected by the program. If left blank, or the incorrect name is input, the program will output an error
message and abort after the preliminary data category has been read. The accepted abbreviations for
the program names are as follows:
Aqwa-Drift = DRIF
33
The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0)

Aqwa-Fer = FER
Aqwa-Line = LINE
Aqwa-Librium = LIBR
Aqwa-Naut = NAUT
(3) As all of the programs have two distinct types of analysis, the user may state which type of analysis
is required for each run. If this field is left blank, then the default analysis type will be used. These defaults
and the optional analysis types are as follows:
Aqwa-Line Default - Radiation/Diffraction analysis
Option 1 - FIXD - Structure fixed
Aqwa-Librium Default - Static AND dynamic stability
Option 1 - STAT - Static stability only
Option 2 -DYNA - Dynamic stability only
Aqwa-Drift Default - Drift frequency motions only
Option 1 - WFRQ - Drift frequency AND wave frequency motions
Aqwa-Fer Default - Drift frequency AND wave frequency motions
Option 1 - DRFT - Drift frequency motions only
Option 2 - WFRQ - Wave frequency motions only
Aqwa-Naut Default - Time history regular wave response
Option 1 - IRRE - Time history analysis in irregular waves. This applies to both diffracting structures
(when convolution is used) and Morison structures. Note that in Aqwa-Naut, wave drift force is not included in either regular or irregular waves.
4.2. The TITLE Data Record

1
6
21
----- --------------- ---------------------------------------------|TITLE|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|THIS IS A TITLE OF THE PROGRAM RUN
...
----- -------------- -----------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|_Title to be Used for Annotation of Results(15A4)
|
|_Compulsory Data Record Keyword.
4.3. The OPTIONS Data Record

1
9
14
19
24
29
------- - ---- - ---- - ---- - ---- - ---|OPTIONS|X|OPT1|X|OPT2|X|OPT3|X|OPT4|X|END |
------- - ---- - ---- - ---- - ---- - ---|
|
|
|
34
The RESTART Data Record

|
|_(1)One or more OPTIONS. Format of each Option(A4)
|
|_Compulsory Data Record Keyword.
(1) Up to 14 options may be input on each options data record. Each data record must have the data
record keyword OPTIONS in columns 1-7 and the last option on the last OPTIONS data record must be
END as shown above. In practice, only a few options are used for any one run. It is therefore extremely
unusual to input more than one OPTIONS data record.
The list of options common to all programs, and those which are have special applicability for a certain
program are listed for each program in Options for Use in Running Aqwa Programs (p. 247).
4.4. The RESTART Data Record

Note
If this data record is present a REST option must be present in the list of options on the
OPTIONS data record (see The OPTIONS Data Record (p. 34)).
1
9 12
21
------- - --- --- ------ ----------|RESTART|X|
|
|XXXXXX|FILENAME
------- - --- --- ------ ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3)Optional. Name of database to be copied (without extension)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Finish Stage, i.e. Finish at the End of this Stage (I1)
|
|
|
|_(1)Start stage, i.e. Start at the Beginning of this Stage (I1)
|
|_Compulsory Data Record Keyword
(1) The start stage will depend on which stages have been previously run. Stages in the program may
not be omitted. This means that the finish stage of the previous run must either be the previous stage
or a later stage in the program analysis.
When errors are detected, the user may start the analysis again at any of the preceding stages before
the error occurred. If the previous stage was correctly performed, the user instructs the program to
execute the next stage, i.e. simply to continue the analysis.
Note that as no analysis is performed within Stage 3 (except for Aqwa-Line) a run starting and finishing
at Stage 3 may be used, in conjunction with the PRDL option, to print out the contents of the restart
file on the listing file. As the restart file is a binary file and cannot be printed out directly, this is very
useful if there is some question as to the contents.
See Analysis Stages (p. 9) for a description and list of restart stages for each program.
(3) The program will automatically copy any relevant files with this name to use for the current run.
This may be .RES, .EQP and/or .POS, depending on the program which is being run. For example, using
the name ABTEST1 in the Aqwa-Fer data file AFTEST2.DAT will result in:
ABTEST1.RES being copied to AFTEST2.RES
ABTEST1.EQP being copied to AFTEST2.EQP.
35
The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0)

Note that the RDEP option is still required to read the .EQP file that has been copied.
If an extension is used, for example ABTEST1.RES, only that one individual file will be copied.
36
Chapter 5: Node Number and Coordinates (Data Category 1)

The function of this data category is to define a table of coordinate positions on the structure or fixed
in space, referred to in later data categories, e.g. Element Topology (Data Category 2) used for modeling
the structure. These positions are referred to in the documentation as nodes. A node is defined by an
integer number (called a node number) and three Cartesian coordinates which are associated with this
number.
The node number is used only as an index to the values of the coordinate positions and therefore may
be any numbers which are convenient to the user. Node numbers do not have to be in any order, sequenced, or referenced by another data category.
Node numbers must be unique.
Although the user will find that a series of random integers is quite valid, the hydrodynamic and hydrostatic modeling of the structure in Data Category 2 can be made considerably easier by a logical ordering
of the node numbers.
For 32-bit Aqwa, there can be up to 22000 nodes explicitly defined, or 44000 if one symmetry data record
is used, or 88000 if two symmetry data records are used. For 64-bit Aqwa, there can be up to 46000
nodes explicitly defined, or 92000 if one symmetry data record is used, or 184000 if two symmetry data
records are used.
When The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association (p. 40) (STRC) is not used, the coordinate
positions in this data category are not specifically associated with any one structure nor with any one
element within that structure. This means that many elements may reference the same node number
and several structures may also reference the same node number. This does not mean that the structures
are joined together at a node, but that the structures are completely independent unless specified
otherwise (for example, Data Category 12 (Constraints) and Data Category 14 (Mooring Lines)). When
a structure moves, the node moves with the structure.
When used, The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association (p. 40) (STRC) provides a means
to associate particular nodes with individual structures.
5.2. Data Category Header

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|COOR|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
|
|_Compulsory Data Category Keyword(A4)
|
|
|_Optional User Identifier(A2)
37
Node Number and Coordinates (Data Category 1)
5.3. The Coordinate Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------|X|
| |
4|
|
| 54.6
| ... |
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------|X|END| | 23|
3|
10| 54.6
| ... |
4.5
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|-------|----------------------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
(5)3 Coordinate Increments (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)3 Coordinates for Start Node (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Increment for Node Number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Number of Nodes to be Generated(I5)
| |
|
| |
|_(1)Starting Node Number(I4)
| |
| |_Optional User Identifier(A2)
|
|_Compulsory END on Last Data Record in data category (A3)
(1) This is the node number (N1) whose coordinate position is given by the values X, Y, Z (4).
(2) Leave blank (as in first data record shown above) if only 1 node is to be generated. A total of N2
nodes are generated automatically if this number (N2) is greater than 1. The Nth node is generated:
with a node number N1+ (N-1)N3
with coordinates X+(N-1)DX, Y+(N-1)DY, Z+(N-1)DZ
(3) Leave blank (as in first data record shown above) if only one node is to be generated. If this field is
left blank when generating nodes, then a value of 1 is assumed for this Nodal Increment (N3).
(4) Coordinate Position (X,Y,Z) associated with node number N1 (1).
(5) Leave blank (as in first data record shown above) if only 1 node is to be generated. These 3 values
are referred to as DX,DY,DZ in (2).
5.4. The Coordinate Data Record with Rotational Node Generation

This facility may be used to generate nodes by rotating nodes already input by a specified angle about
a specified position. This is particularly useful for describing the nodes on axisymmetric bodies.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------R|END| | 101|
3| 100| 20.0
| ... |
0.0
|
0.0
|
30.0...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------| | |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|
|-------|----------------------| | |
|
|
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|
|
_(6)Angular Rotation
| | |
|
|
|
|
VECTOR(Degrees.3F10.0)
| | |
|
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|
|_(5)3 Coordinates for Position about which
| | |
|
|
|
to rotate(3F10.0)
| | |
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|_(4)Increment for Each set of Node Numbers(I5)
| | |
|
|
38
The Coordinate Data Record with Rotational Node Generation

| | |
|
|_(3)Number of Nodal Sets to be Generated(I5)(Default 1)
| | |
|
| | |
|_(2)The User node number of the 1st node in a set.
| | |
| | |_Optional User Identifier(A2)
| |
| |_Compulsory END on last data record in data category
|
|_(1)Indicates Rotational Node Generation
(1) This single letter code indicates that a set of nodes is to be generated by rotating a set of nodes
already input.
(2) This is the starting node of the set to be copied (input sequence = NS1). The finish node of the set
is the last node input so far (input sequence = NF1).
(3) This is the number of node sets to be generated (NSETS). The total number of nodes automatically
generated in addition to those already input is given by:
Total additional nodes = NSETS (NF1-NS1+1)
If this field is left blank, or zero is input, NSETS=1 is assumed.
(4) This node increment number (N3) is the number by which the node numbers already input are to
be incremented. In other words, if the nodes previously input are numbered NP1, NP2, NP3 etc., and
the new node numbers are NN1, NN2, NN3 etc., these new node numbers are given by:
NN1 = NP1 + N3; NN2 = NP2 + N3; NN3 = NP3 + N3; etc.
If no increment value is present, or zero is input, the program will issue a warning and default to a
value of 100.
(5) These three values are the coordinates of the point about which the rotation of the nodes already
input takes place. This field may be left blank, in which case the point is assumed to be 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, i.e.
the FRA origin.
(6) These three values (RX,RY,RZ) are the components of the angular vector of rotation, i.e. the angle
and axis about which the rotation takes place is given by
Angle = modulus (RX,RY,RZ)
Axis = vector (RX,RY,RZ) / Modulus (RX,RY,RZ)
Although this means that the user has the facility to generate nodes rotated about any axis, the most
common usage is as follows (using 30 degrees as an example)
Rotation about X-axis RX = 30.0 RY = 0.0 RZ = 0.0
Rotation about Y-axis RX = 0.0 RY = 30.0 RZ = 0.0
Rotation about Z-axis RX = 0.0 RY = 0.0 RZ = 30.0
EXAMPLE
Generation of nodes for six, 50m tall, 8m diameter cylindrical legs of an axisymmetric semi-submersible
at a radius of 75 metres
39

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------| |
| |
1|
6|
1| 79.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 10.0 |
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------|R|
| |
|
12|
10| 75.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 30.0 |
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------|R|
| |
|
5| 200| 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 0.0 | 60.0 |
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Data Record 1 - Generates six nodal coordinate on a vertical line.

Data Record 2 - Generates 12 additional vertical lines at 30 degree intervals, i.e. generates the nodes
to define a single cylinder. Note that the last set of nodes (121-126) have the same coordinates as the
first set (1-6). This makes the numbering sequential for all 12 faces of the regular dodecagon representing
the circular surface and hence facilitates the specification of element topology (Data Category 2).
Data Record 3 - Generates five additional cylinders at 60 degree intervals.
Total number of nodes generated (see columns 11 to 15) is 6 (12+1) (5+1) = 468
5.5. The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association

The STRC (structure) data record enables the use pf totally independent sets of coordinates for each
structure. In other words, the USER node numbers may be the same for 2 different structures but they
will be treated as separate items. The STRC data item can also be utilized in the Material and Geometric
property data categories; see note below.
Fixed nodes (referred to as Structure 0) must be defined in the nodes of the structure which is connected
to them, for example:
Fixed nodes for mooring lines from Structure 1 to Structure 0 must be defined in the Structure 1 set of
coordinates
A fixed node for an articulation connecting Structure 2 to Structure 0 must be defined in the Structure 2
set of coordinates.
Similarly for connections between other structures and Structure 0.
Note
If the STRC data record is not used all user node numbers must be unique.
If the STRC data record is used in the COOR data category, then it may also be used in the
MATE and GEOM data categories if the use of the same property number is required from different structures.
If the STRC data record is not used in the COOR Data Category, it cannot be used in the
MATE(materials) and GEOM(geometry) Data Categories.
The structure number has to be in columns 16-20 as shown below:

5 7
16
21
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---X XXX 01 STRC XXXXX
nn XXXXXX
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---| |
|
40
The Coordinate Data Record with Translation

| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(3)Structure Number.
| |
| |_(2)Mandatory data record keyword.
|
|_(1)Optional user data category identifier
(3) The structure number must start from 1 on the 1st data record and increment by 1 for each structure
data record input. The number of ELM* data categories must correspond to the number of structure
data records.
5.6. The Coordinate Data Record with Offset

The OFFSET data record is in the following format:
6
16
21
31
41
- --- -- -------------- --------- --------- --------O XXX 01 XXXXXXX
100
10.0
0.0
0.0
- --- -- -------------- --------- --------- --------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(6)Z offset (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(5)Y offset (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(4)X offset (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3)Node number increment (I5)
|
|
|
|
|_(1)Compulsory data record keyword (A1) NB:O = Absolute offset o=relative
(1) Note that upper case 'O' will define an absolute offset and lower case 'o' will define a relative offset.
All node coordinates input after this data record will be generated offset by these 3 values.
For example, if the nodes for 3 identical legs along the X axis, 30m apart, with the 1st leg at X = 5.0
are defined, then the 2 absolute X offset data records input just before the node coordinate for legs 2
and 3 would be 35.0,65.0. The 2 relative X offsets would be 30.0,30.0, as the default offset is zero.
Note
If a STRC data record (The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association (p. 40)) is
input, the OFFSET will automatically be re-set to zero.
5.7. The Coordinate Data Record with Translation

This facility may be used to generate nodes by translating nodes already input by a specified translational increment:
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---- ---- ----- -------- --------- ------|T|
| |1
|
3| 100|XXXX|XXXX|XXXXX| 30.0 |
0.0
|
0.0...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- -- -- ------- --------- ------| | | |
|
|
|
|
|
| | | |
|
|
|----------------------| | | |
|
|
|
| | | |
|
|
_(5)Translation values
| | | |
|
|
VECTOR(3F10.0)
| | | |
|
|
| | | |
|
|_(4)Increment for Each set of Node Numbers(I5)
41

| | | |
|
| | | |
|_(3)Number of Nodal Sets to be Generated(I5)(Default 1)
| | | |
| | | |_(2)The User node number of the 1st node in a set.
| | |
| |
|
|
|_(1)Indicates Translational Node Generation
(1) This single letter code indicates that new sets of nodes are to be generated by translating a set of
nodes already input.
(2) This is the starting node of the set (input sequence = NS1). The finish node of the set is the last
node input so far ( input sequence = NF1).
(3) This is the number of node sets to be generated (NSETS). The total number of nodes automatically
generated in addition to those already input is given by:
Total additional nodes = NSETS (NF1-NS1+1)
If this field is left blank, or zero is input, NSETS = 1 is assumed.
be incremented. In other words, if the node set previously input are numbered NP1, NP2, NP3, etc., and
the new node numbers are NN1, NN2, NN3, etc., these new node numbers are given by:
NN1 = NP1 + N3; NN2 = NP2 + N3; NN3 = NP3 + N3
value of 100.
(5) This node coordinate increment number (DX,DY,DZ) is the VALUE by which the node set coordinates
are to be incremented, i.e. if the node set previously input are values XP1, XP2, XP3 etc and the new X
coordinates XN1, XN2, XN3, etc, these new values are given by:
XN1 = XP1 + DX; XN2 = XP2 + DX; XN3 = XP3 + DX
Similarly for Y and Z.
5.8. The Coordinate Data Record with Mirror Node Generation

This facility may be used to generate nodes by reflecting nodes already input in a specified plane.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------M|END| | 101| XXXX| 100| 1.0
|
1.0
|
2.0
| 15.0
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------| | |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|----------------------------| | |
|
|
|
| | |
|
|
|_(4)4 Co-efficients to define equation
| | |
|
|
of mirror plane (4F10.0)
| | |
|
|
| | |
|
|_(3)Increment for each set of Node Numbers(I5)
| | |
|
| | |
|_(2)The User node number of the 1st node in a set.
| | |
42
The NOD5 Data Record - 5-digit node numbers

| |
|
|_(1)Indicates Mirror Node Generation
(1) This single letter code indicates that a set of nodes is to be generated by reflecting a set of nodes
already input.
(2) This is the starting node of the set to be copied (input sequence = NS1). The finish node of the set
is the last node input so far ( input sequence = NF1). The number of nodes generated will always be
(NF1-NS1+1).
be incremented. In other words, if the nodes previously input are numbered NP1, NP2, NP3, etc., and
the new node numbers are NN1, NN2, NN3, etc., these new node numbers are given by:
NN1 = NP1 + N3; NN2 = NP2 + N3; NN3 = NP3 + N3; etc.
value of 100.
(4) These are the co-efficients A, B, C, D which define the plane of reflection. The plane is defined by
the equation:
Ax + By + Cz = D
5.9. The NOD5 Data Record - 5-digit node numbers

This data record allows node numbers with 5 digits to be defined directly.
The input format is as follows:
5 7
- --- -- ---- -----X|XXX| |NOD5|XXXXX
- --- -- ---- -----| |
| |
| |_(2)
|
When the NOD5 data record is used the format for all following coordinate data records are changed
slightly as shown below. The field for node numbers becomes 5 columns, while the field for the number
of generated nodes is reduced to 4 columns. All the other fields are unchanged.
2
5 7
12
16
21
31
51
61
71
- --- -- ----- ---- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------|X|
| |
4|
|
| 54.6
| ... |
|
|
...
- --- -- ----- ---- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------|X|END| |
23|
3|
10| 54.6
| ... |
4.5
|
|
...
- --- -- ----- ---- ----- --------- -- -- --------- --------- ------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)3 Coordinates for Start Node (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Increment for Node Number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Number of Nodes to be Generated(I4)
| |
|
| |
|_(1)Starting Node Number(I5)
| |
43

|
|_Compulsory END on Last Data Record in data category (A3)
44
Chapter 6: Element Topology - ELM* (Data Category 2)

When entering ELM data categories, the * indicates the structure number; in other words, enter ELM1
for Structure 1, ELM2 for Structure 2, .... EL10 for Structure 10.

This Data Category defines the structural, hydrodynamic and hydrostatic modeling by superposition of
ELEMENTS of different types, each of which has its own unique properties (a summary is given in Element
Topology Data Record (p. 46)). An Element is defined by specifying 1, 2, 3 or 4 node numbers (defined
in Data Category 1) as is appropriate to that element. Some elements also require a material and geometric group number (defined in Data Categories 3 and 4 respectively).
Data Categories 1, 3, 4 should be thought of as a table of values which are indexed by the node, material and geometric group numbers respectively, on the Element Topology Data Record (p. 46).
Note also that all elements within a structure are considered to be part of a rigid framework and cannot
move relative to one another. However, there is no requirement for the actual physical connections to
be modeled within the Aqwa suite of programs.
Note
At this stage of the modeling (i.e. input of Data Category 2) the program does not know how
many structures the user wishes to define. Therefore The Data Category Series Terminator FINI (p. 31) must be used to indicate that no more structures will be input. However, if the
maximum number of structures is input, the FINI data record must be omitted, as termination
of the Data Category series is then mandatory.
The 32-bit version of Aqwa can accept up to 18000 elements explicitly defined in Data Category 2. Of
these, 12000 may be diffracting elements. These limits are raised to 36000/24000 elements with one
symmetry data record, or 72000/48000 elements with two symmetry data records. These limits are for
all the elements in a complete model, not for each individual structure.
The 64-bit version of Aqwa can accept up to 40000 elements explicitly defined in Data Category 2. Of
these, 30000 may be diffracting elements. These limits are raised to 80000/60000 elements with one
symmetry data record, or 160000/120000 elements with two symmetry data records. These limits are
for all the elements in a complete model, not for each individual structure.
Aqwa can accept up to 50 structures, each including diffracting or non-diffracting elements, but the
total number of elements on all structures must not exceed the limits above. It is not possible for all
these structures to interact hydrodynamically with each other, and the limits on the number of structures
are given below. If there are: S sets of interacting structures, with In structures in each (n = 1, S), D additional diffracting structures, and ND additional non-diffracting structures, then interaction limits are
defined by the following rules:
45
Element Topology - ELM* (Data Category 2)

Rule 1
=
+ +
Rule 2

Rule 3

+ +

Some examples of possible configurations that just meet the limits.

50 diffracting structures (non-interacting) Rule 1 = 50. Rule 2 = 0. Rule 3 = 50. Rule 1 governs
1 interacting set with 20 structures + 30 non-diffracting structures Rule 1 = 50. Rule 2 = 20. Rule 3 =
430. All rules just met
4 interacting sets each with 5 structures + 30 non-diffracting structures Rule 1 = 50. Rule 2 = 5. Rule 3
= 130. Rule 1 governs
1 interacting set with 8 structures, 36 additional diffracting structures, 6 non-diffracting structures Rule
1 = 50. Rule 2 = 8. Rule 3 = 106. Rule 1 governs
2 interacting sets with 14 and 15 structures respectively, 9 additional diffracting structures Rule 1 = 38.
Rule 2 = 15. Rule 3 = 430. Rule 3 governs

-(Indicates Structure Number)
|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|ELM1|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
6.3. Element Topology Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |QPPL| DIFF|
|(30)(11,1)(71,1)(72,1)(12,1)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |TUBE|
|
|(10)(11,3)(71,3)(2)(1)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |DISC|
|
|(1)(11)(71)(1)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
46
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (3)Columns 21-80 free format data for
|
|
generating NODE,MATERIAL,and GEOMETRIC
|
|
GROUP NUMBERS. Format(60A1)
|
|
|
|_(2)Element Group Number(I5)
|
|_(4) DIFF identifier (diffracting plates only)
Element Topology Data Record

| |
|
| |
|_(1)Element Type(A4)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on Last Data Record in Data Category(A3)
(1) The element type (always four characters) provides the classification for a particular element, i.e. the
number of nodes, and whether material and geometric properties are required. Valid codes for element
types are QPPL, TPPL, TUBE, PMAS, PBOY, FPNT, DISC and STUB as shown below:
Description
No of Nodes
Material Property
Geometric Property
QPPL
Quadrilateral Panel
none
none
TPPL
Triangular Panel
none
none
TUBE
Tube
density
geometry
PMAS
Point Mass
mass
inertia
PBOY
Point Buoyancy
displaced mass
none
FPNT
Field Point
none
none
STUB
Slender Tube
mass, inertia
geometry
DISC
Circular Disc
none
geometry
(2) The element group number associated with each element is used to divide the elements defining
the structure into groups. Groups can be used for plotting and to identify special sets of elements (see
The ILID Data Record - Suppression of Irregular Frequencies (p. 58) and The VLID Data Record - Suppression of Standing Waves. (p. 55)), but the group number may be left blank if desired.
(3) Free Format data generation is achieved by specifying several bracketed sets of Topological variables
in columns 21-80. The number of bracketed sets is given by
Number of Sets = 1 + (Number of Nodes)
+ 1 if a Material Group is required
+ 1 if a Geometry Group is required
In general we have a format of
(N)(N1,N2,N3)
- -------|
|
first
node
(N1,N2,N3)
-------|
|
second node
or parameter
(N1,N2,N3).....
-------|
|
third node
or parameter
N - Number of elements to be generated

N1 - Starting Node number, Material Group number or Geometric Group number
N2 - Increment of N1 for each element generated
N3 - Increment of N2 for each element generated
47

For the ith element of the N elements generated (whether the set applies to a node number, material
or geometric group number) each bracketed set will produce the number
Ni = N1 + (i-1).[N2+(i-1).N3]
Note
The nodes defining TPPL and QPPL elements must be ordered in a counterclockwise direction
from the perspective of an observer external to the structure.
In an Aqwa-Line data file, QPPL and TPPL elements which are below the still water line in the
Aqwa-Line analysis position must be denoted as diffracting elements by entering the identifier
DIFF in columns 12 to 15.
For structures which cross the waterline, the top row of diffracting plate elements must have
their top edges aligned with the still water line (i.e. diffracting plates must not cross the still
water line).
6.3.1. The QPPL Element
Quadrilateral pressure plate of zero thickness.

Element generates pressure and hydrostatic forces only.
6.3.2. The TPPL Element
Triangular pressure plate of zero thickness.

Element generates pressure and hydrostatic forces only.
48
6.3.3. The TUBE Element
Tubular element with uniform circular cross-section and constant wall thickness.
Forces on this element are calculated using Morisons equation.
Open TUBE elements are considered to have open ends. The water surface inside the TUBE is at the
same level as the surface outside. The transverse added mass is based on the outside diameter, but the
axial added mass only uses the cross-sectional area of the TUBE material.
TUBE elements have an axial drag coefficient of 0.016 that cannot be changed.
6.3.4. The STUB Element
Slender tube element. The STUB element differs from the TUBE element in the following respects:
STUB elements permit tubes of non-circular cross-section to be modeled, by allowing the tube properties
(diameter, drag coefficient, and added mass coefficient) to be specified in two directions at right angles.
Longer lengths of tube can be input, as the program automatically subdivides STUB elements into sections
of shorter length for integration purposes.
STUB elements should only be employed if the mean diameter is small compared to the length.
The local axis of the element runs from Node 1 to Node 2 (origin at Node 1). The perpendicular from
Node 3 to the local X-axis, together with the local X-axis itself, defines the XZ-plane, and hence the Zaxis. The local Y-axis forms a right-handed set.
If any Z parameter for a STUB is omitted or set to zero it will default to the equivalent Y value.
49

If the STUB area is omitted or set to zero, the program will assume a circular cross-section if diameter
Y and diameter Z are equal. If they are unequal, the cross-section is assumed to be rectangular and
area will be set to the rectangular cross-sectional area. The area for the STUB element is used to calculate
the displaced mass per unit length and buoyancy force. It is also used to calculate the Froude-Krylov
force and default added mass. The area for the STUB element is used in the calculation of defaults for
drag and added mass coefficients. Although the program will accept any value for area, warnings are
issued if the value is greater than 1.05 * rectangular area or less than 0.95 * circular area.
6.3.5. The DISC Element
A circular disc element with no thickness and no mass. The DISC element has a drag coefficient and
added mass coefficient in its normal direction. To add mass, the user can define a PMAS element and
attach it to the DISC element.
The DISC element has two nodes; the first defines the center of the element and the second gives the
normal direction of the element.
The force on a DISC element has two components: added mass force and drag force. As DISC elements
have no thickness, the Froude-Krylov force and hydrostatic force are zero. This is different from a TUBE
end on which the Froude-Krylov force and hydrostatic force are non-zero and therefore are calculated
in Aqwa. The application point of the force is at the centroid of the DISC element when fully submerged,
and at the force center computed by the program if partially submerged. The direction of the force on
a DISC is parallel to the normal direction of the DISC.
6.3.6. The PMAS Element

Point mess element having internal mass with the center of mass coincident with a given node and
specified values of second moments of mass inertia. The PMAS element generates mass forces only.
6.3.7. The PBOY Element

External point buoyancy element without mass. The PBOY element generates hydrostatic displacement
forces only.
6.3.8. The FPNT Element

External fluid field point element. This element gives the pressure head amplitude at a specified point
in the external fluid domain. When the element is at the water surface, it corresponds to the amplitude
of the water surface elevation. Only applicable in Aqwa-Line with a radiation/diffraction analysis is run.
If a hydrodynamic database is imported from a previous run it is not possible to calculate the water
surface elevation.
FPNT elements are defined in the LSA axes and move with the structure in which they are defined.
50

FPNT elements are subject to symmetry commands.
6.3.9. Examples of Element Specifications

Example 1
For the QPPL element, the data
(30)(11,1)(71,1)(72,1)(12,1)
will generate the ELEMENTS as follows:
node 1
node 2
node 3
node 4
Element 1
i=1
11+0(1+0) = 11
71+0(1+0) = 71
72+0(1+0) = 72
12+0(1+0) = 12
Element 2
i=2
11+1(1+0) = 12
71+1(1+0) = 72
72+1(1+0) = 73
12+1(1+0) = 13
Element 3
i=3
11+2(1+0) = 13
71+2(1+0) = 73
72+2(1+0) = 74
12+2(1+0) = 14
etc.
i.e. 30 elements are generated each with 4 node numbers where
Element 1 nodes are 11,71,72,12
etc.
Note
N3 is zero in all cases, which is very common.
Example 2
For the TUBE element, the data
(10)(11,3)(71,3)(2)(1)
will generate the elements as follows:
node 1
node 2
material group
geometry group
Element 1
i=1
11+0(3+0) = 11
71+0(3+0) = 71
2+0(0+0) = 2
1+0(0+0) = 1
Element 2
i=2
11+1(3+0) = 14
71+1(3+0) = 74
2+1(0+0) = 2
1+1(0+0) = 1
Element 3
i=3
11+2(3+0) = 17
71+2(3+0) = 77
2+1(0+0) = 2
1+2(0+0) = 1
etc.
i.e. 10 elements are generated
Element 1: nodes are 11,71; Material Group = 2; Geometry Group = 1
51

Element 2: nodes are 14,74; Material Group = 2; Geometry Group = 1
Element 3: nodes are 17,77; Material Group = 2 ; Geometry Group = 1
etc.
Note
N2 (as well as N3) is zero for the material/geometric group number increments, which is very
common. This means that all 10 elements will have the same material and geometric properties.
Example 3
For the DISC element, the data
(1)(11)(71)(1)
will generate one DISC element as indicated by the number in the first pair of brackets. The centroid
position of the disc is defined by the first node number (node 11) and the normal direction of the disc
is decided by the vector from the first node (11) to the second node (71). It should be noted that
whether the normal vector defined as from node 11 to 71 or from node 71 to 11 has no effect on the
results. The last number in the DISC data record is the geometry property group number for this DISC
which is to be defined in Geometric Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4) (p. 65) (DISC has no material
properties).
6.4. SYMX and SYMY Data Records - X and Y Symmetry

This facility may be used when the structure is symmetrical about the X or Y axis of the Fixed Reference
Axis in the position defined by the element topology in this data category and the node coordinates input
in Data Category 1.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |SYMX|
- --- -- ---|X|
| |SYMY|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|_(1)Symmetry Specification(A4)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on Last
Data Record in Data Category.(A3)
Use of the symmetry specification has two distinct advantages:

1. To save the user modeling 1/2 or 3/4 of the structure
If the SYMX data record (only) is used, only half of the structure needs to be defined (on one side
of the x axis). The other half of the structure will be generated internally by the program as a mirror
image of the first half about the x axis. If the whole structure is modeled, the SYMX data record
must not be used as this produces two identical structures existing in the same position.
If the SYMY data record (only) is used, only half of the structure needs to be defined (on one side
of the y axis). The other half of the structure will be generated internally by the program as a mirror
52
The HYDI Data Record - Hydrodynamic Interaction

image of the first half about the y axis. If the whole structure is modeled the SYMY data record must
not be used as this produces two identical structures existing in the same position.
If both the SYMX data record and SYMY data record are used, only one quarter of the structure
needs to be defined (in one quadrant). If the half/whole structure is modeled both data records
must not be used as this produces identical structures existing in the same position.
2. To save substantial computer time in the radiation/diffraction analysis in Aqwa-Line
Expected saving in computer time:
for 2-fold symmetry (SYMX OR SYMY) = 50 - 75 percent
for 4-fold symmetry (SYMX and SYMY) = 75 - 90 percent
These figures given are typical and saving will be model dependent. Saving may be less for small
problems, and should be even greater for very large problems, i.e. greater than 250 defined (as opposed to total) elements.
Note
The Symmetry data record only applies to TPPL and QPPL elements. All other element types
are are unaffected by the introduction of these data records and must be fully described as
the physical geometry dictates.
6.5. The HYDI Data Record - Hydrodynamic Interaction

This data record allows the inclusion of the interaction effects when structures are in close proximity.
Up to 20 hydrodynamically interacting structures can be modeled.
The interaction effects modelled include changes to both diffraction and radiation forces. All Aqwa post
processing programs recognize these additional forces, including the additional radiation forces which
couple the interacting structures.
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------X|XXX|02|HYDI|XXXXX|
1|XXXXX
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(3) All structures between the one specified on the HYDI data record and the current one will be considered to be interacting. For example, if an HYDI data record specifying structure 2 is input for structure
53

5, interaction effects will be calculated for structures 2,3,4 and 5. The structure number must correspond
to a structure which is already defined in the element topology data category.
Note
Structures for which interaction effects are to be calculated must be defined with consecutive
structure numbers.
6.6. The RMXS/RMYS Data Records- Remove Symmetry

These data records allow the symmetry of a structure to be removed, instructing Aqwa to generate
new elements mirroring those already defined. They only apply to elements above them in the ELM*
data category, and therefore should be the last data record(s) in the data category (before the FINI data
record if used).
These data records ONLY apply to TPPL and QPPL elements (diffracting or non-diffracting). They do not
operate on any other element types.
5 7
- --- -- ---- -----X|XXX| |RMXS|XXXXX
- --- -- ---- -----| |
| |
| |_(2)Symmetry Specification
|
These data records are most useful when structures have been created using the mesh generator, which
automatically creates a symmetric structure using the SYMX data record. When the full structure has
been created it can then be put into its correct position using the MSTR data record.
6.7. The MSTR Data Record - Move Structure

This data record allows the definition position of a structure to be changed. If it is applied to a symmetric
structure the symmetry is automatically removed. It only applies to elements above it in the ELM* data
category, and therefore should be the last data record in the data category (before the FINI data record
if used).
The MSTR data record only applies to elements. If a node has been defined to represent the connection
point of a mooring line for example, and that node is not used on any elements, the node will not be
moved with the structure. Consequently any such nodes must be defined in Data Category 1 in their
final position.
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------X|
|02|MSTR|XXXXX|XXXXX| (NNN) (X,Y,RZ)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------
54
The VLID Data Record - Suppression of Standing Waves.

|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|_ (4)Columns 21-80. Free format data to
|
| |
define new position of structure.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Optional user data category identifier.
|
|_(1)Compulsory END on Last Data Record in Data Category(A3)
(4) The new position of the structure is defined by giving a node number on the structure, the position
to which it is to be moved and the yaw angle (degrees). The vessel is yawed about the specified node.
Only X and Y positions and yaw can be given as the Z position is defined by the ZCGE or ZLWL data
records and Aqwa-Line does not permit the model to be rotated in roll or pitch.
Note
All the output from Aqwa-Line (RAOs, hydrodynamic force coefficients etc.) is in the FRA.
This is still so if a structure is rotated using the MSTR data record, so, for example, motions
about the X-axis may no longer correspond to roll of the vessel.
6.8. The FIXD Data Record - Fix Structure

This data record allows a structure to be fixed. It has the same effect as the FIXD option on the JOB
data record, but it applies only to one structure. As with the previous JOB option, this data record only
applies to Aqwa-Line. If a structure has to be fixed in one of the other programs use a fixed articulation.
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------X|
|02|FIXD|XXXXX|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------|
| |
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Optional user data category identifier.
|
6.9. The VLID Data Record - Suppression of Standing Waves.

This data record is used to define a "lid" for reduction of the standing wave that may occur in a
moonpool or between two hydrodynamically interacting vessels. The lid has to be manually defined;
there is no automatic generation facility as there is with the ILID data record.
The lid is modeled by horizontal diffracting elements that must be contained in a single specified group.
Their effect is controlled by two parameters: a "damping factor" and a characteristic length. The elements
should be at the water surface between the vessels and have their normals pointing upwards. They do
not need to follow the vessel outline closely so a simple mesh should be adequate, as illustrated in the
figure below.
VLID elements cannot form a structure on their own; they must be part of an existing structure.
55
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |VLID|
|
|(DAMP=???,GAP=???)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Mandatory parameters
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Group number
| |
|
| |
|_Compulsory Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
| |_Optional User Identifier (A2)
|
|_Compulsory END on last data record in Data Category (A3)
(1) This is the group number that will be used for the lid elements. If there is more than one structure
with a lid a different group must be used for each lid. If a group number is not specified a default value
of 999 will be used.
(2) Lid Parameters
DAMP: damping factor for the lid, typically between 0.0 and 0.2; 0 will give no effect, 0.2 will result
in heavy damping of surface elevation at the elements.
GAP: characteristic length for the lid. This will typically be the gap between two adjacent vessels or
the smallest dimension of a moonpool. It is not used to define the size of the lid itself.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|

| |VLID|
| 135| (DAMP=0.02,GAP=10.0)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -----------------------------
6.10. The ASYM Data Record - Axisymmetric Structure Generation

The ELM* data categories will now accept a new ASYM data record. This enables users to generate a
structure whose elements are totally axi-symmetric by specifying line of nodes to define a 'profile' line.
A 4-fold symmetrical structure is generated in a special order and has the effect of switching on X and Y
symmetry i.e. as if the SYMX and SYMY data records have been input in Data Category 2.
At this time only structures whose axi-symmetric axis is co-incident with the Z Fixed Reference Axis may
be generated; in other words, generated nodes are rotated about this axis.
Any number of ASYM data records may be used within the normal restrictions of the maximum number
of nodes and elements.
56
The ASYM Data Record - Axisymmetric Structure Generation

The maximum number of nodes in the profile line used in generating an axi-symmetric structure is 100.
The elements generated will not necessarily produce a mesh with no modeling errors. To a large extent
this will depend on the exact geometry of the profile line specified by the user. Note that with 64-fold
symmetry the aspect ratio of elements next to the axis cannot be reduced to less than about 1 in 10 and
for 2-fold, 1 in 5. This however should not produce significant errors.
Aqwa-Line will automatically use a special N-fold symmetrical solution if all elements are generated by
ASYM data records or the user inputs elements which obey the rule of axi-symmetrical element order.
This special solution can be up to 2 orders of magnitude faster than even the 4-fold symmetrical solution.
For a model with a TOTAL (in ALL quadrants) number of M diffracting elements and having X and Y
symmetry, a structure will be solved as an N-fold (N=8,16,32,64) axi-symmetric structure automatically if
the 1st set of M/N elements, when rotated by n*360/N degrees, produces the nth set of M/N elements
within a tolerance of approximately (0.01m/0.03ft).
5 7
16
21
- --- -- ---- - ---- ----- ------------------------X|XXX|01|ASYM|X|DIFF|
1|(32)(111)(217)XXXXXXXXXXX
- --- -- ---- - ---- ----- ------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(7)Finish user node no.
| |
|
|
|
|
(MAX # nodes total = 100)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(6)Start user node no.
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(5)No. of Axi-symmetric rotations 8,16,32,64
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(4)Element Group Number
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(3)Diffracting - leave blank for non diffracting.
| |
|
|_(1)Optional User Identifier
(3) The above example generates diffracting elements. Leave this field blank for non-diffracting elements
or elements above the water line.
(4) The element group that will be used for all elements generated by this data record. If 0 or blank is
input then the group number will start from 1 and for each set of elements generated along the axis
the group number will increment by 1. i.e. groups 1-32 will be generated if 32 is the number of axisymmetric rotations.
(5) No. of Axi-symmetric rotations to produce a full 360 degree description of the structure. This is restricted to 8,16,32 and 64.
(6/7) The start/finish user node numbers of the line of nodes to be rotated. This defines the 'profile'
line. e.g.:
if the start node is 111
the finish node is 217
57

and 8 nodes (111,211,113,213,115,215,117,217) exist in the coordinate data category
Then the total M, number of elements = (8-1)*32 will be generated. As 4-fold symmetry is mandatory,
56 elements will be produced in 1 quadrant.
In general, if the profile line has NN nodes in the list and N-fold symmetry is specified then M=(NN-1)*N.
The maximum number of nodes in a profile line is 100.
The following are restrictions on the node coordinates defining the profile line. Failure to comply will
produce a fatal error:
X coordinate must be positive ( in other words, 0.0).
Adjacent nodes cannot both have zero X coordinates.
Y coordinates must be zero.
Distance between adjacent nodes must not be too small.
The profile line must not form a closed loop.
6.11. The ILID Data Record - Suppression of Irregular Frequencies

This data record is used to define a lid for suppression of irregular frequencies. The lid is modeled by
horizontal diffracting elements that must be contained in a specified group. The elements may be
defined by the user or they can be generated automatically by Aqwa.
Automatically Generated Lid

The data record shown below is used to request that the lid elements should be generated automatically.
Note that the TOTAL number of elements must still be fewer than the maximum permitted, so the user
must allow "space" for the lid when creating the model. The lid will be created at a z-coordinate defined
on the ZLWL data record (The ZLWL Data Record - Waterline Height (p. 59)), which must also be included
in Data Category 2.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |ILID| AUTO|
|(LID_SIZE=????,START_NODE=NNNNN)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Optional parameters
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Group number
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Automatic lid generation
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This identifier specifies that the lid is to be generated automatically
58
The ZLWL Data Record - Waterline Height

(2) This is the group number that will be used for the lid elements. If there is more than one structure
with a lid a different group must be used for each structure. If a group number is not specified a default
value of 999 will be used.
(3) These optional parameters allow the user to specify the nominal size of the lid elements and the
starting number for the nodes that will be generated. The default size of the lid elements will be based
on the average size of elements in the model. If this results in the maximum allowable number of elements being slightly exceeded, the user may increase the size to reduce the total number of elements.
The program will generate new node numbers starting from the last user-defined number. This parameter allows the user to specify a starting node for the lid nodes.
User-Defined Lid
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------|X|
| |ILID|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Group number
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The lid elements must be put into a single group with this number. If there is more than one structure
with a lid a different group must be used for each structure. If a group number is not specified a value
of 999 will be assumed.
The user must then define a number of elements that should:
be within the vessel
have their normals pointing upwards (i.e. the nodes must be listed anti-clockwise when looking down
on the elements)
be at the still water surface
Except for the requirement that the centroids should be below the water surface, the usual modeling
checks are still applied, and the TOTAL number of elements must still be fewer than the maximum
permitted.
6.12. The ZLWL Data Record - Waterline Height

This data record allows the waterline height on a structure to be defined for an Aqwa-Line analysis. It
can be thought of as the position of a line painted on the side of the structure. The hydrodynamic
coefficients are calculated with the waterline at the specified position. Note that this data record does
not change the definition position of the structure. In this respect the ZLWL data record is similar to
the ZCGE data record in Data Category 7; indeed the two are related by ZLWL + ZCGE = CGPOS, where
CGPOS is the position of the center of gravity when the structure is in the definition position.
59

5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------X|
|02|ZLWL|XXXXX|XXXXX| (HEIGHT)
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|_ (4)Columns 21-80. Free format data to
|
| |
define waterline height.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Optional User Identifier.
|
(4) The position of the waterline is defined in the same axes as used to define the nodes in Data Category
1.
NOTES.
If a ZLWL data record is used, the ZCGE data record in Data Category 7 is no longer required. An error
message will be issued if a ZCGE data record is present and is not consistent with the ZLWL data record.
If the ZCGE and ZLWL data records are both absent, the definition position based on the nodes in
Data Category 1 will be used.
This position is NOT USED as the starting position for an analysis using Aqwa-Librium, Fer, Drift or
Naut. This must be specified in Data Category 15 or by using the RDEP option (see Administration
and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)).
6.13. The SEAG Data Records - Creation of Wave Grid Pressures

This data record instructs Aqwa-Line to create a .PAG file containing pressures at wave grid points. This
file is used by the AGS for plotting wave heights and pressures.
At present the grid size can only be specified from ANSYS Workbench. When Aqwa-Line is run as a
batch program or from the AGS it is not possible to input any values for the grid size.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- -----------------------------------|X|
| |SEAG|XXXXXXXXXX| (NX, NY, Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax)
- --- -- ---- ---------- -----------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Max Y-coordinate of grid
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Min Y-coordinate of grid
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(2)Max X-coordinate of grid
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(2)Min X-coordinate of grid
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1)Number of Y grid points
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of X grid points
| |
|
| |
|_ Data Record Name(A4)
| |
|
60
The SEAG Data Records - Creation of Wave Grid Pressures

(1) The first two parameters give the number of points, in the global X and Y directions, at which the
wave pressures will be calculated. The limits are:
X-direction
Y-direction
Minimum number of grid points
41
26
Maximum number of grid points
81
51
Default number of grid points
41
26
(2) The last four parameters give the X and Y limits of the grid over which the wave pressures will be
calculated. These parameters cannot be set, and should be omitted, when Aqwa is run as a batch program
or from the AGS.
61
62
Chapter 7: Material Properties - MATE (Data Category 3)

This Data Category is used to input the physical properties of materials associated with the elements
input in Data Category 2. The properties are referred to as material properties. Material properties should
be thought of as a table of values which are indexed by the material group numbers on the Element
Topology Data Record (p. 46) (Data Category 2).

The parameters input within this Data Category are only referred to by the material group numbers on
the Element Topology Data Record (p. 46) (Data Category 2).
The material properties set up by this Data Category are not specifically associated with any one
structure (unless a STRC data record is defined within this data category) or any one element within
that structure. This means that many elements may reference the same material group number and
several structures may also reference the same group number.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|MATE|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
7.3. Material Property Data Record

2
5 7
16
21
31
41
- --- -- --------- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- --------- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|__________|__________|
| |
|
|_(2) Material Properties (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|_(1)Material Group Number(I5)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on Last Data Record in Data Category.(A3)
(1) Material group number - This number is referred to in the Element Topology Data Record (Data
Category 2) and is the index to the values given in columns 21-40 (2).
(2) Material property values. Material properties may, optionally, be divided into sets for each structure
(see The STRC Data Record - Coordinate Structure Association (p. 40)). Any element whose material
group number corresponds to that given in columns 16-20 (1) has these values associated with it. Details
of the properties appropriate to each element type are given below.
63
Material Properties - MATE (Data Category 3)

Element
Type
Property 1
Property 2
Property 3
T/QPPL
None
None
None
TUBE
Density
None
None
STUB
Mass/unit
length
Y axis inertia/unit
length
Z axis inertia/unit
length
PMAS
Mass
None
None
TELM
Density
Young's Modulus
None
DISC
None
None
None
7.4. The STRC Data Record - Material Structure Association

If Coordinate Structure data records have been defined in the Coordinate data then these may also be
used in defining material properties. The STRC (structure) data record enables the use of totally independent sets of material properties for each structure. In other words, the user material numbers may
be the same for 2 different structures but they will be treated as separate items. If used then the material properties for all structures must be defined using STRC data records. If STRC is not utilized then all
material property numbers must be unique across all structures.
5 7
16
21
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---X XXX 01 STRC XXXXX
nn XXXXXX
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
| |_(2)Mandatory Keyword.
|
data records.
64
Chapter 8: Geometric Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4)

This data category is used to input the physical geometry and parameters relating to the physical
geometry of elements input in Data Category 2 and are referred to as GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES. Geometric
properties should be thought of as a table of values which are indexed by the geometric group numbers
on the Element Topology Data Record (p. 46) (Data Category 2).
The parameters input within this data category are only referred to by the geometric group numbers
on the Element Topology Data Record (p. 46) (Data Category 2).
Each entry in the geometric properties table defined within this data category is associated only with
a particular element type but is not specifically associated with any one structure (unless a STRC data
record is defined within this data category). This means that many elements, provided they are the same
type, may reference the same geometric group number and several structures may also reference the
same group number.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|GEOM|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|_Compulsory Keyword(A4)
|
8.3. Geometric Property Data Record

Required for all elements having geometric properties.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -------|X|
| |
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|----------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)6 Geometric parameters (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Geometric Group Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|_(1)ELEMENT Type(A4)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on last data record in data category (A3)
Continuation Data Record - Only required for Morison elements. It may be omitted if the appropriate
default values are required (see (4) and (5) below)
65
Geometric Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4)

2
5
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |CONT|XXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
(5)Added Mass Coefficient(F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
(4)Viscous Drag Coefficient(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|_Indicates Continuation of above Data Record(A4)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on last daa record in data category (A3)
(1) The Element Type (always four characters) provides the classification for a particular element. This
must correspond to the element type which references the geometric group number on the Element
Topology Data Record in Data Category 2. Valid codes for element types in this data category are TUBE,
STUB, DISC and PMAS.
Note
QPPL, TPPL and PBOY do not have any geometric properties.
(2) Geometric group number - This number is referred to in the Element Topology Data Record (Data
Category 2) and is the index to the values given in columns 21-70 (2).
(3) Geometric parameters - Any element on any structure whose geometric group number corresponds
to that given in columns 16-20 (2) has up to 6 of these values associated with it. A summary of the
properties appropriate to each element is shown below. (Units are consistent with the physical quantity
defined by each parameter.)
(4)/(5) Viscous drag/added mass coefficient associated with elements having hydrodynamic properties
in the Morison regime. If the continuation data record is omitted, or if either field is left blank, or if zero
value is input, default values are used for the appropriate element type. These values are shown below
in Columns 7 and 8.
Element
Type
TUBE
Basic Data Record

1
Diameter
Thickness
Continuation
0.
Sealed
Cut
1
Cut 2
0.75
1.0
Cd Z
Added Mass
Z
1.
Open
STUB
Diameter
Y
Diameter
Z
Area
Cd
Y
Added Mass
Y
PMAS
Ixx
Ixy
Ixz
Iyy
Iyz
DISC
Diameter
Izz Not Applicable

1.14
1.0
Note
Within the program, the Cd and Ca values for a DISC will always be halved; therefore the
calculated forces are only for the side of the DISC which is subject to the hydrodynamic
66
The STRC Data Record - Geometry Structure Association

pressure. If both sides are subject to the hydrodynamic pressure, taking into consideration
that the pressure on one side is positive and on the other side is negative, the Cd and Ca
values should be doubled.
8.4. The STRC Data Record - Geometry Structure Association

If Coordinate Structure data records have been defined in the Coordinate data then these may also be
used in defining material properties. The STRC (structure) data record enables the use of totally independent sets of geometric properties for each structure. In other words, the user geometry numbers
may be the same for 2 different structures but they will be treated as separate items. If used then the
geometric properties for all structures must be defined using STRC data records. If STRC is not utilized
then all geometric property numbers must be unique across all structures.
5 7
16
21
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---X XXX 01 STRC XXXXX
nn XXXXXX
- --- -- ---- ------ ----- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
| |_(2)Mandatory Keyword.
|
data records.
67
68
Chapter 9: Constant Parameters - GLOB (Data Category 5)

This data category is used to input the environmental parameters which are normally constant
throughout the analysis of a structure. These parameters include the Acceleration Due to Gravity and
the Depth and Density of the water. It is not intended to imply that the user cannot change the depth
of water on every single run of the program if he wishes to do so, only that these parameters are classified by the fact that they normally remain constant.
All data records are optional in this data category. Enter NONE for the data category keyword if no data
records are input. Please note that the default values for the parameters in this data category are effectively in SI units. This means that if the user is working in a set of units other than SI, he will have to
explicitly input all three parameters.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|GLOB|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|_Compulsory Keyword(A4)
|
Note: If data records denoted (Optional) are omitted, the program will produce the appropriate default
value shown for each parameter.
9.3. The DPTH Data Record (Optional) - Water Depth

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ---------|X|
| |DPTH|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Water Depth(F10.0)
| |
|
(Default Value 1000.0)
| |
|
| |
|_Compulsory Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on Last data record in data category(A3)
(1) Note that the water depth is fundamental to the calculation of all wave properties.
9.4. The DENS Data Record (Optional) - Water Density

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ---------|X|
| |DENS|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Density of Water(F10.0)
69
Constant Parameters - GLOB (Data Category 5)

| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
9.5. The ACCG Data Record (Optional) - Acceleration Due to Gravity

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ---------|X|
| |ACCG|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Acceleration Due to Gravity(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1)Compulsory Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
70
Chapter 10: Frequency and Directions Table - FDR* (Data Category

6)
When entering FDR data categories, the * indicates the structure number; for example, enter FDR1 for
Structure 1, FDR2 for Structure 2, .... FD50 for Structure 50.
See Database Import (p. 82) for examples showing the import of data from an existing Aqwa-Line
database.

This data category is used to input the frequencies and directions at which the values of the hydrodynamic parameters in the equations of motion of large floating structures are to be computed, or to
access existing information from a previous analysis. Values of added mass, and radiation damping are
associated with each frequency. Values of diffraction forces, Froude Krylov forces and Response Amplitude
Operators (RAO) are associated with each frequency and with each direction.
Rules Governing Input of Frequencies/Periods

The frequencies and values of the radiation/diffraction analysis parameters are naturally of fundamental
importance to all analyses of the motions of a large floating structures. Unfortunately maximum flexibility in specifying these parameters usually results in errors which can go undetected right through the
analysis procedure. The format of input of these parameters is designed to avoid the errors whilst retaining this flexibility which is considered essential to the accurate modeling of a structure in such a
complex environment.
The following rules and manner in which the frequencies/periods are input at first may appear complicated just to specify a single series of ascending/descending values. However, the user will rapidly become
aware of value of the rules with both simple analysis procedures and use of the more advanced facilities
of the program.
(a) Frequency/period numbers must be unique.
(b) There must be no 'gaps' in frequency/period numbers when all data records in this data category
have been input, e.g. if a total of five frequencies/periods are input then these must be numbered 1
through 5.
(c) Frequencies/periods must be distinct and unique.
(d) When all data records in this data category have been input, ascending numbers must correspond
to ascending frequency values, or, if periods are input, to descending period values.

|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ----
71
Frequency and Directions Table - FDR* (Data Category 6)

|XXXX| |XXXX|FDR1|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
10.3. The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which

the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --|X|
| |FREQ|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --|X|
| |PERD|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --|X|
| |HRTZ|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|-------------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)Up to 6 Values of Frequency/Period
| |
|
|
|
(FREQ=radians/sec) (PERD=seconds)
| |
|
|
|
(HRTZ=hertz)(6F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Terminal Frequency/Period Number (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Initial Frequency/Period Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The data record keyword defines the units used for the values in columns 21-80, as follows.
FREQ - frequencies defined in radians/sec
HRTZ - frequencies defined in hertz
PERD - periods defined in seconds
(2)-(3) These are the frequency/period numbers associated with the values in columns 21-80. These
numbers must be used in subsequent data categories when referring to the frequency values where
they are used to cross check the data input. The initial number refers to the first value input (columns
21-30) and the terminal number refers to the last value input. If the initial number is zero or blank the
program will generate frequencies automatically - see below.
------------------------------------------------| If the Frequency/Period
| Initial |Terminal |
|Values Correspond to Numbers | Number | Number |
|-----------------------------+---------+---------|
|
1,2,3,4,5 and 6
|
1
|
6
|
|-----------------------------+---------+---------|
|
4,5,6, and 7
|
4
|
7
|
|-----------------------------+---------+---------|
|
3 only
|
3
|
3
|
|
or |
3
|
|
-------------------------------------------------
72
The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic

Parameters are Computed
(4)-(9) These are the values of frequency/period at which the hydrodynamic parameters are to be calculated or input (Data Categories 7 and 8). Note that when fewer than six values are input the extra fields
on the data record are ignored. These values are associated with the numbers defined in columns 1120.
Rules Governing Input of Frequencies

(a) Frequency numbers must be unique.
(b) There must be no 'gaps' in frequency numbers; for example, if five frequencies are input they must
be numbered from 1 to 5.
(c) Frequencies must be input in ascending order. Periods must be input in descending order.
(d) Although more than one frequency data record can be used, the total number of frequencies cannot
exceed 50.
(e) The minimum frequency is 0.05(g/d) rad/s, where g = gravitational acceleration, d = water depth.
EXAMPLES
These two data records define 9 frequencies, numbered from 1 to 9, with values from from 0.2 rad/s
to 1.0 rad/s
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------- ---------| |
| |FREQ|
1|
6|
0.2|
0.3|
0.4|
0.5|
0.6|
0.7|
| |
| |FREQ|
7|
9|
0.8|
0.9|
1.0|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------- ----------
Frequency Generation
Automatic generation of frequencies is specified by setting the 1st frequency number to 0 (or blank).
Aqwa will then generate frequencies numbered from the previous frequency to the final frequency
number on the data record. The generated frequencies will be equally spaced between the first and
last frequencies on the data record.
This data record will generate 20 frequencies numbered from 1 to 20, equally spaced between 0.1 and
1.8 hertz.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
| |HRTZ|
0|
20|
0.1|
1.8|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------
These data records will generate 5 frequencies numbered from 1 to 5, equally spaced between 0.1 and
0.5 rad/s, followed by 10 frequencies numbered from 6 to 15, equally spaced between 0.55 and 1.0
rad/s.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
| |FREQ|
0|
5|
0.10|
0.50|
| |
| |FREQ|
0|
15|
0.55|
1.00|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------
73
10.4. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Hydrodynamic

Parameters are Computed
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |DIRN|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)-(8)Up to 6 Values of Direction(6F10.0)(DEGREES)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Terminal Direction Number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Initial Direction Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) These are the direction numbers associated with the values in columns 21-80. These numbers
must be used in subsequent data categories when referring to the direction values where they are used
to cross check the data input. The first number refers to the first value input (columns 21-30) and the
second number refers to the last value input. If the first number is zero or blank the program will generate directions automatically - see below.
(3)-(8) These are the values of direction at which the hydrodynamic parameters (Data Categories 7 and
8) are to be calculated. They are also the default directions at which the hull drag coefficients (Data
Category 10) are to be input. These values are associated with the numbers defined in columns 11-20
(see parameters (3)-(8) in The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed (p. 72)).
Rules Governing Input of Directions

(a) Direction numbers must be unique.
(b) There must be no 'gaps' in direction numbers, e.g. if five directions are input then these must be
numbered 1 through 5.
(c) Directions must be distinct and unique.
(d) If no symmetry is defined, direction values must be input for the directions from -180 to +180.
If SYMX is specified, direction values must be input for the directions from -180 to 0 or from 0 to
+180.
If SYMY is specified, direction values must be input for the directions from -90 to +90.
If both SYMX and SYMY are specified, direction values must be input for one 90 quadrant.
(e) When all data records in this data category have been input, ascending numbers must correspond
to ascending direction values.
74
The MVEF Data Record - Move Existing Frequency Parameters

(f ) Although more than one direction data record can be used, the total number of directions cannot
exceed 41. 41 directions can be input when there is no symmetry, 21 directions can be input when
there is one plane of symmetry, and 11 directions when there are two symmetry planes.
EXAMPLES
These two data records define 9 directions, numbered from 1 to 9, with values from -180 to 0.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------- ---------| |
| |DIRN|
1|
5|
-180.0|
-157.5|
-135.0|
-112.5|
-90.0|
|
| |
| |DIRN|
6|
9|
-67.5|
-45.0|
-22.5|
0.0|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------- ----------
Direction Generation
Automatic generation of directions is specified by setting the 1st direction number to 0 (or blank). Aqwa
will then generate directions numbered from the previous direction to the final direction number on
the data record. The generated directions will be equally spaced between the first and last directions
on the data record.
This data record will generate 21 directions numbered from 1 to 21, equally spaced between 0.0 and
180.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
| |DIRN|
0|
21|
0.0|
180.0|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------
These data records will generate 5 directions numbered from 1 to 5, equally spaced between 0 and
40, followed bya single direction at 45, followed by 5 more directions numbered from 7 to 11, equally
spaced between 50 and 90.
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
| |DIRN|
0|
5|
0.0|
40.0|
| |
| |DIRN|
6|
6|
45.0|
|
| |
| |DIRN|
0|
11|
50.0|
90.0|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------
10.5. The MVEF Data Record - Move Existing Frequency Parameters

This Data Record Has Been Withdrawn. The description is retained for backwards compatibility.
This data record is used to move the position of an existing frequency/period and its associated parameters within data read (from a backing file) from a previous run, in order to specify an additional frequency, (with a FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record), which would otherwise violate rule (d) in The
FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed (p. 72).
If periods are input, read period for frequency in this section.
Note that the MVEF data record relates only the structure indicated by the data category keyword.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |MVEF|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
75

| |
|
|
|_(2)Number of Destination Position of Frequency and Parameters(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Frequency and Parameters to be Moved(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The value of the frequency and frequency-dependent parameters associated with this number are
moved from their existing position to the position specified in columns 16-20, leaving a position in the
range of frequencies whose value of frequency is undefined. An additional frequency may subsequently
be input using a FREQ data record to specify the value of the frequency at the position corresponding
to this frequency number.
(2) This is the number of the position to which the value of frequency and frequency- dependent
parameters (associated with the number specified in columns 11-15) are to be moved.
Rules for Using the MVEF data record

(a) Both frequency numbers must lie in the range 1 through 10 (the maximum number of frequencies)
inclusive.
(b) The frequency and parameters to be moved must exist (i.e. they must have been read in from the
backing file).
(c) The frequency and parameters must not already exist in the position to which they are to be moved.
(d) When all data records are input for this data category the frequency numbers and values must not
violate rules (b) and (d) in The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed (p. 72).
Examples Using the MVEF Data Record

A backing file exists from a previous Aqwa-Line run with:
----------------------------------|
Example 1
|
Example 2
|
|
|
|
|---------------+-------------------|
| 1 2 3 4 5| 1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
|
|
--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|Existing frequency | .3 .4 .7 .9
| .3 .5 .8 .9
|
|values of
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|with parameters
| D D D D
| D D D D
|
|(D=Defined)
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|To insert frequency | .8
| .6 .7
|
|value(s) of
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|Use the MVEF data
|
4 5|
3
5
|
|record with
|
|
4
6 |
|parameters (1) and |
|
|
|(2), giving
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|frequency values of | .3 .4 .7 UN .9| .3 .4 UN UN .7 .9 |
|(UN=Undefined)
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|with parameters
| D D D UN D| D D UN UN D D |
76
The DELF Data Record - Delete Frequency Parameters

|
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|Then FREQ
|
4
|
3 4
|
|data record with
|
|
|
|parameters(2)/(1)(2)|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|with frequency value|
.8
|
.6 .7
|
|Ex 1 (3)/Ex 2 (3)(4)|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|Resulting frequency | .3 .4 .7 .8 .9| .3 .4 .6 .7 .8 .9 |
|values are
|
|
|
|--------------------+---------------+-------------------|
|with parameters
| D D D UN D| D D UN UN D D |
|
|
|
|
--------------------------------------------------------
The parameters indicated as 'UN' (undefined) are then calculated (Aqwa-Line only) or expected as input
in Data Categories 7 and 8. Note that if a frequency of 1.0 was required to be input, a FREQ data record
with frequency number 5 and this frequency value is valid WITHOUT a preceding MVEF data record.
10.6. The DELF Data Record - Delete Frequency Parameters

This Data Record Has Been Withdrawn. The description is retained for backwards compatibility.
This data record is used to delete an existing frequency/period and its associated parameters, within
data read from a backing file, from a previous run, in order to specify an additional frequency (with a
FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record), or to move/copy other parameters to this position (with a
MVEF/CPYF/CPYP/CPYH data record), which would otherwise violate rules (c) or (d) in The
FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed (p. 72).
If periods are input, read period for frequency in this section.
Note
The DELF data record relates only to the structure indicated by the data category keyword.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |DELF|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Number of Frequency and Associated
| |
|
Parameters which are to be Deleted(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
Rules for Using the DELF Data Record

(a) The frequency number must lie in the range 1 through 50 (the maximum number of frequencies)
inclusive.
(b) The frequency and parameters to be deleted must exist (i.e. they must have been read in from the
backing file).
77

(c) The frequency should not be the ONLY existing frequency, as the directions associated with this
frequency and structure then become undefined. The directions must then be redefined using a DIRN
data record.
Note
Redefinition of a different range of directions will cause an ERROR, if Data Category 10 is
used to input direction-dependent parameters based on the ORIGINAL range of directions
which became undefined. A warning message is therefore output if the only existing frequency
is deleted.
10.7.The CSTR Data Record - Copying Existing Hydrodynamic Parameters

for a Specific Structure Number
This data record is used to change the structure number from which parameters are to be copied, using
a FREQ/PERD/HRTZ or CPYS, CPDB data record (see below). This structure number remains operative
until another CSTR data record is input.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |CSTR|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Structure number from which the frequency and
| |
|
associated parameters are to be copied(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
database.
10.8.The FILE Data Record - Copying Existing Hydrodynamic Parameters

from an External File
This data record is used to define a file name from which the database is to be copied using a CPDB
data record, or to change the file unit from which parameters are to be copied, using a FREQ/PERD/HRTZ
or CPYS data record (see below). This file name or unit remains operative until another FILE data record
is input.
database.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |FILE|
|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Filename from which the database
| |
|
|
is to be copied
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)(Optional) Number of file unit from which the
78
The CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records - Copy Frequency Parameters

| |
|
frequency and associated parameters
| |
|
are to be copied(I5)
| |
|
| |
|_Compulsory data record keyword(A4)
| |
| |_Optional user identifier(A2)
|
|_Compulsory END on last data record in data category(A3)
(1) This may be any of the numbers assigned to Aqwa scratch files. See Section 9 entitled Running the
Program in each of the Aqwa program manuals, for the FORTRAN units which are valid on computer
installations.
(2) This is a file name, usually a *.HYD file from a previous Aqwa-Line analysis, whose database is to be
copied.
Note
It is preferable to use option (2) in conjunction with the CSTR data record (The CSTR Data
Record - Copying Existing Hydrodynamic Parameters for a Specific Structure Number (p. 78))
and the CPDB data record (The CPDB Data Record - Copy Existing Hydrodynamic Data
Base (p. 81)). In this case, option (1), the file unit number, is not required.
10.9. The CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records - Copy Frequency Parameters

This data record is used to copy existing frequency dependent parameters within data read from a
backing file, from a previous run, in order to duplicate these values in a position in the frequency range
for the structure indicated by the data category keyword. If a CSTR and/or FILE data record precedes,
then this data record will copy the parameters from a structure and/or file different from the structure
indicated on the data category keyword.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |CPYF|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |CPYP|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |CPYH|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Frequency/Period (default=original F/P)
| |
|
|
|
CPYF=radians/sec
| |
|
|
|
CPYP=seconds
| |
|
|
|
CPYH=hertz(6F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Number of Destination Position of Parameters(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Frequency and Parameters to be Copied(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The value of the frequency-dependent parameters associated with this number within the structure
and backing file specified on the preceding CSTR and FILE data record, are to be copied to the position
specified in columns 16-20, within the structure indicated by the data category keyword. These parameters are referred to as those within the source file. Note that if there is no preceding CSTR or FILE
79

data record then the structure number will default to the structure indicated on the data category
keyword and the default file will be the hydrodynamics database (.HYD) file. (See Chapter 9 of the user
manuals).
(2) This is the number of the position to which the frequency-dependent parameters (associated with
the number specified in columns 11-15) are copied. This position is ALWAYS with reference to the range
of frequencies associated with the structure number indicated on the data category keyword. These
parameters are referred to as those within the DESTINATION file.
(3) This is value of the frequency/period of the newly created position and parameters (associated with
the number specified in columns 16-20) to be copied. If this field is left blank, or zero is input, the default
value will be the same as that of the position copied.
Rules for Using the CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records

(a) Both frequency numbers must lie in the range 1 through 50 (the maximum number of frequencies)
inclusive.
(b) The frequency and parameters to be copied must exist in the source file (i.e. they must have been
read in from the backing file).
(c) The frequency and parameters must NOT already exist in the DESTINATION file.
(d) When all data records are input for this data category, the frequency numbers and values must not
violate rules (b) and (d) in The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which the Hydrodynamic Parameters are Computed (p. 72).
(e) The number and value of the directions in the source file must be the same as those in the DESTINATION file. See also rule (c) in The DELF Data Record - Delete Frequency Parameters (p. 77).
Parameters in the source File on the CPYF/CPYP/CPYH data records

It is important to note that the source file remains unaltered throughout the processing of this data
category. Thus frequencies and their corresponding parameters created or deleted by use of the MVEF,
DELF, CPYF/P/H or CPYS data records will not be contained in the source file (if this is also the destination
file) until the next data category is encountered. In addition, parameters contained in the files specified
on the FILE data record remain unaltered throughout the processing of all data categories.
Examples Using the CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records

---------------------------|
Example 1
| Example 2 |
-------+---------------+------------|
| 1 2 | 1 2 3 4 5| 1 2 3
|
|
|
|
|
--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|Backing file(s) from| SOURCE| DESTINATION | DESTINATION|
|AQWA-LINE exist with| File |
File
|
File
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|existing frequency | .6 .7 | .5 .8 .9
| .5 .8 .9
|
|values of
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|with parameters
| D D | D D D
| D D D
|
|(D=Defined)
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|To copy parameters | 1 2 |
|
|
|from positions
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|to positions
|
|
2 3
|
2 3
|
80
The CPDB Data Record - Copy Existing Hydrodynamic Data Base

|
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|Use MVEF/DELF data |
|
2
4
|
2
|
|record with
|
|
3
5|
3
|
|parameters for
|
|
|
|
|Ex 1 (1)(2)/Ex 2 (2)|
| (using MVEF) |(using DELF)|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|and frequency values| .6 .7 | .5 UN UN .8 .9| .5 UN UN
|
|(UN=Undefined), with|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|resulting parameters| D D | D UN UN D D| D UN UN
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|Then CPYF/CPYP/CPYH | 1
|
2
|
2
|
|data record with
|
2 |
3
|
3
|
|parameters
|
|
|
|
|(1) and (2) of
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|with corresponding |
| left blank
| left blank |
|frequency value(s) |
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|Resulting frequency | .6 .7 | .5 .6 .7 .8 .9| .5 .6 .7
|
|values are
|
|
|
|
|--------------------+-------+---------------+------------|
|with parameters
| D D | D D D D D| D D D
|
|
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------------
10.10. The CPYS Data Record - Copy Stiffness Matrix

The new user is advised to ignore this facility.
This data record is used when copying the stiffness matrix from data read from a backing file from a
previous run in order to duplicate these values for the structure indicated by the data category keyword.
The preceding CSTR and/or FILE data records define the structure and the source file from which the
stiffness matrix is to be copied. See also The CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records - Copy Frequency Parameters (p. 79), Note 2.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |CPYS|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
| |
|
10.11. The CPDB Data Record - Copy Existing Hydrodynamic Data Base
This data record is used when copying the hydrodynamic data from a backing file (*.HYD) from a previous
run in order to duplicate the data base for the structure indicated by the data category keyword. The
preceding CSTR and/or FILE data records define the structure and the source file from which the data
base is to be copied. See also The CPYF/CPYP/CPYH Data Records - Copy Frequency Parameters (p. 79),
Note 2.
database.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |CPDB|
- --- -- ---| |
|
81

| |
| |
|
10.12. The FWDS Data Record - Define Forward Speed

This data record is used to define a constant forward speed of the structure indicated by the data category keyword. A positive speed indicates the vessel moving in +x direction, and a negative speed is
for the vessel moving in -x direction. The wave direction is defined as the direction in which the waves
are travelling in the global axis system, which is the same as for the zero forward speed case. However,
when FWDS exists only one direction is allowed in the DIRN data record at present.
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- -----------|X|
| |FWDS|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- -----------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Value of Speed (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) Speed must be defined in units consistent with those used for gravity and density in Data Category
5.
10.13. Database Import

Import for Two Non-Interacting Structures
This example shows import of databases for two non-interacting structures, from two different .HYD
files. Note that Structure 1 in the current run, which is identified by the keyword FDR1, uses data from
Structure 1 in AL_RUN1.HYD. Structure 2 in the current run, which is identified by the keyword FDR2,
uses data from Structure 1 in AL_RUN3.HYD.
06
FDR1
06FILE
06CSTR
1
06CPDB
AL_RUN1.HYD
END
06
FDR2
06FILE
06CSTR
1
06CPDB
AL_RUN3.HYD
END
Import for Interacting Structures

When using the FILE / CSTR / CPDB data records to import a hydrodynamic database from a previous
Aqwa-Line run, for a group of hydrodynamically interacting structures, it is only necessary to refer to
the 1st structure in the group. Data for the other structures will be imported automatically. In the example
below there are 5 structures, of which structures 2,3,4 form an interacting group. The data is imported
from three different .HYD files.
82
Database Import
06
FDR1
06FILE
06CSTR
1
06CPDB
AL_RUN1.HYD
END
06
FDR2
06FILE
06CSTR
1
06CPDB
AL_RUN2.HYD
END
06
FDR5
06FILE
06CSTR
1
06CPDB
AL_RUN3.HYD
END
06
FINI
Note
A FINI data record is required. This is because the program is expecting to read 5 FDR* data
records and there are only three.
83
84
Chapter 11: Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters and Stiffness

Matrix - WFS* (Data Category 7)
For the WFS data categories, the * indicates the structure number; for example, enter WFS1 for Structure
1, WFS2 for Structure 2, .... WF10 for Structure 10.

This data category is used to input or change the wave frequency dependent hydrodynamic parameters
and the linear hydrostatic stiffness matrix of one or more structures. All parameters, except the hydrostatic stiffness, are associated with the frequencies and directions input in the previous data category
(Data Category 6). Values of added mass, and radiation damping may be input for each frequency.
Values of diffraction forces, Froude Krylov forces and response amplitude operators (RAOs) may be input
for each frequency and for each direction.
Although this data category is applicable to all programs using the hydrodynamic parameters this data
category is only used when:
(a) the backing file produced by a previous Aqwa-Line run, containing the values of the parameters, is
not available, i.e. Aqwa-Line has not been run previously, or the user wishes to input values of the
parameters obtained from a source other than Aqwa-Line
or
(b) the user wishes to change some of the values or append to some of the values calculated by a
previous Aqwa-Line run for the current analysis (Aqwa-Fer/ Drift/Librium/Naut) or within the backing
file (Aqwa-Line only).
The normal mode of operation of the programs using the hydrodynamic parameters is to read these
values from the backing file of a previous Aqwa-Line run. Therefore, unless (a) or (b) above apply, the
user should omit this data category by entering NONE for the data category keyword (see Compulsory
Data Category Keyword (p. 27)).
3. Default Values when Omitting Data Records
With the exception of the specification of frequency and direction, which are required for the input of
parameters dependent on these variables, the omission of any data record in this data category will
result in the existing values being unchanged. Any data record in this data category whose values are
all zero in columns 21-80, and which does not overwrite existing values is redundant and may be
omitted.

|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|WFS1|
---- -- ---- ----
85
Wave Frequency Dependent Parameters and Stiffness Matrix - WFS* (Data Category
7)
|
|
|
|
11.3. The LSTF Data Record - Linear Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix

These data records may be used to input a linear hydrostatic stiffness matrix. If the matrix has been
read from the backing file, the LSTF data record will replace (i.e. overwrite) the existing values within
that matrix. If you wish to add TO the existing values, use the ASTF data record (The ASTF Data Record
- Additional Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix (p. 96)).
Note
LSTF data records must be used to define the whole hydrostatic stiffness matrix for a particular
structure. If any LSTF data records are used, undefined rows will be re-set to zero.
The Z coordinate of the center of gravity and the buoyancy force at equilibrium must always
be defined when using LSTF data records to specify the stiffness matrix.
See the notes at the end of this section about the effects of the LSTF data record on the calculations.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |LSTF|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Stiffness Values
| |
|
|
(6E10.0)(Units for freedoms
| |
|
|
1-3 = force/length,
| |
|
|
4-6 = force*length/RADIAN)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Row Number of Stiffness Matrix(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This number indicates which row of the stiffness matrix the values input in columns 21-80 relate to.
(2)-(7) These are the values which replace the row (1) in the hydrostatic stiffness matrix.
Note
Stiffness related forces acting on the structure
The linear hydrostatic stiffness matrix relates to the hydrostatic forces contributing to the
equations of static equilibrium of a structure. Specifically, the net linear hydrostatic forces
F(s), acting at the center of gravity of a structure, when the structure is at an arbitrary
position X, is given by:
F(s) = K ( X(e) - X ) + B(e)
86
The ZCGE Data Record - Z Coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium

where
K = stiffness matrix
X(e) = equilibrium position
B(e) = buoyancy force at equilibrium
At equilibrium, all forces act in the Z direction of the Fixed Reference Axis (FRA), where
X(e)=X, and B(e) = F(s). Thus, the Z coordinate of the center of gravity and the buoyancy
force at equilibrium must always be defined, when using the LSTF data record to specify
the stiffness matrix, in order to fully describe the hydrostatic forces acting on the structure.
These parameters must be input using the ZCGE and BFEQ data records which are described
in The ZCGE Data Record - Z Coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium (p. 87)
and The BFEQ Data Record - Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium (p. 88).
Effect of the LSTF data record when running Aqwa-Line
Normally Aqwa-Line calculates the hydrostatic stiffness matrix from the element description
in Data Category 2. Input of 1 or more LSTF data records indicates that this calculation is
to be omitted for the specified structure, and the hydrostatic stiffness matrix will use the
specified values. Data Records must be used in sets of 6 to define the full hydrostatic
stiffness matrix; undefined values will default to zero.
The hydrostatic stiffness matrix is used in the calculation of the 2nd order drift coefficients.
For this purpose it should only represent the hydrostatic stiffness of the outer wetted hull
itself; LSTF should not be increased to add in the effect of (e.g.) moorings.
11.4. The ZCGE Data Record - Z Coordinate of the Center of Gravity at

Equilibrium
This data record is used to specify the Z coordinate of the center of gravity when the structure is at its
free-floating equilibrium position (i.e. with no articulations and no mooring lines attached), which is
used in the calculation of the linear hydrostatic forces (see The LSTF Data Record - Linear Hydrostatic
Stiffness Matrix (p. 86)). It is also used in Aqwa-Line to indicate the structure position for the radiation/diffraction analysis.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- --------- --------|X|
| |ZCGE|XXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Z Coordinate of the Center of Gravity at Equilibrium(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
87
7)
Note
1. An alternative method of specifying the free-floating equilibrium position is to use the ZLWL
data record in Data Category 2 (The ZLWL Data Record - Waterline Height (p. 59)).
2. If the ZCGE and ZLWL data records are both absent, the definition position based on the
nodes in Data Category 1 will be used.
3. This position is not USED as the starting position for an analysis using Aqwa-Librium, Fer, Drift
or Naut. This must be specified in Data Category 15 or by using the RDEP option (Administration
and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)).
11.5. The BFEQ Data Record - Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium

This data record is used to specify the vertical buoyancy force when the structure is at its free-floating
equilibrium position (i.e. with no articulations and no mooring lines attached), which is used in the
calculation of the linear hydrostatic forces.
If a BFEQ data record is used, there must also be a LSTF data record (The LSTF Data Record - Linear
Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix (p. 86)).
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- --------- --------|X|
| |BFEQ|XXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Vertical Buoyancy Force at Equilibrium(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
11.6. The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Record - Frequencies/Periods at which

the Parameters are Defined
This data record is used to specify the frequency at which following frequency dependent hydrodynamic
parameters are input. The frequency/period specified is operative until another FREQ/PERD/ HRTZ data
record is input.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |FREQ|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |PERD|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |HRTZ|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Frequency/Period Value(F10.0)
| |
|
|
(FREQ=radians/sec)
| |
|
|
(PERD=seconds)
88
The WAMS Data Record - Wave Frequency Added Mass Matrix and the WDMP Data
Record - Wave Frequency Damping Matrix
| |
|
|
(HRTZ=hertz)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Frequency/Period Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is the number of the frequency/period which corresponds to the value in columns 21-30. This
number must correspond to one of the frequency numbers specified in Data Category 6.
(2) The frequency/period value should be the same as that specified in Data Category 6 and is used
only as a check that the frequency number(1) has been input correctly. It does not redefine the frequency
value. If the value is not the same as in Data Category 6, an error will occur.
11.7. The WAMS Data Record - Wave Frequency Added Mass Matrix and
the WDMP Data Record - Wave Frequency Damping Matrix
These data records may be used to input the added mass matrix (WAMS) and linear damping matrix
(WDMP) at the frequency/period specified on the preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record. If the matrix
has been read from backing file, the WAMS or WDMP data record will replace (i.e. overwrite) the existing
values within that matrix. (NB see Note 1 at the end of this section, when using Aqwa-Line.)
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |WAMS|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |WDMP|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)-(8) 6 Mass/Inertia or Linear Damping Values(6E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Row Number of Added Mass or Damping Matrix(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(9),(10) Structure Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Compulsory Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values (3) and row number (2) refer to the added
mass (WAMS) or damping matrix (WDMP).
(2) This number indicates to which row of the added mass/damping matrix the values in columns 2180 correspond.
(3)-(8) These are the values which replace those in the row (2) of the existing added mass/damping
matrix.
(9) If the values input in columns 21-80 are to be used for convolution, the structure number must be
input here.
89
7)
(10) If the analysis includes hydrodynamically interacting structures, this is the number of the structure
which interacts with that defined on the data category keyword (WFS*). The structure number must be
input even if the co-efficients are those giving the effect of the structure on itself (i.e. structure 1 in
data category WFS1). Both complete added mass and damping matrices should be input; if part matrices
are input the results will probably be inaccurate or the program may fail. When using Aqwa-Line, see
note 1 below.
Note
1. Effect of the WAMS/WDMP Data Record when Running Aqwa-Line
Input of the added mass/damping matrix is redundant information when running AqwaLine, as the program normally calculates these matrices. Therefore, use of one or more
WAMS/WDMP data records will instruct Aqwa-Line not to perform a radiation/diffraction
analysis at this frequency. The user must then specify all other parameters which would
otherwise be calculated at this frequency, i.e. the linear damping/added mass matrix,
Froude Krylov and diffraction forces.
2. Convolution
When the added mass and damping have been input by the user, it is not possible to use
convolution to calculate radiation forces in Aqwa-Drift or Naut.
11.8. The WDGA Data Record - Wave Frequency Diagonal Added Mass
and the WDGD Data Record - Wave Frequency Diagonal Damping
These data records represent a more convenient manner to input the added mass matrix (WDGA) and
linear damping matrix (WDGD) at the frequency/period specified on the preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ
data record, when there are no off diagonal terms coupling the degrees of freedom of motion. They
are used instead of the data records WAMS and WDMP respectively, which are used only when these
coupling terms exist. If the added mass or damping matrix has been read from backing file, the WDGA
or WDGD data record will replace (i.e. overwrite) the existing values within that matrix. See also the
note at the end of this section, when using Aqwa-Line.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |WDGA|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |WDGD|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Mass/Inertia or Linear Damping Values(6E10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values (3) refer to the added mass matrix (WDGA)
or to the damping matrix (WDGD)
90
The AAMS/ADMP Data Record - Additional Added Mass/Damping Matrices

(2)-(7) These are the values which replace those in the leading diagonal of the added mass/damping
matrix. All other elements of the matrix are set to zero.
Note
Effect of the WDGA/WDGD Data Record when Using Aqwa-Line
Input of the wave frequency added mass/damping matrix is redundant information when
running Aqwa-Line as the program normally calculates these matrices. Therefore, use of a
WDGA/WDGD data record will instruct Aqwa-Line not to perform a radiation/diffraction
analysis at this frequency. The user must then specify all other parameters which would
otherwise be calculated at this frequency, i.e. the linear damping/added mass matrix, Froude
Krylov and diffraction forces.
11.9. The AAMS/ADMP Data Record - Additional Added Mass/Damping

Matrices
These data records may be used to input an added mass (AAMS) or linear damping (ADMP) matrix additional to that input or calculated at the frequency/ period specified on the preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ
data record. The values input will add TO any existing values previously input via data records or
backing file, or add TO any subsequent values input or calculated by Aqwa-Line.
Note
If the convolution method is to be used in a time domain analysis, the AAMS and ADMP data
records which define the frequency dependent additional added mass and damping matrices
should be replaced by the frequency independent additional added mass and damping
defined by FIAM, FIDP (for matrices) ( The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent
Additional Added Mass/Damping Matrices (p. 92)) or FIDA, FIDD (for diagonal terms) (The
FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Diagonal Added Mass/Damping (p. 92)).
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |AAMS|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |ADMP|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)-(8)6 Added Mass/Damping Values(6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Row Number of Added Mass/Damping Matrix(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values (3) and row number (2) refer to the added
mass (AAMS) or damping (ADMP) matrix
(2) This number indicates the row of the added mass/damping matrix to which the values in columns
21-80 correspond.
91
7)
(3)-(8) These are the values which add TO those in the row (2) of the existing added mass/ damping
matrix or add TO any subsequent values input or calculated by Aqwa-Line.
11.10. The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional

Added Mass/Damping Matrices
These data records may be used to input an added mass (FIAM) or linear damping (FIDP) matrix additional to that input or calculated. The values input will add TO any values previously input via data records
or backing file, or add TO any subsequent values input or calculated by Aqwa-Line.
As these are frequency independent parameters, the values defined in the FIAM and FIDP data records
will apply to all the frequencies. Therefore there is no preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record for FIAM
and FIDP.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIAM|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIDP|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values refer to the added mass (FIAM) or damping
(FIDP)
21-80 correspond.
(3)-(8) These are the values which add TO those in the existing added mass/ damping matrix or add TO
any subsequent added mass/damping values input or calculated by Aqwa-Line.
11.11. The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional

Diagonal Added Mass/Damping
These data records may be used to input a diagonal added mass (FIDA) or diagonal linear damping
(FIDD) in addition to that input or calculated. The values input will add TO any values previously input
via data records or backing file, or add TO any subsequent values input or calculated by Aqwa-Line.
As these are frequency independent parameters, the values defined in the FIDA and FIDD data records
will apply to all the frequencies. Therefore there is no preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record for FIDA
and FIDD. Also as FIDA and FIDD only define the diagonal terms of the additional added mass and
damping matrices, row number is no longer needed.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIDA| XXXXX
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIDD| XXXXX
|
|
|
...
92
The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Parameters are Defined
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values refer to the added mass (FIDA) or damping
(FIDD).
(2)-(7) These are the values which add TO the diagonal terms of the existing added mass/ damping
matrix or add TO any subsequent diagonal added mass/damping values input or calculated by AqwaLine.
Note
Only one FIDA data record is needed for defining the diagonal terms of an additional added
mass matrix. If more than one FIDA data record is used for a structure, only those values in
the last FIDA data record will be used. This also applies to the FIDD data record.
11.12. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Parameters are
Defined
This data record is used to specify the direction to which the following diffraction forces, Froude Krylov
forces or response amplitude operators, relate. The direction specified is operative until another DIRN
data record is input. (NB See also the note at the end of this section when using Aqwa-Line.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |DIRN|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Values of Direction (DEGREES)(6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Direction Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is the number of the direction which corresponds to the values input in columns 21-30. This
number must be one of the direction numbers specified in Data Category 6.
93
7)
(2) The direction value should be the same as that specified in Data Category 6 and is used only as a
check that the direction number (1) has been input correctly. It does not redefine the direction value.
If the value is not the same, an error will occur.
Note
Effect of the DIRN Data Record when Running Aqwa-Line
Input of the Froude Krylov forces, diffraction forces or RAOs is redundant, when running
Aqwa-Line, as the program normally calculates these parameters. The DIRN data record is a
precursor to inputting values of these parameters. Therefore, use of a DIRN data record will
instruct Aqwa-Line not to perform a radiation/diffraction analysis at this frequency. The user
must then specify all the other parameters which would otherwise have been calculated by
the analysis at this frequency, i.e. the linear damping/added mass matrix, Froude Krylov and
diffraction forces.
11.13. The TDIF/RDIF/TFKV/RFKV/TRAO/RRAO Data Records - Wave Frequency Diffraction Forces and Responses
These data records are used to input the vectors of diffraction forces, Froude Krylov forces and RAOs
at the frequency/period specified on the preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record, and at the direction
specified on the preceding DIRN data record. If the vectors have been read from backing file, the values
input on each data record will replace (i.e. overwrite) the existing values.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |TDIF|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |RDIF|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |TFKV|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |RFKV|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |TRAO|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------|X|
| |RRAO|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ----------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(2)Surge(X) (3)Surge(X) (4)Sway(Y)
(5)Sway(Y) (6)Heave(Z) (7)Heave(Z)
| |
|
Roll(RX)
Roll(RX)
Pitch(RY)
Pitch(RY)
Yaw(RZ)
Yaw(RZ)
| |
|
Amplitude
Phase
Amplitude
Phase
Amplitude
Phase
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether values in columns 21-80 are diffraction forces, Froude
Krylov forces or Response Amplitude Operators (RAOs) and whether the values relate to the translational
or rotational degrees of freedom, i.e.:
TDIF - Translation Diffraction Forces
RDIF - Rotational Diffraction Forces
TFKV - Translational Froude Krylov Forces
94
The SSTR Data Record - Submerged Structure

RFKV - Rotational Froude Krylov Forces
TRAO - Translational RAOs
RRAO - Rotational RAOs
(2)-(7) These are the values of the forces or responses, indicated by the data record keyword(1).
The units for each data record keyword are as follows:
TDIF - Units of Force / Unit Wave Amplitude
RDIF - Units of Force / Length/Unit Wave Amplitude
TFKV - Units of Force / Unit Wave Amplitude
RFKV - Units of Force / Length/Unit Wave Amplitude
TRAO - Units of Length / Unit Wave Amplitude
RRAO - Units of DEGREES / Unit Wave Amplitude
11.14.The GMXX/GMYY Data Record - User-Specified Metacentric Height

The hydrostatic stiffness in the hydrodynamic database can be modified to a user specified value creating
additional stiffness automatically. This is achieved by specifying the required GMX and GMY (about the
global X/Y axis) in Data Category 7 as follows:
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |GMXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |GMYY|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----------- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_ (1) Required Value
| |
|
| |
|_ Data Record Name(A4)
| |
|
(1) Aqwa firstly calculates the hydrostatic stiffness matrix based only on the cut water plane and displaced
volume properties. It then adjusts the second moments of area IXX, IYY and recalculates its associated
properties, PHI (principal axis), GMX/GMY, BMX/BMY etc. to give the required GM values. The associated
additional hydrostatic stiffness is calculated automatically and stored in the hydrodynamic database.
Note that if the GM value input is less than that based on the geometry alone, the resulting additional
stiffness will be negative. This would be the case if ballast tanks were being modeled, making the
structure less stable, statically.
11.15. The SSTR Data Record - Submerged Structure

When a structure has no elements at or above the waterline this data record is used to tell Aqwa that
the structure is submerged.
2
95
7)
- --- -- ---X|
| |SSTR|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|_(1)Submerged structure(A4)
| |
|
11.16. The ASTF Data Record - Additional Hydrostatic Stiffness Matrix

The ASTF data record may be used to add TO the existing values within the hydrostatic stiffness matrix.
Note
If the analysis includes stage 2 any additional stiffness already in the database will be re-set
to zero and must be re-defined.
See the notes at the end of this section about the effects of this data record when using different programs.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |ASTF|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Stiffness Values
| |
|
|
(6E10.0)(Units for freedoms
| |
|
|
1-3 = force/length,
| |
|
|
4-6 = force*length/RADIAN)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2)-(7) These are the values which add TO the row (1) in the hydrostatic stiffness matrix.
Stiffness related forces acting on the structure
The linear stiffness matrix relates to the hydrostatic forces contributing to the equations of static
equilibrium of a structure. Specifically, the net linear hydrostatic forces F(s), acting at the center of
gravity of a structure, when the structure is at an arbitrary position X, is given by:
F(s) = K ( X(e) - X ) + B(e)
where
K = stiffness matrix
X(e) = equilibrium position
96
The SSTF/SPOS/SFRC Data Records - Additional Structural Stiffness

B(e) = buoyancy force at equilibrium
If the ASTF data record is used, the program will use X(e) and B(e) as calculated by the program.
However, it should be checked that the above expression, which is used to calculate the LINEAR hydrostatic forces throughout the Aqwa suite, produces the forces on the structure intended by the
user.
Effect of the ASTF data record when running Aqwa-Line
Additional hydrostatic stiffness is stored in the database and used in the calculation of the RAOs.
However, it is not used in the calculation of the 2nd order drift forces.
Effect of the ASTF data record when running Aqwa-Librium/Fer/Drift/Naut
Note that in the equation above the term X(e) is the Aqwa-Line equilibrium position. If the initial
position in a subsequent Librium/Fer/Drift/Naut analysis is not as defined in the Line run then there
will be restoring forces which will try to return the structure to the Aqwa-Line equilibrium position.
Effect of multiple ASTF data records
If additional stiffness is required and stage 2 is run it is always necessary to use the ASTF data record.
11.17.The SSTF/SPOS/SFRC Data Records - Additional Structural Stiffness

The data records described in this chapter define an additional structural (i.e. not hydrostatic) stiffness,
that may act on one structure or may connect two structures. The additional force acting on the structure(s) is defined as
F = F(e) + K.(X - X(e)) where
X(e) is the equilibrium position, defined on the SPOS data record (The SPOS Data Record - Equilibrium
Position (p. 98))
F(e) is the force at the equilibrium position, defined on the SFRC data record (The SFRC Data Record Force at Equilibrium Position (p. 98))
K is the stiffness, defined using SSTF data records (The SSTF Data Record - Additional Structural Stiffness
Matrix (p. 97))
11.17.1. The SSTF Data Record - Additional Structural Stiffness Matrix

This data record may be used to input an additional linear structure stiffness matrix in the global fixed
frame. If the analysis includes stage 2 the matrix will be re-set to zero and must be re-defined. If the NASF
option is used (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)), this matrix will not
be included in the analysis.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |SSTF|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)6 Stiffness Values (6E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
97
7)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)2nd Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
| |
|
(2) The data on this data record defines one row of a stiffness matrix coupling this structure to the one
indicated on the WFS* data record in the data category keyword (referred to here as Structure#1). If
this is zero or omitted, Structure#2 is set to be the same as Structure#1. Otherwise this number must
not be less than Structure#1.
(4)-(9) These are the values for the row (3) in the 6x6 additional structure stiffness sub-matrix. The units
for angles are radians.
11.17.2. The SPOS Data Record - Equilibrium Position

This data record may be used to optionally input the equilibrium position of the structure in the global
fixed frame for the additional structure stiffness force calculation only. This data record does not move
the structure to this position. Without this data record, the default position will be that position defined
by Data Categories 1-2.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |SPOS|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7) 6 position coordinates (6E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2)-(7) The units for angular positions are degrees.
11.17.3. The SFRC Data Record - Force at Equilibrium Position

This data record may be used to input the force on the structure at the equilibrium position due to the
additional structural stiffness, in the global fixed frame, for the additional structure stiffness force calculation only.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |SFRC|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7) 6 Force Components (6E10.0)
| |
|
| |
98
The SSTF/SPOS/SFRC Data Records - Additional Structural Stiffness

| |
|
99
100
Chapter 12: Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8)

When entering DRC data categories, the * indicates the structure number; for example, enter DRC1 for
Structure 1, DRC2 for Structure 2, .... DR10 for Structure 10.

This data category is used to input the regular wave drift forces acting on each structure at the frequencies and directions previously defined in Data Category 6.
The drift forces are applicable to the following programs:
Aqwa-Fer: used to calculate the drift frequency motions in the frequency domain.
Aqwa-Drift: used to calculate the drift frequency motions in the time domain.
Aqwa-Line: used only to change the values of the drift forces in the backing file.
Aqwa-Librium: used to calculate the steady drift forces contributing to the equilibrium position and the
dynamic stability of drift frequency motions.
Aqwa-Naut: not applicable.
This data category is used when:
(a) the user wishes to input a database of hydrodynamic coefficients obtained from a source other than
Aqwa-Line.
or
(b) the user wishes to change some of the values calculated by a previous Aqwa-Line run, for the current
analysis (Aqwa-Fer/ Drift/Librium), or within the backing file (Aqwa-Line only).
The normal mode of operation of the programs using the drift forces is to read these values from the
backing file of a previous Aqwa-Line run. Therefore, unless (a) or (b) above apply, the user should omit
these data categories by entering 'NONE' for the data category keyword (see Compulsory Data Category
Keyword (p. 27) and Omission of Data Categories (p. 30)).
WARNING when running Aqwa-Line

Aqwa-Line handles the hydrodynamic coefficients in sets with each set relating to one frequency. It has
two ways to obtain these sets of coefficients.
(a) It can import them from a previously calculated database or from the .DAT file or (for the QTFs) a
separate ASCII file
or
(b) it can carry out a radiation/diffraction calculation to calculate them.
101
Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8)

These two methods cannot be mixed. If the program imports any data for a particular frequency it assumes all the data is to be imported and does NOT do a calculation for that frequency. This means that
if you want to change some of the coefficients for a particular frequency (e.g. the surge drift coefficients)
you must:
(1) carry out a "standard" Aqwa-Line radiation/diffraction analysis to populate the whole database
and then
(2) carry out a 2nd Aqwa-Line run, reading in the previously calculated database (.HYD file) and using
DRFX data records to change the relevant drift coefficients.

|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|DRC1|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
12.3.The FREQ/PERD/HRTZ Data Records - Frequencies/Periods at which

the Drift Coefficients are defined
Any one of these data records will define the frequency/period number and value at which the following
drift coefficients apply. This frequency/period is operative until another FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record
is encountered.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |FREQ|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |PERD|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |HRTZ|XXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Frequency/Period Value
| |
|
|
(FREQ=radians/sec)
| |
|
|
(PERD=seconds)
| |
|
|
(HRTZ=hertz)(F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Frequency/Period Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is the number of the frequency/period, as specified in Data Category 6.

(2) The frequency/period Value should be the same as that specified in Data Category 6 and is used
only as a check that the frequency number (1) has been input correctly. It does not re-define the frequency value. If the values are not the same, an error will occur.
102
The DRFX/DRFY/DRRZ Data Records - Drift Force Coefficients
12.4. The DRFX/DRFY/DRRZ Data Records - Drift Force Coefficients

The frequency/period to which the values of the following drift coefficients apply are given by the
preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |DRF*|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |DRR*|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|------------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)Up to 6 Drift Coefficients(6E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The data record keyword indicates the freedom of the structure, as defined in the Fixed Reference
Axis system (FRA), to which the drift coefficients apply, where:
DRFX - X translational freedom of motion
DRFY - Y translational freedom of motion
DRFZ - Z translational freedom of motion
DRRX - X rotational freedom of motion
DRRY - Y rotational freedom of motion
DRRZ - Z rotational freedom of motion, i.e. XY plane rotation
(2)-(3) These are the directions, as defined in Data Category 6, to which the values of the drift coefficients
in columns 21-80 apply, e.g.
----------------------------------------------------|If the Drift Coefficient(s) | Initial | Terminal |
|Correspond(s) to Direction(s)| Direction | Direction |
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
1,2,3,4,5 and 6
|
1
|
6
|
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
4,5,6, and 7
|
4
|
7
|
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
3
|
3
|
3
|
-----------------------------------------------------
(4)-(9) These are the values of the drift coefficients which are defined at the directions specified by (2)
and (3) and at the frequency/period specified on the preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record. Note
that when less than 6 coefficients are input on one data record, the values in the extra fields on the
data record are ignored.
103
Drift Force Coefficients - DRC* (Data Category 8)
12.5. The CQTF Data Record - Import of QTF Database

The CQTF data record is used to import fully coupled QTF coefficients. Both difference and sum frequency
values must be input, even if the sum frequency values are not required. (Use the SQTF option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)) to include sum frequencies in an analysis).
Note that import of external QTF coefficients is a "post-processing" operation that must be done after
the hydrodynamic database has been created. This means that the CQTF data record will normally be
used in the same run as a CPDB data record is used to import a previously calculated hydrodynamic
database. It cannot be used in a full radiation/diffraction analysis, i.e. with wave frequencies and directions
defined in Data Category 6.
The format of the CQTF data record is as follows.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |CQTF|
|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)File containing QTF values in AQWA format(A108)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Structure number from which the QTF values are to be copied(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) QTFs are copied from this structure in the QTF file to the structure number indicated by the data
category keyword (DRC* data record).
(2) The format of the input file is the same as the format of the .QTF file written by Aqwa when the
AQTF option is used. The .QTF file is ASCII with the first line containing the version number of the file
itself and optional user title. At present all files must start with version 1.0. A simple example is shown
here and the format is explained in detail below.
AQTF-1.0 :EXAMPLE QTF

1 4 3
0.00000
0.3490659
1 1 1 1 5.9360E+04
0.0000E+00
-3.9416E+04
2.8808E+05
1 1 1 2 1.8867E+05
4.2620E+05
-3.8360E+05
-1.6839E+05
DATA FILE
30.00000
45.00000
90.00000
0.4188791
0.5235988
1.5438E-02 9.2001E+05 3.7491E+00 4.0415E+06 2.9768E-01
0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
1.4039E-02 2.9887E+06 -2.8746E+00 -5.9962E+06 -1.4445E-01
1.5872E-02 1.6689E+06 1.0933E+00 3.1541E+07 8.5249E-01
4.9260E-02 -1.6417E+05 4.2471E-01 1.0464E+07 5.7609E-01
2.6780E-02 4.5498E+05 1.8771E+00 1.3861E+07 -3.7482E-01
7.1545E-02 -2.1790E+06 1.2171E+00 -1.3207E+07 -7.2684E-01
1.0648E-02 1.5811E+06 3.7608E-01 9.6265E+06 3.0844E-01
Etc. (total number of blocks of data like the 2 above is 4*3*3=36)
The format descriptions below make use of FORTRAN style codes. The meaning of these is:
nX
n spaces
nIw
n integers in columns of w characters
nFw
n floating point numbers in columns of width w characters
104
The CQTF Data Record - Import of QTF Database

nEw
n exponential numbers in columns of width w characters
AQTF-1.0 : User title

A FREE_FORMAT keyword may be input if free format is required. Free format will allow the user to input
the data in any columns as long as the correct number of data items is input.
Then for each structure:
(Str no.) (No. of Directions) (No. of Frequencies) (Direction values)
The fixed format is (3I2,2X,6F12.4)
If there are more than 6 directions, the remaining directions are input in blocks of 6.
The fixed format is (8X,6F12.4)
The frequencies are then input in blocks of 6, fixed format is (8X,6F12.4).
The QTF data is then input as follows. The fixed format is (4I2,6E12.4), then (8X,6E12.4)
(Str no.) (Dirn no.) (Freq#1) (Freq#2) (6* REAL Difference frequency QTF values)
(6* IMAG Difference frequency QTF values)
(6* REAL Sum frequency QTF values)
(6* IMAG Sum frequency QTF values)
This is then repeated until all the frequencies/directions have been input for this structure. A very simple
example is shown below using fixed format input.
QTF values for another structure may then follow.
105
106
Chapter 13: Drift Motion Parameters - DRM* (Data Category 9)

When entering DRM data categories, the * indicates the structure number; for example, enter DRM1
for Structure 1, DRM2 for Structure 2, .... DR10 for Structure 10.

This data category is used to input the added mass and damping at drift frequency, and the non-linear
drag forces due to the yaw motion of the structure at drift frequency, for each structure.
The coefficients are applicable to the following programs:
Aqwa-Fer: Used only to calculate the drift frequency motions in the frequency domain. They are not
applicable when using Aqwa-Fer for the calculation of wave frequency motions.
Aqwa-Drift: Used to calculate the drift frequency motions in the time domain.
Aqwa-Line: May be input for scaling (see Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data Category
16L) (p. 223)).
Aqwa-Librium: Used to calculate the dynamic stability of the drift frequency motions. They are not applicable when using Aqwa-Librium to calculate the static equilibrium position.
Aqwa-Naut: Although Aqwa-Naut does not include any drift forces, frequency independent added mass
and damping input using the FIDA and FIDD data records is used.
The Yaw-Rate Drag Forces

In general, a structure with yaw velocity, in the presence of a current, experiences non-linear drag forces
additional to those present when the structure is stationary. These forces are referred to as yaw-rate
drag forces and are zero when there is no yaw velocity. The forces act only in the surge, sway and yaw
(translational X,Y and rotational Z) directions and are a function of the local water velocity and the
geometry of the structure, for a fully-developed wake (i.e. they are only applicable at drift frequency).
The user is required to specify an average drag force coefficient, and a length along which the local
drag force is integrated, to give the total forces on the structure.
A linearized form of the force equation is used in the drift frequency calculations of both the dynamic
instability (Aqwa-Librium) and motions (Aqwa-Fer) and, in general, the yaw rate drag forces do not
strongly influence the results.

|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|DRM1|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
107
Drift Motion Parameters - DRM* (Data Category 9)

|
|
13.3. The DGAM Data Record - Diagonal Added Mass Matrix

This data record is invalid if the convolution method is used, i.e. CONV option is on, in time domain
analysis. The values used in the analysis will be calculated within the program.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |DGAM|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|-----------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Up to 6 Added Mass
| |
|
Coefficients(6E10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on last data record in data categoy(A3)
(1) These 6 values specify the Drift Added Mass of the structure indicated by the Data Category Keyword,
at each of the 6 degrees of freedom of motion.
Typical values of drift added mass for a ship structure in the surge, sway direction are 10 to 100 per
cent of the mass of displaced water. The rotational inertia in yaw is typically the same as that of the
displaced water (i.e. the same as a solid mass of the same density and shape as that of the displaced
water).
13.4. The DGDP Data Record - Diagonal Damping Matrix

This data record is invalid if the convolution method is used, i.e. CONV option is on, in a time domain
analysis. The drift frequency damping will default to zero. If additional damping is to be added for the
drift frequency motion, one should use the frequency independent damping defined by the FIDD data
record (The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Diagonal Added Mass and
Damping (p. 110)).
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |DGDP|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|------------------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Up to 6 Damping Coefficients(6E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) These 6 values specify the Drift Damping of the structure indicated by the Data Category Keyword,
at each of the 6 degrees of freedom of motion.
108
The YRDP Data Record - Yaw-Rate Drag Parameters

Typical values of damping for a ship structure in the surge,sway and yaw direction range between 1
and 10 per cent of critical. For freedoms where there is no mooring stiffness, the critical damping is not
defined. In this event, reference should be made to the literature.
Note
In the present version of the program, only the surge, sway (X and Y translation) and yaw
(Z rotation) need to be specified. This also means that there are no off-diagonal terms in the
damping matrix.
13.5. The LFAD Data Record - Use Lowest Wave Frequency Added Mass
and Damping for Drift Frequency Analysis
The default low frequency added mass is the added mass calculated in Aqwa-Line at the lowest wave
frequency.
The default low frequency damping is zero.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---|X|
| |LFAD|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_Optional Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
Note
When this data record is on, the DGAM and DGDP data records should be omitted, and the
program will use the added mass and damping calculated in Aqwa-Line at lowest wave frequency
for drift frequency analysis.
When the convolution method is used, i.e. CONV option is on, in a time domain analysis, Aqwa
automatically calculates the low frequency (asymptotic) added mass and this data record is
ignored. Any additional added mass or damping should be frequency-independent, specified
using the FIDA, FIDD, FIAM or FIDP data records ( The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Diagonal Added Mass/Damping (p. 92) and The FIAM/FIDP Data Record
- Frequency Independent Additional Added Mass/Damping Matrices (p. 92)).
13.6. The YRDP Data Record - Yaw-Rate Drag Parameters

2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |YRDP|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Yaw-Rate Drag Coefficient(E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Second Node Number(I5)
109
Drift Motion Parameters - DRM* (Data Category 9)

| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)First Node Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) These node numbers specify the positions defining the 'length' on the geometric center of the
structure along which the drag force is integrated.
For ship structures these nodes should be positioned where the longitudinal centerline cuts the waterplane at the bow and stern.
For a structure whose plan section (viewed along the negative Z axis) is more square than a ship, the
positions of the nodes (1) and (2) should be at the ends of a horizontal diagonal across the structure.
Note
When the center of gravity is vertically above or below the geometric center of the structure,
the forces in the surge and sway directions are zero.
(3) The yaw-rate drag coefficient is the force per unit length per unit velocity squared where the velocity
is that of a side-on current (i.e. a current at right angles to the direction along which its 'length' is
defined). A function of this force, together with the local current velocity is integrated along the 'length'
of the structure to give the total drag force.
The yaw-rate drag coefficient will depend on the cross sectional shape of the structure which generally
varies along the 'length'. As the coefficient is assumed constant it therefore represents an average value.
Note
For structures where the cross sectional area varies greatly along its length, the choice of
node positions and the yaw-rate drag coefficient becomes more complicated and reference
should be made to the literature.
13.7. The FIDA/FIDD Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional

Diagonal Added Mass and Damping
These data records may be used to input a diagonal added mass (FIDA) or diagonal linear damping
(FIDD) in addition to what will be calculated by the program.
Note that these data records can also be used in Data Category 7 in Aqwa-Line. The difference is that
when used in Data Category 7, the RAO calculation in Aqwa-Line will include the additional added mass
and damping, and when used in Data Category 9, there will be no effect on the Aqwa-Line results. If
FIDA or FIDD is used in Data Category 9 in a current Aqwa-Drift or Naut analysis while it is already used
in Data Category 7 in a preceding Aqwa-Line analysis, the program will use the values in Data Category
9. In a frequency domain analysis using Aqwa-Fer, the RAOs will be recalculated within the program,
and if FIDA/FIDD is defined in Data Category 9, it will be included in the RAO calculation.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIDA| XXXXX
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- ------
110
The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional Added

Mass/Damping Matrices
|X|
| |FIDD| XXXXX
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values refer to the added mass (FIDA) or damping
(FIDD).
(2)-(7) These are the diagonal values in the 6 X 6 wave drift damping matrix.
13.8. The FIAM/FIDP Data Record - Frequency Independent Additional

Added Mass/Damping Matrices
These data records may be used to input an added mass (FIAM) or linear damping (FIDP) matrix additional to that input or calculated. The values input will add to any values previously input via data records
or backing file.
As these are frequency independent parameters, the values defined in the FIAM and FIDP data records
will apply to all the frequencies. Therefore there is no preceding FREQ/PERD/HRTZ data record for FIAM
and FIDP.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIAM|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |FIDP|XXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates whether the values refer to the added mass (FIAM) or damping
(FIDP).
21-80 correspond.
(3)-(8) These are the values which add to those in the existing frequency independent added mass or
damping matrix.
111
112
Chapter 14: Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster Forces - HLD* (Data
Category 10)
When entering HLD data categories, the * indicates the structure number; for example, enter HLD1 for
Structure 1, HLD2 for Structure 2, .... HL10 for Structure 10.

This data category is used to input the hull drag coefficients and thruster forces, for each structure.
The hull drag coefficients are input for a defined number of wave directions. Coefficients can be input
for all 6 degrees of freedom. The coefficients are divided into two distinct categories. The first relates
to the forces on the submerged part of the hull, due to current, and the second relates to the forces
on the freeboard section of the hull and superstructure, due to wind.
Up to 10 thruster forces and their positions may be specified, for each structure. These forces are assumed
to be constant in magnitude throughout the analysis.
The coefficients applicable to the following programs:
Aqwa-Fer: Used only to calculate the drift frequency motions in the frequency domain. N.B. they are
NOT applicable for wave frequency motion
Aqwa-Drift: Used to calculate the drift frequency motion in the time domain.
Aqwa-Line: Not applicable
Aqwa-Librium: Used to calculate dynamic stability of drift frequency motion and forces contributing to
the static equilibrium position.
Aqwa-Naut: Used to calculate motions in the time domain

|
5
11 |
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|HLD1|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
14.3.The CUFX/CUFY/CURZ Data Record - Current Force Coefficients and

the WIFX/WIFY/WIRZ Data Record - Wind Force Coefficients
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------Release 15.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
113
Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster Forces - HLD* (Data Category 10)
|X|
| |CUFX|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |CUFY|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |CURZ|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WIFX|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WIFY|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WIRZ|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|------------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)Up to 6 Force Coefficients(6E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The data record keyword indicates the freedom of the structure, as defined in the Fixed Reference
Axis system (FRA), to which the force coefficients apply where
CUFX/WIFX - X translational freedom of motion (SURGE)
CUFY/WIFY - Y translational freedom of motion (SWAY)
CURZ/WIRZ - Z rotational freedom of motion (YAW), i.e. rotation in the XY plane
Similar conventions apply to forces or moments in heave (CUFZ/WIFZ), roll (CURX,WIRX), and pitch
(CURY,WIRY). CUFZ may be utilized to simulate the sinkage effect that can be induced due to forward
speed or high current. The RX and RY parameters can be included to account for the distance between
the physical center of load application and the position of the center of gravity where the actual load
will be applied in the numerical model.
(2)-(3) These are the directions, as defined using the DIRN data records (either within this data category
or in the Frequencies and Directions data category), to which the values of the force coefficients in
columns 21-80 apply, e.g.
----------------------------------------------------|If the Force Coefficient(s) | Initial | Terminal |
|Correspond(s) to Direction(s)| Direction | Direction |
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
1,2,3,4,5 and 6
|
1
|
6
|
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
4,5,6, and 7
|
4
|
7
|
|-----------------------------+-----------+-----------|
|
3
|
3
|
3
|
-----------------------------------------------------
114
The THRS Data Record - Thruster Forces

(4)-(9) These are the values of the force coefficients which are defined at the directions specified by (2)
and (3). When less than 6 coefficients are input, the values in the extra fields on the data record are
ignored.
Note
The current and wind force coefficients are defined as the force or moment per unit velocity
squared. The moment is about the center of gravity of the structure.
These forces are a function of the relative velocity between the structure and current/wind.
This means that the current/wind coefficient should still be input even when there is no
current/wind present, as the relative velocity is generally non-zero for a dynamic analysis,
even when there is no current/wind present.
14.4. The THRS Data Record - Thruster Forces

N.B. A maximum of 10 thruster forces may be specified on each structure, i.e. up to 10 thruster data
records may be input within a data category.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |THRS|XXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)-(4)X,Y,Z Components of Force(6E10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Node Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
| |
|
(1) This node number and its corresponding position (defined in Data Category 1) specifies the position
on the structure at which the Thruster Force (2)- (4) acts.
(2)-(4) These are the three components of force in the X,Y, and Z directions (see note below) exerted
by the thruster at the position of the node (1) specified.
Note
The magnitude of the thruster forces is assumed to be constant throughout the analysis.
The three components of force define the direction relative to the structure which is also
assumed constant. This means that their direction relative to the Fixed Reference Axis system
(FRA) will change with the structure position; for example, if the thruster force is defined
with a component in the X direction only (i.e. zero for parameters (3) and (4)) and the
structure at some stage of the analysis is yawed (Z rotation) by 90 degrees, then the direction
of the force will act in the Y direction of the Fixed Reference Axes (FRA).
115
14.5. The NLRD/BOFF/BASE Data Records - Non Linear Roll Damping

Nonlinear roll damping moment can be calculated in Aqwa-Drift to take into account the effect of
vortex shedding from the bilges of a vessel. The method is based on An Engineering Assessment of
the Role of Non-linearities in Transportation Barge Roll Response", Robinson and Stoddart, Trans. R.I.N.A
1986.
The following three data records are needed for the program to calculate this moment. Whether vortex
shedding is occurring or not is calculated by the program based on the relative flow velocity at the
bilge, Keulegan-Carpenter number, roll natural frequency of the vessel, and the radius of the bilge. The
roll damping coefficient used in the nonlinear roll damping force calculation is also calculated by the
program based on a database stored within the program.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NLRD|
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |BOFF|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |BASE|
|
|XXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Bilge Radius (only for BOFF data record) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Node Number Two(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Node Number One(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
| |
|
Note
No parameters are required for the NLRD data record
(1)-(2) On the BOFF data record, these two nodes define the lateral and vertical position of the two
bilges. They should be at opposite ends of a line that is perpendicular to the line defined by the nodes
on the BASE data record.
On the BASE data record, these two nodes define the longitudinal extent of the bilges (two bilges are
assumed to have the same longitudinal extent). They should normally be on the centerline of the vessel.
Z is unimportant but is normally near the baseline.
(3) This value is the bilge radius (assuming the two bilges have the same radius), and is only for BOFF
data record.
116
The MDIN/MDSV Data Records - Morison Hull Drag
14.6. The MDIN/MDSV Data Records - Morison Hull Drag

These data records provide a facility for the hull drag force on a diffracting structure to be calculated
in a similar way to that for Morison element, i.e. the structure motion in six degrees of freedom is taken
into account in the drag force calculation.
_
_
Drag Force = |
|
|
6 x 6
|
|
matrix
|
|
of
|
|coefficients|
|_
_|
_
_
|Vx.mod(Vx)|
|Vy.mod(Vy)|
|Vz.mod(Vz)|
|Rx.mod(Rx)|
|Ry.mod(Ry)|
|Rz.mod(Rz)|
14.6.1. The MDIN Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |MDIN|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)6 Coefficients (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Column number in the coefficient matrix (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Row number in the coefficient matrix(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record keyword indicates that the drag force on this structure is to be calculated as Morison
hull drag using the coefficients specified.
(2)-(3) Row number and column number of the coefficients. These entries as interpreted as follows:
(a) Row and column number zero or omitted: The 6 values are assigned to the lead diagonal.
(b) Row only specified: The 6 values are assigned to the specified row.
(c) Column only specified: The 6 values are assigned to the specified column.
(d) Row and column specified: The value of C is assigned to the specified row/column. The coefficient
C must be in columns 21 - 30.
The default fluid velocity U is relative steady fluid velocity for translational freedoms, i.e:
U(translational) = U(uniform + current profile) - U(structure)
U(rotational) = -U(structure)
These default values can be changed by using the MDSV data record (see below).
117
14.6.2. The MDSV Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |MDSV|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Finish freedom number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Start freedom number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This data record may (optionally) be used in conjunction with the MDIN data record to change the
value of the relative fluid velocity used in the calculation of the Morison hull drag. It specifies that the
structure velocity only is to be used for translational freedoms. For example,
MDSV
will cause structure velocity only to be used for X and Y freedoms.
14.7. The IUFC/RUFC Data Records - External Forces

Aqwa-Drift and Naut can accept forces calculated in an external routine, at each timestep. This is done
by calling a routine called user_force, which is stored in a file called user_force.dll in the Aqwa
installation directory. See External Force Calculation (p. 259) for a description of how to use this capability. Up to 200 control parameters (100 integers and 100 reals) can be passed to the user_force routine
using the IUFC and RUFC data records described below.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --|X|
| |IUFC|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --|X|
| |RUFC|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|-----------------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)-(8)Up to 6 integer (IUFC)
| |
|
|
|
or real (RUFC) parameters
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Last parameter number (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)1st parameter number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
These data records can be repeated until all the required parameters are defined.
118
The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Drag Coefficients are defined
14.8. The DIRN Data Record - Directions at which the Drag Coefficients
are defined
If this data record is not present the directions used for the drag coefficients are those defined on the
DIRN data records in Data Category 6.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |DIRN|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|---------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)-(8)Up to 6 Values of Direction(6F10.0)(DEGREES)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) These are the direction numbers associated with the values in columns 21-80. The first number
refers to the first value input (columns 21-30) and the second number refers to the last value input.
(3)-(8) These are the values of direction at which the following hull drag coefficients are to be defined.
These values are associated with the numbers defined in columns 11-20. The following rules govern
input of directions:
(a) Direction numbers must be unique.
(b) There must be no gaps in direction numbers; for example, if five directions are input then these
must be numbered 1 through 5.
(c) Directions must be distinct and unique.
(d) If no symmetry is defined, direction values must be input for the directions from -180 to 180.
If SYMX is specified, direction values must be input for the directions from -180 to 0 or from 0 to 180.
If SYMY is specified, direction values must be input for the directions from -90 to +90 or from +90 to
-90.
If both SYMX and SYMY are specified, direction values must be input for one 90 quadrant.
(e) When all data records in this data category have been input, ascending numbers must correspond
to ascending direction values.
(f ) Although more than one direction data record can be used, the total number of directions cannot
exceed 41. 41 directions can be input when there is no symmetry, 21 directions can be input when
119
there is one plane of symmetry, and 11 directions when there are two symmetry planes. Symmetry for
hull drag coefficients is defined using the SYMX and SYMY data records in Data Category 10.
(g) The directions defined here for drag coefficients are distinct from those used for the wave directions.
They do not have to be the same in number or value as those in Data Category 6.
14.9. SYMX and SYMY Data Records - X AND Y Symmetry

These data records may be used to reduce the number of coefficients that have to be written in Data
Category 10. SYMX means that the following coefficients are symmetric about the global X-Z plane,
and SYMY means that they are symmetric about the global Y-Z plane.
Note
This data category cannot specify a greater degree of symmetry than is defined for the
structure in Data Category 2. In other words, SYMX/SYMY cannot be used here if the structure
does not have the corresponding symmetry.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |SYMX|
- --- -- ---|X|
| |SYMY|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|_(1)Symmetry Specification(A4)
| |
|
1) The same restrictions on directions apply as for the diffraction analysis directions in Data Category
6.
If no symmetry is defined, coefficients must be input for the directions from -180 to 180.
If SYMX is specified, coefficients must be input for the directions from -180 to 0 or from 0 to -180.
If SYMY is specified, coefficients must be input for the directions from -90 to +90 or from +90 to -90.
If both SYMX and SYMY are specified, coefficients must be input for one 90 quadrant.
14.10. The DPOS Data Record - Position for Drag calculation

When calculating the current hull drag on a structure, this data record defines a position on the structure
at which the current is "measured".
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------|X|
| |DPOS|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
|
|
120
61
The DDEP Data Record - Depth for current measurement

| |
|
|_(1) Node number
| |
|
| |
|_ Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
(1) This is a node on the structure defined by the HLD* data category (Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster
Forces - HLD* (Data Category 10) (p. 113)). When calculating the hull drag force on the structure, the
current at this point will be used.
Note
The drag force is still applied at the center of gravity.
The node moves with the structure.
The current used is the total of uniform + profiled current.
If the node is zero or omitted, the current at the center of gravity of the structure will be used.
Both current profile and constant current extend above the water surface, so if the node is
above the water surface there may still be a drag force. See the CPRF data record (CPRF Data
Record - Profiled Current Velocity (p. 124)).
14.11. The DDEP Data Record - Depth for current measurement

When calculating the current hull drag on a structure, this data record defines the global height at
which the current is measured.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- --------- --------|X|
| |DDEP|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Reference height
| |
|
| |
|_ Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
61
(1) This is a vertical position in the FRA. When calculating the hull drag force on the structure defined
by the HLD* data category (Hull Drag Coefficients and Thruster Forces - HLD* (Data Category 10) (p. 113)),
the current at this point will be used.
Note
The drag force is still applied at the center of gravity.
This is a fixed height in the FRA.
The current used is the total of uniform + profiled current.
121
122
Chapter 15: Current/Wind Parameters - ENVR (Data Category 11)

This data category is used to input the environmental parameters of current and wind. It is optional
and the user may enter NONE for the Data Category Keyword if there is no current or wind.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|ENVR|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
15.3. CURR/WIND Data Records - Uniform Current/Wind Velocity

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- --------- --------|X|
| |CURR|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------|X|
| |WIND|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Direction of Current/Wind in Degrees(F10.0) (Default 0.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Uniform Current/Wind Speed(F10.0)(Default 0.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) Enter CURR or WIND in columns 7-10 as appropriate. Note that both data records may be input if
required.
(2) Current/Wind speed is a scalar quantity and must always be a positive value. The current is uniform
from the sea bed to the water surface and the wind is uniform from the water surface upwards. Their
components in the directions of the Fixed Reference Axes are given by:
X - Component = (Speed)( COS (Direction))
Y - Component = (Speed)( SIN (Direction))
(3) The direction of the current/wind, if left blank or zero is input, is in the positive X direction of the
Fixed Reference axes.
123
Current/Wind Parameters - ENVR (Data Category 11)
15.4. CPRF Data Record - Profiled Current Velocity

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |CPRF|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Direction of Current in Degrees(F10.0)(Default Value 0.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Current Speed(F10.0)(Default Value 0.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Z - Position at which the Current is Defined(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The Z position at which the current is defined is with reference to the Fixed Reference Axes whose
origin is at the water surface. These values will therefore always be negative and must also appear in
order i.e. from the sea bed, at Z = - (Water Depth), up to the water surface at Z = 0.0.
(2) Current/Wind speed is a scalar quantity and must always be a positive value. The current components
at the Z position in columns 11-20 (1) in the directions of the Fixed Reference Axes are given by
X-component = (Current Speed) * cos(Current Direction)
Y-component = (Current Speed) * sin(Current Direction)
(3) This is the direction of the current at the Z position in columns 11- 20 (1). If this field is left blank
or zero is input, it will be the positive X direction of the Fixed Reference axes. As it is common to define
a current profile with this value the same on all data records, the user may wish to input a single CDRN
(CDRN Data Record - Current Direction (p. 124)) instead of repeating the current direction on each data
record.
Note
The maximum number of CPRF data records which may be used to define a current profile is
25.
The current profile remains constant below the lowest Z position or above the highest; it does
not drop to zero outside the defined range.
If a wave height time-history is imported using the IWHT card it may be necessary to define
the current profile with negative velocities. This is because the WHT file must contain a positive
constant current in order for the waves to be calculated correctly. The total current velocity
will be the sum of the value in the WHT file and the values defined here.
15.5. CDRN Data Record - Current Direction

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- --------|X|
| |CDRN|
|
- --- -- ---- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Direction of Current in Degrees (F10.0) (Default Value 0.0)
124
The TOWS Data Record - Tether Tow Speed

| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This value of the current direction will apply to all CPRF (current profile) data records where the
direction is given as zero or left blank. It enables the user to avoid repeating the direction of the current
on each or any of the CPRF data records.
Below is an example showing the effect of the CDRN data record.
INPUT IN .DAT FILE

*
1
2
3
41
*2345678901234567890123456789012345678901
CPRF
-800.0
0.1
0.0
CPRF
-700.0
0.2
0.0
CPRF
-600.0
0.3
0.0
CPRF
-500.0
0.4
0.0
CPRF
-400.0
0.5
45.0
CPRF
-300.0
0.6
45.0
CPRF
-200.0
0.7
45.0
CPRF
-100.0
0.7
45.0
CPRF
0.0
0.9
45.0
CDRN
180.0
AS INTERPRETED BY AQWA
Depth
-800.0
-700.0
-600.0
-500.0
-400.0
-300.0
-200.0
-100.0
0.0
Speed
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.9
Direction
180.0
180.0
180.0
180.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
15.6. The TOWS Data Record - Tether Tow Speed

This data record should only be input for towed tethers.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TOWS|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Tow Direction (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Tow Speed (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|_Optional User Identifier (A2)
(1) The speed at which the tether is towed.

(2) The tow direction relative to the global (FRA) X-axis. Maximum +/- 30.
125
126
Chapter 16: Motion Constraints on Structures - CONS (Data Category

12)
This data category is used to input the external constraints on the motions of one or more structures.
These constraints fall into two distinct categories; elimination of freedoms at the center of gravity, and
articulations between structures. The latter are known as constraints.
Elimination of Freedoms at the Center of Gravity

This facility is used to eliminate one or more of the 6 Degrees of Freedom at the Center of Gravity; for
example, if the analysis is 1- or 2-dimensional then the user may eliminate the appropriate 5 or 3 Degrees
of Freedom respectively.
This facility is extremely useful when data for a full 3-dimensional analysis is unavailable, or when a
simple model is being analyzed. This is achieved by use of the DACF (DeACtivate Freedom) data record
(see The DACF Data Record - Deactivate Freedom at the Center of Gravity (p. 128)).
Constraints - Articulations Between Structures

This facility is used to physically connect one structure to another structure by means of an articulated
joint. These positions are referred to in the documentation as constraints.
Constraints are defined by specifying the number of the first structure and the number of the second
structure, together with their respective node numbers corresponding to the position and orientation
of the constraint on that structure.
The position of a constraint at any stage of the analysis is UNIQUE. Only rotational freedoms exist at
the articulated joint. The 'sliding' of one structure with respect to another (unconstrained translational
freedoms) at a joint is therefore not permitted, i.e. there is no relative translational motion, but the
constraint position may move with respect to the FRA.
In addition the term 'structure' is used in this context to mean either a floating structure or a fixed position in the fixed Reference Axis System (for example, an anchored plinth on the sea bed).

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|CONS|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
127
Motion Constraints on Structures - CONS (Data Category 12)
16.3.The DACF Data Record - Deactivate Freedom at the Center of Gravity

Note
The DACF data record has no effect in Aqwa-Fer.
If all translational freedoms and any (or none) rotational freedoms are required to be 'deactivated'
it is preferable to use the DCON data record (see The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint
Position (p. 129)). This may require more information but it is a more robust method of preventing
movement of the structure.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |DACF|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Freedom Number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Structure Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The structure number must correspond to one of the structures defined in Data Category 2; in other
words, if 1 is input, then this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If 2 is
input, then this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, and so on.
(2) Freedom numbers must be from 1 through 6; in other words, 1, 2 and 3 correspond to X, Y, and Z
respectively for the translational freedoms and numbers 4, 5 and 6 correspond to X, Y, and Z respectively
for the rotational freedoms.
Note
Axis Systems Associated with the Deactivated Freedoms - if a freedom is deactivated
then no motion of the center of gravity will occur in that freedom, where a freedom is defined
as motion about an axis system parallel to the fixed reference axes, not the local structure
axes.
Example
If translational and rotational motion in the X,Y and Z directions of the structure (as originally defined
in Data Category 2) is surge, sway and heave (translational) and roll, pitch and yaw (rotational) respectively, then the following situations are possible:
(i) If the X translational freedom is deactivated, and if the structure is analyzed in a position where its
local axes are parallel to the Fixed Reference Axes then surge motion will be eliminated and there will
be no restrictions on the sway motion. However, if the structure is yawed by 90 degrees then the local
sway motion will be eliminated and there will be no restrictions on the local surge motion.
128
The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position

(ii) If the X rotational freedom is deactivated and if the structure is analyzed in a position where its
local axes are parallel to the Fixed Reference Axis then roll motion will be eliminated and there will be
no restrictions on the pitch motion. However, if the structure is yawed by 90 degrees then the local
pitch motion will be eliminated and there will be no restrictions on the local roll motion.
16.4. The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position

Aqwa allows structures to be connected by articulated joints. These do not permit relative translation
of the two structures but allow relative rotational movement in a number of ways that can be defined
by the user.
The reactions at the articulations can be output in global, structure or local articulation axes; see LSAR
and LAAR options (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)).
A maximum of 50 articulations is allowed.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
36
41
46
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----X|
| |DCON|
|
|
|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|----|
|-----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(7)-(9)Node Numbers(2I5)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(6)Second Structure Number(I5)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)-(5)Node Numbers(2I5)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)First Structure Number(I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Locked Rotational Freedoms at the Constraint(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
Constraint Definition
(1) Four types of constraint are valid in the program which are coded as 0, 1, 2 and 3, representing the
number of rotational freedoms which are locked at the constraint. Therefore, rotational reactions or
moments transmitted through the joint at the constraint, from the first structure to the second structure,
and vice versa, also correspond to these numbers. The four types of joint are as follows:
0
Ball and Socket
Free to rotate in all freedoms
Universal
Free to rotate in two freedoms transmitting a moment in the third freedom

at right angles to the first two
Hinged
Transmitting a moment in two freedoms and free to rotate in the third

freedom at right angles the first two
Locked
Transmitting a moment in all three freedoms and not free to rotate at all.
This type of constraint enables the user to find the reactions between two
129

or more parts of the same structure. This type of joint rigidly connects the
parts together so that the solution of the equations of motion are the same
as if one structure was defined. These parts must be defined as separate
structures in Data Category 2 (see also (2))
(2) This is the number of the first structure on which the constraint is defined. If '1' is input then this
will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input then this will correspond
to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, and so on.
If '0' is input the program will recognize that the constraint is connected to a fixed position in the Fixed
Reference Axis System corresponding to the position of the nodes in columns 21-35 as defined in Data
Category 1.
See rules concerning how structures may and may not be connected at the end of this section.
(3)-(5) The first node (3) defines the position and the second (4) node defines the orientation of the
constraint with respect to the structure specified in (2). Different numbers of nodes must be input to
uniquely define each type of constraint, and are tabulated below.
Type
Joint
Mandatory Input
For Structure 1
For Structure 2
B/Socket
(3)
(7)
Universal
(3) (4)
(7) (8)
Hinged
(3) (4)
(7) (8)
Locked
(3)
(7)
(6) This is the number of the second structure on which the constraint is defined otherwise as in (2)
except that '0' structure number is illegal. See rules at the end of this section.
(7)-(9) As for the first node. See (3)-(5).
Function of the Nodal Input on each Structure

First node: Position of the constraint with respect to the first structure.
Second node: The axis about which the two structures are free to rotate relative to one another is given
by the line going from the first node to this node.
Function of the Nodal Input for each Constraint

0
Ball and Socket Joint
The first node is the position of the joint.
Universal Joint
The axis defined on each structure by the second node will give two axes
which will always be at right angles to each other. The joint will only allow
relative motion about these two axes.
Hinged Joint
The axis defined on each structure by the second node will give two axes
which will always be coincident. The joint will only allow relative motion
about this coincident axis.
Locked Joint
The first node is the position of the joint.
130
The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position
Local Axis Systems for the Constraint Reactions Output

FRA = Fixed Reference Axis. X, Y, Z axis are local axes.
0
Ball and Socket Joint
X Parallel to the FRA

Y Parallel to the FRA
Z Parallel to the FRA
Universal Joint
X Axis defined by the second node on the first structure

Y Axis defined by the second node on the second structure
Z At right angles to X and Y
Hinged Joint
X Axis defined by the second node on the first/second structure

Y At right angles to X and parallel to the XY plane in the FRA
Z At right angles to X and Y with +ve Local Z on the +ve side of
the XY plane of the FRA
In the special case where the local Z axis lies in the XY plane of the
FRA the local Y axis is coincident with the Y axis of the FRA.
Locked Joint
X Parallel to the FRA

Y Parallel to the FRA
Z Parallel to the FRA
Defining the Initial Position with Constraints

When constraints are defined on a structure, the usual specification of initial or starting positions for
the analysis (input in Data Category 15) is not treated in the same manner as when there are no constraints. This is because the specification of the 6 degrees of freedom for each center of gravity may
not be geometrically compatible with the position of constraints defined within this data category, e.g.
it is possible to input the positions of two structures where the position of the common constraint is
not coincident.
It is realized that it is tedious for the user to have to calculate the exact positions of the structures so
that common constraint positions are coincident. Indeed if a fixed constraint is specified, the position
of the structures can be uniquely defined by the rotational Degrees of Freedom only.
The program will take the position of the first structure within any articulated group of structures, and
connect the remaining structures to the first structure using only the orientation of these remaining
structures (Note that this includes structure '0', a fixed constraint, as the first structure).
131

If the program is unable to achieve this due to the manner in which the user has modeled a group of
structures, the model is invalid.
Note
Rules for Joining Structures with Constraints

In order to achieve a valid model of a group of structures joined together by constraints
(outlined above) the rules below must be followed.
'Closed loops' are now permitted, (e.g. Structure 1, to Structure 2, connected to Structure 3
which is connected back to Structure 1, is now legal).
If a fixed constraint, i.e. Structure '0', is present within a group of articulated structures, then
'0' must be the first structure number on a DCON data record.
Only one fixed constraint, i.e. Structure '0', may be present within any one group of articulated
structures.
Redundant systems of constraints will probably cause a failure. A simple example of a redundant
system is two structures connected by two locked articulations. As the structures are also rigid,
it is impossible to determine how the reactions should be divided between the two joints. A
single locked articulation will suffice to fix two structures together.
16.5.The KCON/CCON/FCON Data Records - Define Articulation Stiffness,

Damping and Friction
Articulation stiffness, damping and friction can be defined for all the articulation types. KCON, CCON
and FCON data records for an articulation should be input before the articulation definition data record
DCON for this articulation.
16.5.1. KCON and CCON Data Records

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |KCON|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |CCON|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Stiffness(KCON) or Damping(CCON) about Z axis (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Stiffness(KCON) or Damping(CCON) about Y axis (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Stiffness(KCON) or Damping(CCON) about X axis (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
132
The KCON/CCON/FCON Data Records - Define Articulation Stiffness, Damping and

Friction
(1), (2), (3) As articulations only allow rotational motion (for articulation types 1,2,3), KCON and CCON
only define the rotational stiffness and damping. The input values should have the units of moment/radians for stiffness (KCON) and moment/(radians/second) for damping (CCON).
For a ball and socket (type 0), the stiffness and damping defined in the KCON and CCON data records
should be in the Aqwa global axis system (i.e. FRA).
For a universal joint (type 1) or hinge (type 2), these values should be in the articulation local axis system
(please refer to The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position (p. 129) for the definition of local
axis system).
The forces due to the articulation stiffness and damping will be output as a part of the articulation reaction force and will be in the Aqwa global system.
16.5.2. The FCON Data Record

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |FCON|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4) Constant friction moment (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Friction coefficent for axial force (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Friction coefficent for overturning moment (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Friction coefficient for transverse force (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1), (2), (3), (4) Coulomb friction always uses a local axis system for calculation with the X-axis being the
axis of the instantaneous relative rotational velocity of the two parts of the articulation. For a hinge this
will always be the axis of the hinge; for a ball joint it will vary as the two structures move relative to
one another. The frictional moment is given by
+ +
+ + +
where:
= 0 if the relative rotational velocity is less than 0.001 rad/s, 1 otherwise.
k1 - k4 are coefficients. Note that these are not conventional dimensionless friction coefficents, as used
in the equation F = R. These coefficients are factors to be applied to the appropriate forces to give
frictional moments, and they must include effects of the bearing diameter etc.
k1, k2 and k3 must not be negative. k1 and k3 have dimensions of length, and the maximum value allowed is 0.025g / 9.81 where g is the acceleration due to gravity. k2 is non-dimensional and has a
maximum value of 0.025.
This moment is transformed into articulation, structure or global axes as appropriate before output.
133
134
Chapter 17:Wind/Wave Spectrum Definition - SPEC (Data Category

13)
This Data Category is used to input the parameters which are used to define spectra of wind or waves
together with their associated current and wind. At present the wind spectra available are OCIN, APIR,
NPD, ISO, or User-Defined, and wave spectra available are JONSWAP, Pierson-Moskowitz, Gaussian, or
User-Defined, and are uni-directional (see Irregular Wave and Wind in the Aqwa User's Manual for more
information concerning wind and wave spectra).
Spectral groups allow the inclusion of multiple wave spectra in a given simulation to model short
crested waves.
Applicability to programs in the Aqwa suite is as follows:
Aqwa-Librium - Accepts up to 20 wave spectra or spectral groups, i.e. 20 equilibrium positions are
therefore output for each mooring-line combination specified in Data Category 14. This data category
may be omitted, i.e. enter NONE for the data category keyword if it is considered that the equilibrium
position is not substantially affected by the sea state or if an approximate solution is required. Note
that all equilibrium positions are transferred automatically to Aqwa-Fer if requested by the user.
Aqwa-Fer - Accepts up to 20 wave spectra or spectral groups, i.e. 20 spectral response parameters of
the model are therefore output for each mooring-line combination specified in Data Category 14.
Aqwa-Drift - Only one wave spectrum or spectral group is permitted, as only one time-history can be
executed per run, and each time-history is associated with a single spectrum or spectral group. Additional spectra input are ignored.
Aqwa-Naut - Only one wave spectrum or spectral group is permitted, as only one time-history can be
executed per run, and each time-history is associated with a single spectrum or spectral group. Additional spectra input are ignored. The IRRE job option is required and convolution is mandatory.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|SPEC|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
17.3. Wind Spectra Definition

The user is advised to read the theory in Wind in the Aqwa User's Manual before using wind spectra.
135
Wind/Wave Spectrum Definition - SPEC (Data Category 13)

Wind spectra in Aqwa are only available in Fer and Drift at present. They are input by specifying the
type of wind spectrum and the reference height at which the wind speed is measured. There are currently
five types of wind spectra available in Aqwa. The Data Record Keywords are:
OCIN - Ochi and Shin wind spectrum
APIR - API wind spectrum
NPDW - NPD wind spectrum
ISOW - ISO wind spectrum
UDWD - User-defined wind spectrum
The format of the input is as follows:
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |OCIN|
|
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |APIR|
|
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NPDW|
|
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |ISOW|
|
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |UDWD| XXXXX |cf
|cs
|I(z)
|
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WIND| XXXXX |Speed Uz |Direction| Ref Ht |
-- -- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
| |
| |
|
The UDWD data record should be followed by UDWS data records defining dimensionless frequencies,
f, and spectral ordinates, U(f ), (as defined below). A user defined wind spectrum can consist of up to
50 UDWS data records.
2
-|X|
-|X|
-|X|
-|X|
--
5 7
11
21
31
-- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |UDWS| XXXXX |f
|U(f)
|
-- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |UDWS| XXXXX |f
|U(f)
|
-- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |UDWS| XXXXX |f
|U(f)
|
-- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |UDWS| XXXXX |f
|U(f)
|
-- -- ---- --------- --------- --------| |
|
| |
| |
|
Note
The OCIN/APIR/NPDW/ISOW/UDWD/UDWS data records must be input before the WIND data
record in each wind spectrum definition.
136
The HRTZ Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz

The WIND data record must be input BEFORE any wave spectra.
If a non-zero height is input and the spectrum type is not defined, the Ochi and Shin spectrum
will be used.
For the Ochi and Shin spectrum a non-zero reference height must be defined; otherwise a
uniform wind will be used.
For the other types of spectrum a default of 10m will be used if the reference height is zero
or undefined.
The speed Uz is the speed at the reference height (NO DEFAULT). (Note: wind speed in Data
Category 11 is for uniform wind only.)
Range of valid mean wind speeds is min-max= 0.01-100.00m/s.
The steady wind force is calculated using the mean wind speed at 10m. If some other reference
point is input, then the program will first calculate the corresponding wind speed at 10m.
For user-defined spectra, the dimensionless frequency is defined as
f = cf * z/Uz F
where F is the frequency in hertz
The wind speed spectral density is defined as S(F)= cs * U(f ) * (I(z)*Uz)**2/F

The default for cf = 1.0
The default for cs = 1.0
The default for I(z) = 0.167
A new wind spectrum may be defined before each WIND data record.
A WIND data record can also be used to define a constant wind (frequency independent) associated with a wave spectrum (see The CURR / WIND Data Records - Current and Wind Speed
and Direction (p. 139)).
17.4. The HRTZ Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz

2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |HRTZ|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
| |
|
This data record acts as a switch which changes the units for all following frequencies input to hertz in
wave spectra definitions.
If omitted, the program will expect all frequencies to be input in radians/second.
137
17.5. The RADS Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Radians/Second

2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |RADS|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
| |
|
This data record acts as a switch which changes the units for all following frequencies input to radians/second. Note that this data record is needed only if a HRTZ data record has been input, as the default
units for frequency are radians/second in wave spectra definitions.
17.6. The SPDN Data Record - Wave Spectral Direction

This data record must be input before any wave spectra. The maximum number of wave spectra is 20.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------|X|
| |SPDN|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Direction of Spectrum in Degrees (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Total Wave Spreading Angle in Degrees (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Power of Wave Spreading Function (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is only required for a spreading sea. This value defines the power N of the wave spreading
function which is in the form of COS**N. This space should be left blank if N=2.
(2) This value defines the total spreading angle for the case when (1) is left blank (i.e. N=2). If N>2, this
space should be left blank as the total spreading angle will be set to 180 degrees.
For a non-spreading sea, both (1) and (2) should be left blank.
(3) This value is the direction of waves within a wave spectrum (for a spreading sea, this is the direction
in which the wave spectra values are the highest). All the following specifications of wave spectra take
this value until another SPDN data record is input. The next group of wave spectra will then take the
new value as the wave direction. It is therefore a mandatory requirement that this data record is first
data record of the wave spectrum data category, as the wave direction will be undefined until this data
record is input.
138
The CURR / WIND Data Records - Current and Wind Speed and Direction
The introduction of a SPDN data record thus enables the user to alter the value of the wave direction
for a complete group of wave spectra.
Note
Although there is no limit to the number of SPDN data records that may be input, a wave
spectrum can have only one direction. Hence the number of SPDN data records can never
exceed the number of wave spectra.
Wave spreading is not available in Aqwa-Naut at present.
The results output for plotting in the AGS are for the main direction only.
17.7. The SEED Data Record - Wave Spectral Seed

This data record is used to define the random seed for a wave spectrum. It must be before the spectrum
to which it applies. Default seed values are defined below.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- --------|X|
| |SEED|
|
- --- -- ---- --------|
|_(1)Seed number n (I10)
Within a spectral group, the default values of seed for each spectrum will be:
1. If there is no SEED data record or the SEED number is set to 0:
SEED = 1+(I-1) * 1,000,000
where I represents the i-th spectrum.
2. If a SEED data record is used for some but not all of the spectra:
SEED = N_SEED + J * 1,000,000
where N_SEED is the number of SEED data records defined in this group,
J ranges from 1 to the number of spectra which do not have a SEED data record.
17.8. The CURR / WIND Data Records - Current and Wind Speed and Direction
These data records are optional and their omission indicates that no current or wind is present. A value
of zero is then assumed for the wind and current speeds associated with each wave spectrum. In general both data records will be input before each wave spectrum.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |CURR|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WIND|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
139

| |
|
|
|
|_(4)Reference Height(F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Direction in degrees(F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Current/Wind Speed (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The Data Record Keyword indicates whether parameters (2) and (3) apply to current or wind.
(2)-(3) These values are magnitude and direction of the current/wind speed for a wave spectrum. All
following specifications of wave spectra (q.v.) take these values until another CURR/WIND data record
is input.
(4) The reference height defines the height where wind speed is measured and is only required for wind
spectrum definition. If a non-zero height is entered, a wind spectrum will be used even if not specifically
requested. The default spectrum is Ochi and Shin. See also Wind Spectra Definition (p. 135).
Although there is no limit to the number of CURR/WIND data records that may be input, a wave spectrum
can only be associated with one current magnitude and direction and one wind magnitude and direction.
Hence the number of functional CURR or WIND data records can never exceed the number of wave
spectra.
17.9. The PSMZ Data Record - Pierson-Moskowitz Spectrum

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |PSMZ|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
(4)Zero Crossing Period (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Significant Wave Height(F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Finish Frequency(F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Start Frequency(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) Start/Finish Frequency - The lowest/highest frequency at which the spectrum is defined. The
program will assume that the frequencies are in radians/sec, unless a HRTZ data record (see The HRTZ
Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz (p. 137)) has been used to change this to Hertz
(cycles/sec).
If these fields are left blank, defaults will be assumed as follows:
Start frequency = Peak frequency * 0.58
Finish frequency is evaluated numerically so that approximately 99% of the spectral energy is included.
140
The JONS Data Record - JONSWAP Spectrum

(3)-(4) The average (i.e. mean zero-crossing) wave period and the significant wave height are the parameters used by Aqwa to describe the Pierson-Moskowitz wave spectrum, the special case for a fully
developed sea.
17.10. The GAUS Data Record - Gaussian Spectrum

The program will assume that all frequencies are in radians/sec, unless a HRTZ data record (see The
HRTZ Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz (p. 137)) has been used to change this to Hertz
(cycles/sec).
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |GAUS|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
(5)Peak Frequency ( p)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4)Significant Wave Height
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Sigma ( )
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Finish Frequency ( f)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Start Frequency ( s)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) Start/Finish Frequency - The lowest/highest frequency at which the spectrum is defined. Aqwa
assumes that there is no wave frequency energy outside this range. If these fields are left blank, defaults
will be assumed as follows:
Start frequency: s = p- 3, subject to a max of 100 and min of 0.001
Finish frequency: f = p+ 3, subject to a max of 100 and min of 0.001
If f - s < 0.001 then s = 0.1, f = 6.0
(3) Standard deviation, . The minimum allowed value of is 0.08p
(5) Peak frequency, p
17.11. The JONS Data Record - JONSWAP Spectrum

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ---------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------|X|
| |JONS|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| (5)Peak Frequency (rad/sec)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4)Alpha(F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Gamma(F10.0)
141

| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) Start/Finish Frequency - The lowest/highest frequency at which the spectrum is defined. The
program will assume that the frequencies are in radians/sec, unless a HRTZ data record (see The HRTZ
Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz (p. 137)) has been used to change this to Hertz
(cycles/sec).
If these fields are left blank, defaults will be assumed as follows:
Start frequency = Peak frequency * (0.58+(-1.0)*0.05/19.0)
Finish frequency is evaluated numerically so that approximately 99% of the spectral energy is included.
(3)-(5) Gamma, Alpha and Peak Frequency.
The JONSWAP wave spectrum can be used to describe a wave system where there is an imbalance of
energy flow (i.e. sea not fully developed). This is nearly always the case when there is a high wind speed.
It may be considered as having a higher peak spectral value than the Pierson-Moskowitz spectrum (The
PSMZ Data Record - Pierson-Moskowitz Spectrum (p. 140)) but is narrower away from the peak in order
to maintain the energy balance.
Parameterization of the classic form of the JONSWAP spectrum (with parameters of fetch and wind
speed) was undertaken by Houmb and Overvik (BOSS Trondheim 1976,Vol 1). These parameters are
used by Aqwa. These empirical parameters are termed gamma (3), alpha (4) and peak frequency (5)
(the frequency at which the spectral energy is a maximum).
17.12. The JONH Data Record - JONSWAP Spectrum

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ---------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------|X|
| |JONH|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| (5)Peak Frequency (rad/sec) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4)Significant Wave Height Hs(F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3)Gamma(F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
142
The NSPL Data Record - Number of Spectral Lines

This data record also defines a JONSWAP spectrum. The only difference from the JONS data record is
that significant wave height Hs is used instead of the parameter Alpha.
17.13.The UDEF Data Record - User-Defined Wave Spectrum and the FINI
Data Record - User-Defined Spectrum Separator
This facility may be used to input any spectrum the user wishes. It is normally employed for input of
non-deterministic spectra such as tank spectra, recorded full-scale spectra, or simply where the formulated
spectrum is not yet available in Aqwa.
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------|X|
| |UDEF|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
| (2)Spectral Ordinate(F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
(1)Frequency Value(F10.0) [*]
| |
|
| |
| |
|
* See The HRTZ Data Record - Change Units of Frequency to Hertz (p. 137) and The RADS Data Record
- Change Units of Frequency to Radians/Second (p. 138).
(1) The value of frequency at which the value of the spectral ordinate (2) is given.
These frequencies must appear in ascending order (lowest first). The maximum number of frequencies
is 50.
(2) Value of the spectral ordinate at the frequency given in columns 21-30.
If more than one spectrum is input, then the FINI data record must be used to separate each set of
UDEF data records defining a spectrum. The format is shown below:
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |FINI|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
| |
|
17.14. The NSPL Data Record - Number of Spectral Lines

The new user is strongly advised to ignore this facility. The program will automatically generate the
appropriate number of spectral lines for the particular method of analysis, and it is only in unusual circumstances that user input is required.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ---- ----|X|
| |NSPL|XXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---- ----| |
|
|
143

| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Spectral Lines(I5)(default varies, MAXIMUM of 200)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The number of spectral lines is the number of spectral ordinates required to define the spectrum in
order to achieve an accuracy comparable to the formulation of the analysis in which it is used. This is
necessarily a general definition as the program uses this number in several different ways.
This number of spectral lines will be used for ALL subsequent spectra in all groups, unless a particular
spectrum type requires a different number. For example, a spectrum imported using the IWHT data
record will always use 200 lines, irrespective of any value input using the NSPL data record.
17.15. The NRST Data Record - Number of Spectral Rasters

The program now automatically generates the number of spectral rasters and this data record is not
required. If present it will be ignored.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ---- ----|X|
| |NRST|XXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Spectral Rasters(I5)(default varies, MAXIMUM of 5000)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The number of spectral rasters is the number of spectral frequencies required to achieve sufficiently
small frequency differences to accurately define the spectrum at peak of response at the small frequency
values. These low frequencies are normally associated with slow drift motions.
17.16. Input of a Time History of Wind Speed and Direction

A user created ASCII data file defining a time history of wind speed and direction can be utilized by the
Aqwa time domain programs. The name of the wind time history file must be identical to the original
input data file for the Aqwa time domain analysis, and the extension must be WVT (stands for Wind
144
Input of a Time History of External Forces on Structures

Velocity Time history). For example, if the original input data file for Drift is ADRUN1.DAT, the wind
time history file must be named as ADRUN1.WVT .
Note
As long as this file exists, the program will automatically read it in and use the wind speed and
direction defined in the file at each time step during the analysis. There is no data record
needed for implementing this feature.
The time defined in the WVT file does not need to match the time step defined in the corresponding DAT file as the program will interpolate the wind speed and direction when necessary,
using a cubic spline interpolation technique. When modeling periods of constant wind velocity
adequate data points must be provided to satisfy the interpolation method.
There is no limit on the length of the WVT file.
The following is an example showing the format of the WVT file:

-----------------------------------*A LINE BEGINNIING WITH * IS A COMMENT LINE
*In the first column is time
*In the second column is wind speed
*In the third column is wind direction (blowing towards) in degrees
*The numbers in this WVT file are in a free format
*data_start is a compulsory line before the data block begins
data_start
0.0000
8.0000
90.0000
0.5000
7.8532
88.7310
1.0000
7.4271
86.0840
1.5000
6.7634
82.1170
2.0000
5.9271
76.9100
2.5000
5.0000
70.5600
3.0000
4.0729
63.1800
3.5000
3.2366
54.9000
4.0000
2.5729
45.8600
4.5000
2.1468
36.2130
5.0000
2.0000
26.1180
5.5000
2.1468
15.7380
6.0000
2.5729
5.2407
........
17.17. Input of a Time History of External Forces on Structures

A user created ASCII data file defining a time history of external forces on structures can be utilized by
the Aqwa time domain programs. The name of the force time history file must be identical to the original input data file for the Aqwa time domain analysis, and the extension must be XFT (stands for External Force Time history). For example, if the original input data file for Drift is ADRUN1.DAT, the force
time history file must be named as ADRUN1.XFT .
Note
As long as this file exists, the program will automatically read it in and apply the forces defined
in the file to the structures at each time step during the analysis. There is no data record needed
for implementing this feature.
145

The time defined in the XFT file does not need to match the time step defined in the corresponding DAT file as the program will interpolate the forces when necessary, using a cubic
spline interpolation technique. When modeling periods of constant force adequate data points
must be provided to satisfy the interpolation method.
There is no limit on the length of the XFT file.
The forces defined in the XFT file are in six degrees of freedom for each structure and are in
the structure's local axis system.
The following is an example showing the format of the XFT file:

-----------------------------------*A LINE BEGINNING WITH * IS A COMMENT LINE
*In the first column is time
*In the second to seventh columns are the forces for the first structure in the local surge,
*sway, heave, roll, pitch, and yaw.
*In the eighth to thirteenth columns (only if there is a second structure) are the forces
*for the second structure in the local six degrees of freedom.
*In the fourteenth to nineteenth columns (only if there is a third structure) are the forces
*for the third structure in the local six degrees of freedom.
* When there is only one structure, the line structures=1 can be omitted. If there are more
*than one structures, this line is compulsory, e.g. when there are 3 structures, this line
*should be structures=1 2 3.
*data_start is a compulsory line before the data block begins.
*The numbers in the XFT file are in a free format
structures=1
data_start
0.0000 4.4800E+05 5.0400E+06 3.1360E+06 5.0400E+07 8.9600E+06 1.5120E+08
0.5000 4.3978E+05 4.9689E+06 3.0784E+06 4.9689E+07 8.7956E+06 1.4907E+08
1.0000 4.1592E+05 4.8207E+06 2.9114E+06 4.8207E+07 8.3183E+06 1.4462E+08
1.5000 3.7875E+05 4.5986E+06 2.6512E+06 4.5986E+07 7.5750E+06 1.3796E+08
2.0000 3.3192E+05 4.3070E+06 2.3234E+06 4.3070E+07 6.6383E+06 1.2921E+08
2.5000 2.8000E+05 3.9514E+06 1.9600E+06 3.9514E+07 5.6000E+06 1.1854E+08
3.0000 2.2808E+05 3.5381E+06 1.5966E+06 3.5381E+07 4.5617E+06 1.0614E+08
3.5000 1.8125E+05 3.0744E+06 1.2688E+06 3.0744E+07 3.6250E+06 9.2232E+07
4.0000 1.4408E+05 2.5682E+06 1.0086E+06 2.5682E+07 2.8817E+06 7.7045E+07
4.5000 1.2022E+05 2.0279E+06 8.4155E+05 2.0279E+07 2.4044E+06 6.0838E+07
5.0000 1.1200E+05 1.4626E+06 7.8400E+05 1.4626E+07 2.2400E+06 4.3878E+07
5.5000 1.2022E+05 8.8133E+05 8.4155E+05 8.8133E+06 2.4044E+06 2.6440E+07
6.0000 1.4408E+05 2.9348E+05 1.0086E+06 2.9348E+06 2.8817E+06 8.8044E+06
........
17.18. The XSWL/GATP Data Records - Input of Cross Swell

The effects of cross swell are implemented in most of Aqwa. If cross swell is not available for a particular
application then a warning message will be issued that it has been ignored, or a fatal error will occur.
More details are given below.
The XSWL data record must be used to define the cross swell spectrum before the main wave spectrum
definition. If Tp is specified on the XSWL data record then the GATP data record (Gauss T Peak) must
be input before the XSWL data record. E.g. for a P-M spectrum with cross swell the order is GATP, XSWL,
PSMZ.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------|X|
| |XSWL|X
|XXXXX|XXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
146
71
---------|
|
---------|
|
The XSWL/GATP Data Records - Input of Cross Swell

| |
|
|
|
|
|
Direction of Cross Swell (degrees)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_ _ _ _ |_ _ _ _ |_(2)Wave parameters - see below
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Spectrum type (JONH, JONS, PSMZ or GAUS)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
The parameters used to define the spectra are the same as on the JONH, JONS and PSMZ data records,
except that the start and finish frequencies are calculated by the program.
----------------------------------------------------------------|Spectrum Type
| Parameter 1 | Parameter 2 | Parameter 3
|
----------------------------------------------------------------|JONSWAP (JONH)
|
gamma
|
Hs
| peak frequency |
----------------------------------------------------------------|JONSWAP (JONS)
|
gamma
|
alpha
| peak frequency |
----------------------------------------------------------------|Pierson Moskowitz |
Hs
|
Tz
| not used
|
----------------------------------------------------------------|Gaussian
|
sigma
|
Hs
| peak frequency |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
The standard Gaussian spectrum is:
where the user may specify , Hs, fp (as p or Tp) and the direction of the spectrum, and:
Hs is significant wave height
fp is peak frequency in rad/sec
is standard deviation, always in rad/sec
Note
Hydrodynamic interaction between the normal and the cross swell spectrum in the case of
coupled Drift Force Coefficients or QTFs has been ignored; i.e the spectra are considered
totally separately and for totally linear systems will give the same results as the sum of the
results for each spectrum analyzed separately. Note that results such as significant motions
will be the square root of the sum of the squares.
17.18.1. The GATP Data Record - Use of peak period

The GATP data record acts as a switch enabling the Gaussian spectrum on subsequent XSWL data records
to be defined in terms of peak period (Tp) instead of peak frequency (p). It does not apply to JONSWAP
or Pierson-Moskowitz spectra. There are no parameters.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- -------- -------- -------- -------|X|
| |GATP|XXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXX|XXX
147

- --- -- ---- -------- -------- -------- -------| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
17.18.2. Where Cross-Swell is Implemented

The following are INCLUDED in the implementation of Cross-Swell:
Aqwa-GS - Input and display of definition of cross swell parameters.
Aqwa-GS - Wave spectra graph generation of wave height spectral density
Aqwa-Drift - Drift forces, Linear Diffraction and Froude Krylov forces (*1)
Aqwa-Drift/Aqwa-Naut/Aqwa-Fer - Morison Elements
Aqwa-Librium/Aqwa-Drift/Aqwa-Naut/Aqwa-Fer - Cable Dynamics
Aqwa-Fer - Treated as 2 component directional wave spectrum
Aqwa-Librium - Calculation of steady drift force only
(*1) Includes effects on wave drift damping.
17.18.3. Where Cross-Swell is not Implemented

By definition all other uses of cross swell with wave spectra are excluded. Note that the following are
specifically excluded, but this list is not necessarily exhaustive.
Aqwa Graphical Supervisor
Wave Surface Display
Calculation of Shear Force and Bending Moment
Graphs of Waves (*1)
Contours
(*1) with the exception of cross swell spectral density and other features which are not direction dependent and are automatically included in the wave kinematics associated with Morison elements. see also inclusions.
Note
All of the above and other places where wave spectra are used but cannot use cross swell
will cause a fatal error. This failure mechanism will be implemented in as many places as
possible where the wave spectra are used, but may not include every occurrence.
148
The IWHT Data Record - Import of Wave Height Time History
17.19. The IWHT Data Record - Import of Wave Height Time History
A time history series of wave elevation may be imported into Aqwa-Drift, in order to reproduce model
test wave conditions as accurately as possible. This facility uses the IWHT data record and an external
data file. See the section below for a discussion on the accuracy of the reproduction.
Import of the time series will also generate a user-defined spectrum, using a Fast Fourier Transform,
whose frequency range is based on a JONSWAP fit of the wave elevation spectral density. In AqwaLibrium, Aqwa-Fer and Aqwa-Naut this spectrum will be used in the same way as a normal user-defined
spectrum.
Note
As the phases of the spectral wavelets are allocated randomly, the input wave elevation
time-history will not be reproduced.
The number of spectral lines of 200 is mandatory for this facility.
Note
Current is ignored when calculating the phase wave forces on the structure and the wave
kinematics for Morison elements.
This data record is used to define the file from which the wave height time history is to be copied.
2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |IWHT|XXXXX|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Filename from which the data is to be copied
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is a file name with a .WHT extension. Up to 5 WHT files may be imported in a spectral group.
Imported wave elevations are treated as user-defined spectra, so they must be listed consecutively
within a spectral group and the last IWHT data record must be followed by a FINI data record. The
format is shown below:
2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |FINI|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
| |
|
Format of the *.WHT File

149

The *.WHT file is an ASCII file with the wave elevation data in free format with 2 values per line. The
first value is the time and the second value is the wave elevation.
Additional mandatory data records describe the units. These are in the form:
DEPTH=value
G=value
These values must correspond to the values in the *.RES file. i.e. those input in Data Category 5. If the
values differ, this will cause a fatal error.
The following optional data can also be input. If not input the relevant value defaults to zero.
DIRECTION=value(degrees)
X_REF=value
Y_REF=value
NAME=Spectrum Name
CURRENT_SPEED=value
CURRENT_DIRECTION=value(degrees)
These values (whether input or default) will override any corresponding data in Data Category 13.
Note
The X_REF and Y_REF values are used in the calculation of the phase of the wave and are the
position where the wave elevation was measured. For example (in SI units), if the direction of
the wave is zero degrees (i.e. along the positive X-axis in the FRA) then values of X_REF/Y_REF
of 100.0/0.0 will indicate that the wave elevation was measured 100 metres downstream of the
0,0 wave reference point. Omission of these data will default the reference point to 0,0. i.e. the
wave elevation will be calculated using the origin of the FRA as the point at which the wave
elevation will be reproduced.
The Spectrum Name will be used for graphs and tables where appropriate throughout the
program.
Current speed and direction are needed for calculation of the wavelengths of the wavelets
used to reproduce the wave elevation. If omitted it is assumed that there is no current. Special
treatment is necessary for a profiled current. See CPRF Data Record - Profiled Current Velocity (p. 124) for additional information.
The duration of the time history in the file should be at least 7200s. This duration is necessary
in order to give sufficient resolution of low frequency resonant responses. If the file contains
less data than this, the data will be extended automatically up to 7200s, using a process of
mirroring and copying.
The maximum number of timesteps in the .WHT file is 150000.
Comments (starting with * in Column 1) may be added anywhere in the file.
150
The IWHT Data Record - Import of Wave Height Time History

When the data is imported a ramp is applied over a short period at the start and end of the
time history to ensure that the start and end values are zero. This enables the fourier transform
to be more accurate. When the imported data is plotted in the AGS it is this modified data that
is plotted.
An example of a .WHT file is shown below.

* This is an example of a *.wht file
*
DEPTH=30.0
G=9.81
DIRECTION=0.0
X_REF=100.0
Y_REF=0.0
NAME=EXAMPLE
CURRENT_SPEED=0.6
CURRENT_DIRECTION=90
* TIME WAVE HT
* s
m
0.0000 -1.088
0.0000 -1.088
0.2366 -1.188
0.4732 -1.268
0.7098 -1.351
0.9464 -1.427
1.1830 -1.471
1.4196 -1.494
1.6562 -1.476
1.8928 -1.406
2.1294 -1.293
2.3660 -1.149
2.6026 -0.966
ETC.
onl
Accuracy of Wave Surface Modeling
In Aqwa-Drift the wave elevation time-history will be reproduced exactly, within the frequency range
of the fitted spectrum and subject to the limitations of roundoff error. This is achieved by multiplying
each of the spectral wavelets (as in standard Aqwa) by a different Low Frequency Perturbation (LFP)
Function . i.e.:
Wave elevation =Sigma(j=1,N) { a(j) cos(-w(j)t+k(j)x+(j)) * LFP(j)(t) }
Where:
N is the number of spectral lines (normal Aqwa N=NSPL)
j is the wavelet number
t is time
w is frequency (as normally output in the .LIS file)
is phase (as normally output in the .LIS file)
a(j) is the amplitude
k is the wave number
151

Note that no spurious low frequency waves are generated by the above method. For any wavelet, the
minimum frequency present in the wave elevation is w(j) - dw, where dw is the highest frequency
present in the LFP function. Note also that there is no frequency overlap for each wavelet. Each LFP
function can be considered as a frequency spreading function over a limited set of contiguous frequency
bands. In this case each wavelet has a different energy (as opposed to the standard Aqwa wavelets
which have equal energy).
17.20. The SSDN/UDDS/SSWT Data Records - User-Defined Spread Seas

Spectrum
User-defined spread seas may be input with each wave spectrum defined by the user at a series of
directions.
The SSDN data record specifies the number of directions to be input and the direction values in degrees.
This must be input before any spectral ordinate values. The format of the input is as follows.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
80
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |SSDN|
|
|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_Up to 5 Directions in Ascending Order (Degrees) (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_Finish Direction Number (Maximum = 41) (I5)
|
|
|
|
|
|_Start Direction Number (I5)
|
|
|
|
This may then optionally be followed by specification of the individual weighting factors for each direction. This uses the SSWT data record and is described in detail below.
This is then followed by specification of the wave spectral density ordinates. The spectrum in each direction can be defined by ordinates at up to 50 frequencies: i.e. there can be up to 450 (41/5 * 50) UDDS
data records. Note that the same frequencies must be used for each spectrum.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
80
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |UDDS|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3)Spectral ordinate values for each direction (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)Frequency of Spectral Ordinates (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
152
The SSDN/UDDS/SSWT Data Records - User-Defined Spread Seas Spectrum

(2) The frequency at which the following ordinates are defined. The same set of frequencies must be
used for each spectrum.
(3) A single UDDS data record gives one frequency and the ordinates for up to five directions at this
frequency.
NOTES
The results output for plotting in the AGS are for the main direction only.
If there is no SSWT data record the weighting factors i.e. the contribution of each spectrum to the total
force (Aqwa-Librium) or motion (Aqwa-Fer) are calculated by a simple trapezoidal integral and will add
up to unity. The weighting factors are calculated as follows:
Wt(i) = 0.5(Dn(i+1)-Dn(i-1))/(Total direction range)
In the case of the 1st direction, the weighting function is:
Wt(1) = 0.5(Dn(2)-Dn(1))/(Total direction range)
and for the last direction of N total directions:
Wt(N) = 0.5(Dn(N)-Dn(N-1))/(Total direction range)
In general, it is up to the user to input the spectral ordinates factored so the integral of the spreading
function divided by the spread range is unity.
As an example, if a carpet spectrum is defined to model a cos2 spreading function, then the spectral
ordinates must be factored by 2.0, as the integral of cos2 divided by the direction range is 0.5.
Alternatively the user may exercise total control over the contribution of each spectrum at each direction
by specifying the individual weighting factors. This information must be input directly after the SSDN
input and has the following format.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
80
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |SSWT|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1)Spectral weights for each direction (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
For each direction, a spectral weight of 1.0 will give the same results as a single long-crested wave. This
method of input can therefore be used to describe a long crested wave with 2 simultaneous cross swell
spectra with 3 direction entries. Note that if columns 31-80 are left blank then the default weighting
153

factor of 1.0 will be used for all directions, otherwise values must be input for ALL directions. The same
number of values that was specified on the previous SSDN data record is expected.
Note
It is important to note that the drift force coefficients or QTFS are not the same as those
used by the COSN spreading functions. Hence the low frequency response in Aqwa-Fer will
not be the same. For the COSN the QTFs used for each direction are evaluated by integrating
the QTFs over the 'effective' spread range specified. This is not the case with user defined
directional spread and the QTFs are simply interpolated at the user defined directions.
17.21. The NAME Data Record - Spectrum Name

This data record optionally defines a name for a wave spectrum. It is associated with the currently
defined Wave Spectral Direction.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------|X|
| |NAME|XXXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Name for this Spectrum
| |
|
| |
| |
|
17.22. The NODR Data Record - No Drift Forces

This data record specifies that 2nd order drift forces are not to be calculated for the current spectrum.
It is applicable to any program except Aqwa-Naut.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -|X|
| |NODR|
|XXXXX|XXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Direction number (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) NODR specifies that the 2nd order drift forces are not to be calculated for the spectrum being
defined. If more than one spectrum is input then a NODR data record is required for every spectrum
for which drift forces are to be omitted.
(2) Where a User Defined Spread Seas Spectra is defined, this item specifies a direction for which 2nd
order drift forces are to be omitted. For all other spectrum types this data is not required.
17.23. The SPGR Data Record - Spectral Group Keyword

This data record signifies that the following spectra, until the next SPGR data record, form one spectral
group.
154
The SPGR Data Record - Spectral Group Keyword

2
5 7
11
16
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -|X|
| |SPGR|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- -------- -| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) No other data is required (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
LIMITATIONS
1. Program applicability:
Aqwa-Line - the SPGR card is recognized, but there can be only one spectral group containing only
one spectrum.
Aqwa-Librium - up to 20 spectral groups.
Aqwa-Fer - up to 20 spectral groups.
Aqwa-Drift - only one spectral group is allowed.
Aqwa-Naut - only one spectral group is allowed.
2. The overall maximum total number of spectra in all groups is 20.
3. In the following sections the term sub-spectrum is used.
A user-defined 2D (carpet) spectrum is a single spectrum, but it may consist of up to 41 sub-spectra.
A spectrum with a spreading function is modeled in Aqwa with 7 sub-spectra, at Gauss integration
points.
A spectrum with cross-swell contains 2 sub-spectra.
4. A spectral group may contain up to 20 spectra, subject to the overall limit above. Therefore, if a group
contains 20 spectra, there can be only one group. The spectra can be any of the available types, i.e.
JONSWAP, Pierson-Moskowitz, Gaussian, user-defined or imported using the IWHT data record.
5. There may be up to 5 IWHT data records, but these must all be in the same spectral group. Within a
group they must be listed consecutively and the list terminated with a FINI data record.
6. A spectral group may contain up to 41 sub-spectra in total.
7. A spectral group may contain only one definition of wind and/or current.
8. If there is no wind or current defined in a spectral group, the values will be taken from the last WIND or
CURR data record read. This is consistent with behavior in earlier versions of Aqwa.
An example of a spectral group definition is shown below. This group contains a wind spectrum, a
current, a JONSWAP spectrum and a user-defined spectrum. It also makes use of both spectrum and
group names.
SPGR
SGNM
NPDW
Example of Spectral Group definition
155

WIND
CURR
SPDN
NAME
JONH
SPDN
NAME
UDEF
UDEF
UDEF
UDEF
FINI
12.000
126.00
13.0
1.000
30.00
20.0
Spectrum 1 - JONSWAP
0.2
1.5
2.0
1.00000
-135.0
Spectrum 2 - simple user-defined spectrum
0.100
0.000
0.300
2.000
0.700
2.000
0.900
0.000
0.6
*
SPGR
(Next Group begins)
17.24. The SGNM Data Record - Spectral Group Name

This data record optionally defines a name for a spectral group. It is associated with the currently defined
Spectral Group.
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------|X|
| |SGNM|XXXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Name for this Spectral Group
| |
|
| |
| |
|
17.25. The TOWS Data Record - Tether Tow Speed

This data record should only be input for towed tethers.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TOWS|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Tow Direction (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Tow Speed (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) The speed at which the tether is towed

(2) The tow direction relative to the global (FRA) X-axis. Maximum +/- 30
156
Chapter 18: Regular Wave (Aqwa-Naut) - WAVE (Data Category 13N)

This data category is used to describe a single regular wave. The wave is described in terms of its
amplitude, period and direction.
This data category is applicable only to Aqwa-Naut.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|WAVE|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
|
|_Compulsory Data Category Keyword (A4)
|
18.3. The WAMP Data Record - The Regular Wave Amplitude

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------|X|
| |WAMP|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Wave Amplitude (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
|_Compulsory END on Last Data Record in Data Category (A3)
18.4. The PERD Data Record - Regular Wave Period

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------|X|
| |PERD|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Wave Period (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
18.5. The WDRN & WVDN Data Records - Wave Direction

These two data record keywords mean exactly the same.
157
Regular Wave (Aqwa-Naut) - WAVE (Data Category 13N)

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------|X|
| |WDRN|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------|X|
| |WVDN|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Wave Direction (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
18.6. The AIRY Data Record - Linear Wave

This data record tells the program to use linear wave as incident wave instead of the Stokes second
order wave which is used by default in the calculation of the Froude-Krylov forces. Note that if the LSTF
option is used in the OPTIONS data category, the linear wave and the Stokes second order wave will
give the same results.
This data record is not recommended for big waves.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---|X|
| |AIRY|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_Optional Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
|
18.7. The WRMP Data Record - Wave Ramp

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------|X|
| |WRMP|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Time (tw) before which the wave ramp is effective (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The wave ramp is introduced to reduce the transient motion of the structure at the beginning of a
time domain analysis. When this data record is defined, the wave ramp will take effect from t = 0.0 to
t = tw, during which a wave ramp factor f (0.0 < f < 1.0) will be calculated and then multiplied to the
wave frequency forces.
The wave ramp factor f is decided by
158
The WRMP Data Record - Wave Ramp

It can be seen that at t=0, the factor is 0.0 and at t=tw, the factor is 1.0. If twis omitted in the WRMP
data record, the program will default tw = wave period for regular waves; for irregular waves in Naut,
the default value for tw will be the highest period of all the wavelets in the spectrum
159
160
Chapter 19: Mooring Lines and Attachment Points - MOOR (Data

Category 14)
This data category is used to input the description of the mooring line/hawser attachment points/cable
configurations. The types of mooring lines available at present include both linear and nonlinear cables.
The linear cables comprise linear elastic cables, winch cables and 'constant force' cables. The nonlinear
cables comprise catenary cables, steel wire cables and cables described by a polynomial of up to fifth
order.
Up to a maximum of 100 mooring lines may be input, by specifying the structure number and node
number (see Node Number and Coordinates (Data Category 1) (p. 37)) of the attachment points at each
end of the mooring line, together with their physical characteristics.
Enter NONE for the data category keyword if no mooring lines are present (see Compulsory Data Category
Keyword (p. 27)).
Attachment Positions of Mooring Lines

One end of all mooring lines must be attached to a point on a floating (or sinking!) structure. The other
end of the mooring line may be attached to either another structure or a fixed point (e.g. the sea bed)
with the following exceptions.
The FORC cable is inherently a constant force vector and cannot be attached between two structures.
Although presented as a type of cable, this facility is used in practice to represent any external force
acting at a point on a structure whose magnitude and direction are constant.
Input of Mooring Lines with Nonlinear Properties

It should be noted that the input format for nonlinear mooring lines is not the same as that for linear
mooring lines. linear mooring lines are input by specifying BOTH the physical properties and the attachment points on one data record. nonlinear mooring lines are input by specifying the physical properties
on one data record followed by one or more data records, each representing a mooring line with the
previously defined physical properties.
The maximum number of different types of nonlinear properties accepted by the program is 1000.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|MOOR|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
161
Mooring Lines and Attachment Points - MOOR (Data Category 14)
19.3. The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables

The maximum number of mooring lines (linear plus nonlinear) that may be defined is 100.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------|X|
| |LINE|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |WNCH|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |FORC|
|
|XXXXX|
|
|XXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (9) Paying-out Friction
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factor Fp (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (8) Winding-in Friction
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factor Fw (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| (7) Unstretched Length (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
(6) Stiffness (LINE)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Tension
(WNCH)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Force
(FORC) (E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(5) Node Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4) Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Mooring Line Code (A4)
| |
|
(1) The mooring line code indicates which type of linear mooring line the user wishes to model. Note
that the term 'linear' is used generally to denote that the tension is either constant or linearly proportional to the extension. The cable codes available at present are:
LINE - a conventional linear elastic cable
WNCH - a winch adjusted to constant tension
FORC - a constant force
Note that these mooring lines are assumed to have no mass and are therefore represented geometrically
by a straight line. See below for further details.
(2) This is the number of the structure to which the cable is attached and must correspond to one of
the structures defined within Data Category 2. If 1 is input, this will correspond to the structure defined
in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category
ELM2 etc. Note that Structure 0 (in other words, a fixed node) is an ILLEGAL structure and will produce
an error (see (4)).
(3) This is the node number whose position is the attachment point of the end of the mooring line on
the structure specified (1). The position of this node on the structure (2) must have been defined in
Data Category 1.
162
The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables

(4)-(5) This structure number (4) and its corresponding node number (5) define the attachment position
of the other end of the mooring line. The position of this node on the structure (4) must have been
If '0' is input as the structure number (4), together with a node number (5), the program will recognise
that this node number (5) references a fixed position as defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed Reference
Axis System (FRA). Note that a non-zero structure number (4) must be followed by a valid node number
(5) on that structure.
(6) This value represents:
WNCH - tension
FORC - constant force
LINE - linear elastic stiffness
(7) The unstretched length is used to indicate the length at which the mooring line is slack, i.e. if the
distance between the attachment points at either end of the mooring line is less than this value, then
the tension in the mooring line will be zero. Although unusual, it is quite valid to input this value as
zero where the 'cable' is never slack. However, in the special case where both ends of the cable are
coincident, the direction of the force exerted by the cable is undefined and is automatically set to zero.
(8)-(9) The tension in the winch mooring line when winding-in is given by Tw=Ts*(1-Fw) where Ts is the
winch tension specified in (6).
When paying-out, the winch tension is given by Tp = Ts(1+Fp)
For example, if the tension specified is 1000 tonnes and Fw and Fp are 0.3 and 0.1 respectively, then
the tensions will be 700 and 1100 tonnes respectively.
We note that the initial tension is undefined. The default initial tension is the winding-in tension i.e.
700 tonnes in the example above. The winding-in friction coefficient should be specified as negative if
the paying-out value of tension is required as the initial tension.
Note also that for Aqwa-Librium and Aqwa-Fer, this tension value will not change unless the line goes
slack. (Range is less than the initial length specified.)
Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut will vary the tension according to whether the range (distance between the
anchor and vessel attachment point) is increasing or decreasing. If the range is less than the initial
length specified the line becomes slack and the tension is zero.
19.3.1. The LINE Data Record - A Conventional linear elastic Cable

A 'LINE' cable (linear elastic cable) is the conventional type of cable where the tension is proportional
to its extension, and the constant of proportionality is termed the STIFFNESS. This type of cable can be
attached between a structure and a fixed point or attached between two structures. As the extension
may vary during the analysis, the structure(s) to which the cable is attached will experience a force of
varying magnitude and direction. The magnitude of this force, which is equal to the cable tension is
given by
Force = (Stiffness(6))(Cable Extension)
163

Note that when the cable is slack, the cable extension, as defined below, is negative and the cable
tension is set to zero.
(A) For a cable attached between a structure and a fixed point:
The extension, at any stage of the analysis, is calculated by subtracting the unstretched length (7) from
the distance between the position of the attachment node (3) and the position of the fixed node (5)
as defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed Reference Axis System (FRA).
The direction of this force is given by the vector going from the position of the attachment node (3)
to that of the fixed node (5)
(B) For a cable attached to two structures:
The extension, at any stage of the analysis, is calculated by subtracting the unstretched length (7) from
the distance between the position of the attachment node (3) on one structure and the position of the
attachment node (5) on the other structure.
The direction of the force on a structure is given by the vector going from the position of the attachment
node (3) on that structure, to the position of the attachment node (5) on the other structure. The forces
on each structure will therefore always be equal and opposite. Note that the interchange of parameters
(2) and (3) with (4) and (5) has no effect.
19.3.2. The WNCH Data Record - A Winch Adjusted to Constant Tension

The 'WNCH' cable may be thought of as attached to a winch providing constant tension in that mooring
line. This type of cable can be attached between a structure and a fixed point or attached between two
structures. This model of a cable therefore represents a force of constant magnitude but with varying
direction.
The magnitude of this force is given by the value of parameter (6) input in columns 31-40 and is constant
throughout the analysis.
(A) For a cable attached between a structure and a fixed point:
The direction of this force is given by the vector going from the position of the attachment node (3),
at any stage in the analysis, to that of the fixed node (5) as defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed
Reference Axis system (FRA).
(B) For a cable attached to two structures:
The direction of the force on one structure, at any stage of the analysis, is given by the vector from the
position of the attachment node (3) on that structure, to the position of the attachment node (5) on
the other structure. The forces on each structure will therefore always be equal and opposite. Note that
the interchange of parameters (2) and (3) with (4) and (5) has no effect.
19.3.3. The FORC Data Record - Constant Force

The 'FORC' cable represents a mooring line whose anchor point (parameters (4) and (5)) is automatically
adjusted so that the force vector acting on the structure is constant. Although the attachment point
moves with the structure during the analysis, the magnitude and direction of the force acting at that
point remains constant. This model of a cable therefore represents a force of constant magnitude and
direction throughout the analysis.
164
The POLY Data Record - Polynomial Nonlinear Properties

The magnitude of the force is given by the value of parameter (6) input in columns 31-40.
The direction of the force is given by the vector going from the position of the attachment node (3) to
the position of the node (5) where both nodes are as originally defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed
Reference Axis system (FRA).
Although presented as a type of cable, in practice this facility may be used to represent any external
force acting at a point on a structure whose magnitude and direction is constant, e.g. the force exerted
by wind on a superstructure.
19.4. The POLY Data Record - Polynomial Nonlinear Properties

This data record defines a nonlinear property of a mooring line. In order to use these defined values,
one or more NLIN or FLIN data records must follow. The maximum number of nonlinear properties that
may be defined is 50.
2
5 7
11
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----------------- --------- --------- --------- ----|X|
| |POLY|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- ----------------- --------- --------- --------------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|--------------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
(1)-(5) 5 Coefficients of the Polynomial (5E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(5) These values represent the coefficients of the polynomial which defines the force in the mooring
as a function of extension or compression.
The Tension as a Polynomial Function of Extension. For application to Fenders

see note below.
This facility enables the user to approximate the force/extension curve of any mooring line with known
characteristics. Note that this data record does not define a mooring line.
The mooring line properties defined on this data record will apply to all NLIN or FLIN data records that
follow until another nonlinear property data record is input. (Note that SWIR is also a nonlinear property
data record.)
Tension in a mooring line with this property is given by:
Tension = P1.E + P2.E2 + P3.E3 + P4.E4 + P5.E5
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 = Parameters input on the POLY data record
165

E = Extension of the mooring line
Note
When used to define the stiffness properties of a fender the force and displacement used
are compressive instead of tensile. For a fender with linear stiffness P1 will still be positive.
19.5. The NLIN Data Record - Nonlinear Cables

When an NLIN data record is input, the program assumes that the nonlinear properties correspond to
those specified by the most recently input nonlinear properties data record. Failure to input these
properties before a NLIN data record means that they are undefined and will result in an error. Note
that one nonlinear properties data record will normally apply to several NLIN data records. This not
only avoids repeating the same properties for several similar mooring lines, but also enables the user
to make a single change to apply to all those properties.
Parameters (6), (8), (9) are only applicable when a POLY nonlinear line is used as a winch line.
The maximum number of mooring lines that may be defined is 100.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NLIN|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (9) Paying-out Friction
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factor Fp (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (8) Winding-in Friction
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factor Fw (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| (7) Unstretched Length (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
(6) Winch Tension Ts (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Nonlinear Mooring Line Code (A4)
| |
|
19.5.1. Parameters Applied to a Polynomial (POLY) Mooring Line

This type of mooring line is a more general case of the linear elastic mooring line (described in detail
in The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables (p. 162)) and with the exception of the manner
in which the cable tension is calculated, the POLY data record (The POLY Data Record - Polynomial
Nonlinear Properties (p. 165)) is identical in all respects. Note that these mooring lines are assumed to
have no mass and are therefore represented geometrically by a straight line.
166
The NLIN Data Record - Nonlinear Cables

Parameters on the NLIN data record are:
(1) Mooring line code NLIN indicates a nonlinear cable whose properties are specified by the preceding
POLY nonlinear properties data record.
(2)-(5) As linear mooring lines in The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables (p. 162).
(6) This field is used to specify the winch tension Ts when the POLY nonlinear line is used as a winch
line. Otherwise it is not applicable.
(7) As linear mooring lines in The LINE/WNCH/FORC Data Records - Linear Cables (p. 162).
(8),(9) Fw and Fp are applicable only when the POLY nonlinear line is used as a winch line. The tension
in the POLY winch line when winding-in is given by Tw = Ts(1-|Fw|) and when paying-out, the tension
is given by Tp = Ts(1+|Fp|).
For example, if the tension specified is 1000 tonnes and Fw and Fp are 0.3 and 0.1 respectively, then
the tensions will be 700 (Tmin) and 1100 (Tmax) tonnes respectively.
The default initial tension is calculated as follows:
Fw
Fp
Description
Calculation
Value in example above
>0.0
>0.0
Mean tension
(Tmin+Tmax)/2
900t
>0.0
< 0.0
Winding-in tension
Tmin
700t
< 0.0
>0.0
Paying-out tension
Tmax
1100t
< 0.0
< 0.0
Winch tension
1000t
For Aqwa-Librium and Aqwa-Fer, this tension value will not change unless the line goes slack. (Range
is less than the initial length specified.)
Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut will vary the tension according to whether the range (distance between the
anchor and vessel attachment point) is increasing or decreasing. If the range is less than the initial
length specified the line becomes slack and the tension is zero.
The initial paid-out length is initialized to give the specified tension in the initial position specified in
Data Category 15 at the beginning of the time history.
* If the range is increasing and the tension is at Tmax then the winch is paying out and the tension remains
at Tmax.
* If the range is decreasing and the tension is at Tmin then the winch is winding in and the tension remains at Tmin as long as the range is greater than the initial length specified.
* At all other times the line acts as a normal NLIN(POLY) line.
19.5.2. Parameters Applied to a Composite Catenary (COMP/ECAT) Mooring

Line
For a description of the elastic catenary mooring line see The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite
Catenary Mooring Line (p. 168). Parameters on the NLIN data record are:
167

(1) The mooring line code NLIN indicates a catenary mooring line whose properties are specified by the
preceding COMP/ECAT nonlinear properties data records.
Note that if 0 is specified as the 2nd structure number (parameter 4), it is assumed that this is the seabed
and the cable will not hang any lower than the node specified in parameter 5.
19.5.3. Parameters Applied to a Steel Wire (SWIR) Nonlinearity

For a description of the steel wire mooring line see The SWIR Data Record - Steel Wire Nonlinear Properties (p. 190). Parameters on the NLIN data record are:
(1) The mooring line code NLIN indicates a steel wire mooring line whose properties are specified by
the preceding SWIR nonlinear properties data record.
(6) This field is not applicable as the tension is not fixed but is calculated at each step of the analysis.
(7) This is simply the unstretched length of the steel wire.
19.6. The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite Catenary Mooring Line

These data records define a nonlinear composite mooring line, in terms of one or more elastic catenaries.
In order to use this composite line, one or more NLIN data records must follow.
A composite mooring line can be defined to link a structure to an anchor, or to link two structures.
Limits on the numbers of components in a mooring system are given at the end of this section.
19.6.1. The COMP Data Record

The COMP data record describes a composite mooring line consisting of one or more elastic catenaries.
Internally Aqwa converts all composite mooring lines to a 2-dimensional load/extension database (with
maximum 600 points) identical to the format of the LE2D and associated data records. The user is
strongly advised to read this section before using this facility.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- ----------|X|
| |COMP|
3|
10|11112|
2|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- ----------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(7) Sea bed slope (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(6) Z Maximum Value (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(5) Z Minimum Value (F10.0) Must be > zero
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4) Number of lines in the cable
| |
|
|
|
|
composite (I5) (NO DEFAULT) (Max=10)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Warning flags and Symmetry forcing (I5)
| |
|
|
|
(Def = all warnings issued)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Number of X coordinates (I5) (Def =40,Max = 40) or 600 divided by (1), whichever is les
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Number of Z coordinates (I5) (Def =15, Max = 20) or 600 divided by (2), whichever is less
| |
|
168
The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite Catenary Mooring Line

| |
| |
|
(1) The number of Z values to be used in creating the 2-dimension load extension database for this
composite mooring line
(2) The number of X values to be used in creating the 2-dimension load/extension database for this
composite mooring line.
For composite catenaries linking two structures (instead of sea bed and structure), it is strongly recommended that the full database size (600 points) be used. The default numbers, when these fields are
left blank, for Z and X are 15 and 40 respectively. Also the Z becomes the angular coordinate and the
X the radial coordinate, and the program will ignore user specifications for the Z range and use the
default values (-90 to + 90 degs). The sea bed slope will also be ignored for catenaries between structures
as they are not allowed to touch the sea bed.
(3) This parameter indicates whether warnings should be issued when the position of the attachment
point of the mooring line relative to the anchor point is outside the range of the database created for
this mooring line characteristic. Warnings about the degree of symmetry are not issued, as the stiffness
matrix is automatically symmetric for composite cables. See The LE2D Data Record (p. 185) for further
details on stiffness matrix asymmetry.
This parameter should be thought of as five separate flags, which indicate the following:
Flag
Column
Meaning
21
0 = Warnings are issued when the X position exceeds the range specified
22
0 = Warnings are issued when the X position is below the range specified
23
0 = Warnings are issued when the Z position exceeds the range specified
24
0 = Warnings are issued when the Z position is below the range specified
25
0 = Symmetry Forcing
If a value is set to non-zero then the corresponding warning will be suppressed.

The Z range warnings during the analysis correspond directly to the relative Z position of the attachment
point on the vessel in the database axis system being outside the values specified in (5)(6).
The X range (horizontal distance between the attachment point on the vessel and the anchor) will depend
on the position of the anchor and the maximum tension specified on the ECAT data record. Warnings
during the analysis relating to values below the X range correspond to slack condition when the
mooring line is hanging vertically. Warnings during the analysis relating to values exceeding the X range
correspond to tensions in excess of the lowest value of maximum tension specified on the ECAT data
records following this data record.
The 5th number (column 25) relates to the symmetry forcing. The calculation of the stiffness matrix
from the database is not exact and normally leads to small errors (in the order of 1 or 2%). The exact
solution is always symmetrical. In theory symmetry forcing should therefore give a slightly more accurate
stiffness matrix. The database of 600 values minimises this error. A value of 1 should be used to switch
off the warning of asymmetry and a value of 2 should be entered to make the matrix symmetrical.
169

(4) The number of lines of different properties in the composite cable i.e. for a line made from one
section of wire and one of chain, the value would be 2, indicating that two ECAT data records will follow
the COMP data record.
(5)-(6) These values have different meanings for a line between a structure and the seabed or between
two structures.
Anchor - Structure Line
These values define the expected range of the vertical distance between the anchor and the attachment
point on the structure. These values will normally be the Z distance between the attachment point on
the vessel and the anchor plus or minus the expected amplitude of motion of the attachment point.
E.g:
if the sea bed is at Z = -100;
the Z position of the attachment point when the vessel is in equilibrium is at -10;
the expected amplitude of the vessel motion is 10;
ZMIN and ZMAX would be 80 and 100 respectively.
ZMIN must be positive and ZMAX must be greater than ZMIN.
Structure - Structure Line
These values are not used for a line between two structures. However, at the point when the COMP
data record is read it is not known if the line will be connected to an anchor or not. Therefore two
positive values must be input, with ZMAX > ZMIN.
(7) This value is the sea bed slope (in degrees) for this COMP mooring line. A positive slope is for the
sea bed to slope up from the anchor towards the attachment point, and a negative slope is for the sea
bed to slope down from the anchor towards the attachment point. Sea bed slope is ignored if cable
dynamics is being used for this line (or lines).
19.6.2. The ECAT Data Record

The ECAT data record specifies the properties of each of the sections of the composite line. Although
the data record title implies that only properties of elastic catenaries are expected, clump weights may
be modeled by specifying a very large mass per unit length and a specification of unit length (Aqwa
will not accept lengths less than 1). It is also possible to specify buoys and clump weights explicitly;
see the BUOY data record (The BUOY/CLMP Data Records - Intermediate Buoys and Clump
Weights (p. 172)).
2
5 7
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- -------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |ECAT|XXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(5) Length of Mooring Line
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4)Maximum Tension at the
| |
|
|
|
|
Attachment Point (E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
(default = 5.0E4 * mass/unit length)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) EA Value (E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
(default = 5.0E6 * mass/unit length)
| |
|
|
|
170
The ECAX Data Record - Nonlinear Axial Stiffness Polynomial

| |
|
|
|_(2) Equivalent Cross-Sectional
| |
|
|
Area (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Mass/Unit Length (E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) Mass per unit length of the section of the composite mooring line.
(2) The equivalent cross sectional area of the mooring line. It is often more convenient, especially with
wire lines, to specify this parameter so the buoyancy of the line may be calculated and subtracted from
the structural weight to give the 'weight in water'. This parameter may also be specified as zero if the
mass per unit length (1) is input as the mass of the line less the mass of the displaced water per unit
length (this does not apply to the cases when cable dynamic analysis is required, for which a non-zero
equivalent cross section area must be defined).
(3) The stiffness of the line is specified in terms of EA, where E is Youngs modulus and A is the cross
sectional area of the line. The default value is chosen to give a typical value based on the mass/unit
length. Clearly this may be in error if the mass per unit length specified (1) includes buoyancy effects.
(4) The maximum tension is the highest value of tension that should used in the database created for
this composite mooring line.
(5) The length of the section of the composite mooring line. Note that values less than 1 are not accepted.
N.B. For a composite mooring line containing more than one ECAT data record, the definition of ECATs
should start from the anchor point. If a composite mooring line links two structures the ECAT data records
can start from either end, but the start must correspond to the second structure on the NLIN data record.
Limits on Mooring Systems

The maximum number of mooring combinations is 25.
The maximum number of mooring lines is 100.
The maximum number of nonlinear properties (i.e. POLY, SWIR, LE2D, COMP and ECAT data records) is
1000.
The maximum number of separate stiffness databases (i.e sets of data headed by COMP or LE2D data
records) is 100.
The maximum number of ECAT data records in one COMP mooring line is 10.
19.7. The ECAX Data Record - Nonlinear Axial Stiffness Polynomial

This data record is used to define nonlinear axial stiffness and should be input after an ECAT data record
(The ECAT Data Record (p. 170)). If this data record is omitted for a particular section of a mooring line
the axial stiffness will be constant, using the value of EA from the ECAT data record.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- Release 15.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
171

|X|
| |ECAX|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- -----------| |
|
|__________|__________|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(4) Coefficients of the polynomial (E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2)-(4) These coefficients define a nonlinear variation in axial stiffness. The stiffness is calculated using
the formula
EA() = EA(const) + k1.+ k2.2 + k3.3
(0 tmax)
EA() = EA(tmax) + {k1 + 2.k2.tmax + 3.k3.tmax2}.(-tmax)
( > tmax)
where
EA() = EA as a function of strain
EA(const) = the EA value on the ECAT data record (The ECAT Data Record (p. 170))
k1, k2, k3 = coefficients input on the ECAX data record (The ECAX Data Record - Nonlinear Axial Stiffness
Polynomial (p. 171))
= linear strain L/L
tmax = strain at Tmax
Tmax = maximum tension specified on the preceding ECAT
Note
The stiffness must increase monotonically over a tension range from zero to the maximum
tension specified on the preceding ECAT data record (Tmax).
For tension greater than Tmax, the stiffness is assumed to increase linearly with strain, with
slope equal to the slope at Tmax.
19.8. The BUOY/CLMP Data Records - Intermediate Buoys and Clump

Weights
These data records define the properties of intermediate buoys and clump weights. The data records
must be input between ECAT data records describing the properties of the lines either side of the buoy.
The last ECAT data record must not be followed by a BUOY/CLMP data record as this will be on the attachment point on a structure.
Intermediate buoys always have the same buoyancy and do not "know" where the surface is. Therefore
they may float above the water surface.
172
Cable Dynamics - Additional Data Requirements

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- |X|
| |BUOY|XXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- |X|
| |CLMP|XXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- | |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(5) Drag Coefficient x Area;
| |
|
|
|
|
CDA (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4) Added Mass (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3) Displaced Mass of Water
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Structural Mass (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2) This is the structural mass of the buoy or clump weight. This must be smaller than the mass of displaced water (3) for a buoy, or larger for a clump weight. This can be positive, zero or negative.
(3) The mass of water displaced, i.e. the buoyancy/gravity. This can be positive, zero or negative.
(4) Total (constant) added mass, i.e. not added mass coefficient. Applicable to Cable Dynamics only.
(5) The drag force (cable dynamics only) will be in the direction of the relative velocity of the fluid, VR.
The magnitude of the force is given by
FD = 0.5 (CDA )(VR )(|VR|)
where CDA = Drag coefficient projected area.
19.9. Cable Dynamics - Additional Data Requirements

An introduction to cable dynamics is described in this section, in addition to the data records in Data
Category 14 for cable dynamics analysis.
NLID is the only data record that is necessary to define a composite catenary line as dynamic; the other
data records are optional to allow the input of additional data.
19.9.1. Introduction to Cable Dynamics
19.9.2.The NLID Data Record - Non-linear Dynamic Cable
19.9.3.The ECAH Data Record - Elastic Catenary Hydrodynamic Properties
19.9.4.The ECAB Data Record - Elastic Catenary Bending Stiffness
19.9.5.The NCEL Data Record - Number of Cable Elements
19.9.6.The DYNM/DOFF Data Records - Cable Dynamics ON/OFF Switch
19.9.1. Introduction to Cable Dynamics

When the dynamics of a cable are included in the analysis of cable motion, the effects of the cable
mass and drag forces are considered, and tensions are no longer quasi static, i.e. forces on the cable
are time varying and have 'memory'. The cable will, in general, respond in a nonlinear manner. The
solution during a time history and the solution in the frequency domain are fully coupled, i.e. the cable
tensions and motions of the vessel are considered to be mutually interactive where cables affect vessel
motion and vice versa.
173

The following key points should be noted:
Cable dynamics can only be associated with non-linear composite catenary lines.
Cables are semi-taut/taut during the analysis i.e. they have a minimum tension.
The sea bed is considered horizontal at the anchor.
The cable is modeled with a fixed number of elements.
Inline dynamics (along the line of the cable) is included.
Inline stiffness i.e. AE/DL (DL = segment length) is limited.
Morison Drag forces are included (wave particle velocity ignored).
Wave kinematics is ignored although current is included.
Full animation of cable dynamics is not included.
Sea bed friction is ignored.
The AGS Model Visualisation is based on the quasi-static configuration and tensions for any particular
position of the fairlead.
19.9.2. The NLID Data Record - Non-linear Dynamic Cable

This data record defines a nonlinear mooring line in the same way as a NLIN data record except that
NLID will flag the mooring line as dynamic so that dynamic analysis will be performed for this line unless
cable dynamics is switched off by a DOFF data record (see The DYNM/DOFF Data Records - Cable Dynamics ON/OFF Switch (p. 176)).
NLID data records can only be used for elastic catenaries.
Line dynamics is available in all Aqwa programs (except Aqwa-Line), but it has little value in Librium
static analysis except to take into account the current drag on mooring lines.
The NLID Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NLID|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
|
174
Cable Dynamics - Additional Data Requirements
19.9.3. The ECAH Data Record - Elastic Catenary Hydrodynamic Properties

This data record is for defining the hydrodynamic properties for cable dynamic analysis and should be
input after an ECAT data record (elastic catenary). If an ECAT data record is not followed by an ECAH
data record, the program will use the coefficients defined in the previous ECAH data record. If there is
no previous ECAH data record, the program will then use the default values for the coefficients.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
71
81
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |ECAH|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(6)Inline Drag Coefficie
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(5) Equivalent Diameter for Drag D
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4) Transverse Drag Coefficient Cd (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3) Leave Blank (for future use)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Added Mass Coefficient Ca (F10.0)
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Data Record Keyword(A4)
| |
|
(2) Added mass is calculated by RHO*Ca*A per unit length in which RHO is the water density and A is
the equivalent cross section area of the ECAT The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite Catenary
Mooring Line (p. 168). In other words, the added mass is equal to the displaced mass of water multiplied
by Ca. For cable dynamic analysis, the equivalent cross section area A must not be omitted in the ECAT
definition. The default is 1.0.
(4) Transverse drag force is calculated by 0.5*RHO*Cd*V2*De per unit length where V is the relative
transverse velocity. The default is 1.0.
(5) Equivalent diameter for drag. This allows the drag to be based on a different diameter from the
added mass. The default is
(6) Inline drag force is calculated by 0.5*RHO*Cx*V2*De per unit length where V is the relative inline
velocity. The default is 0.025.
19.9.4. The ECAB Data Record - Elastic Catenary Bending Stiffness

This data record is used to define the bending stiffness for a cable dynamic analysis and should be input
after an ECAT data record (elastic catenary). If this data record is omitted for a particular section of a
mooring line the bending stiffness will be zero.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ------|X|
| |ECAB|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---------- ------| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Bending Stiffness EI (E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
175

|
(2) For a prismatic section the bending stiffness is the product of the elastic modulus and the 2nd moment of area. For a chain or laid hawser an equivalent value must be defined.
Note
It is not possible to input a very high stiffness to create a straight rod. The maximum bending
stiffness is related to the axial stiffness as follows.
EImax = (EA)(L2/30)
This check is carried out for the individual elements into which the cable is split, so the length
(L) is the length of the element. This is not available to the user but is approximately the
total length of the line divided by the total number of elements. See the NCEL data record.
19.9.5. The NCEL Data Record - Number of Cable Elements

The number of elements for each line in the calculation of full cable dynamics may be increased from
the default value of 50 to a maximum of 250. Computing times will increase by a factor of approximately
5 when 250 elements are used.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NCEL|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Number of elements required for each line (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
Each NLID data record that follows this specification will have the required number of elements.
19.9.6. The DYNM/DOFF Data Records - Cable Dynamics ON/OFF Switch

These two data records switch the cable dynamics analysis on or off for the dynamic cables defined by
NLID data records.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------|X|
| |DYNM|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------|X|
| |DOFF|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------| |
|
| |
| |
|
176
The LBRK Data Record - Mooring Line Break

The DYNM data record is in fact not necessary as the NLID data record will automatically switch the
cable dynamics on.
The DOFF data record will switch the cable dynamics off so that NLID data records will effectively be
the same as NLIN data records and no cable dynamic analysis will be performed. A DOFF data record
can be input anywhere in Data Category 14 and it applies to all the NLID data records.
19.10. The LBRK Data Record - Mooring Line Break

The LBRK data record allows the user to specify that one or more mooring lines should be broken (deactivated) during an analysis. Only one LBRK data record can be used for each spectrum in Aqwa-Fer
or Librium, but multiple data records may be used during an Aqwa-Drift or Naut analysis. The format
of the LBRK data record is as follows:
2
7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
|LBRK|
|
|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(4) Breaking tension at 2nd structure (AQWA-DRIFT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3) Breaking tension at 1st structure (AQWA-DRIFT/NAUT)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Time at which to break the mooring line (AQWA-DRIFT/NAUT)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Mooring line number to break (I5)
|
|
|
|_Spectrum number (AQWA-LIBRIUM/FER) (max 20)
|
|_LBRK Data Record Keyword
(1) The mooring line number is taken from the order in which the lines are defined.
(2) The time has two meanings.
If no tension is defined the line will break at this time.
If a tension is also defined, the line will break the 1st time the tension exceeds the specified value, after
this time.
(3) The mooring line will break when the tension at the 1st structure on the LINE/NLIN/NLID data record
is greater than this value, if the time is greater than the specified breaking time (2).
(4) The mooring line will break when the tension at the 2nd structure on the LINE/NLIN/NLID data record
is greater than this value, if the time is greater than the specified breaking time (2).
Note
Logic for breaking lines.
not
not
not
not
TIME
given
given
given
given
t1
t1
t1
or
or
or
or
0
0
0
0
TENSION 1
not given or 0
F1
not given or 0
F1
not given or 0
F1
F1
TENSION 2
not given or
not given or
F2
F2
not given or
not given or
F2
0
0
0
0
RESULT
Always broken
Breaks when tension
Breaks when tension
Breaks when tension
Breaks at time=t1
Breaks when tension
Breaks when tension
1 > F1
2 > F2
1 > F1 or tension 2 > F2
1 > F1, after time t1

1 > F1 or tension 2 > F2, af
177

In Aqwa-Fer and Librium the line is always broken; the time and tension values are ignored.
The normal usage of the LBRK data record for Aqwa-Fer/Librium is for a specified spectrum
rose (e.g. N,NW,W,SW,S etc). An initial run is performed to determine the worst line tensions
and then a second run is performed with identical data apart from the LBRK data record. Thus
for, say, 8 spectra, the equilibrium and significant motions can be determined in two runs (each)
for all 8 spectra.
19.11. The PULY Data Record - Linear Cables

The maximum number of pulleys per pulley set is 2.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |PULY|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(9) Sliding Friction (T2/T1) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(8) Bearing Friction (T2/T1) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(7) radius (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(6) angle (E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Mooring Line Code (A4)
| |
|
(1) The PULY data record indicates that a pulley is positioned on a line. A maximum of 2 pulleys is allowed
for each pulley set (i.e. two pulleys per LINE), with the first PULY data record following a LINE data record,
i.e. applying to the most recently defined LINE. In the case of a 2 pulley set the second PULY data record
will follow the first PULY data record. A PULY has the effect of intersecting a LINE and will effectively
extend the LINE from the LINE's node to the second PULY node.
(2) This is the structure number to which the pulley is attached and must correspond to one of the
structures defined in Data Category 2. If '1' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data
Category ELM1. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2 etc.
Note that Structure '0' (i.e. a fixed node) is an ILLEGAL structure and will produce an error (see (4)).
(3) This is the node number whose position is the attachment point of the pulley on the structure specified (1). The position of this node on the structure (2) must have been defined in Data Category 1.
Items (2) & (3) must appear on the previous LINE data record (see examples).
(4)-(5) This structure number (4) and its corresponding node number (5) define the attachment position
of the other end of the mooring line. The position of this node on the structure (4) must have been
178
The PULY Data Record - Linear Cables

If '0' is input as the structure number (4), together with a node number (5), the program will recognize
that this node number (5) references a fixed position as defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed Reference
Axis System (FRA). Note that a non-zero structure number (4) must be followed by a valid node number
(5) on that structure.
(6) This value represents the angle at which the pulley lies about the Z axis (FRA). The default angle (0)
places the pulley in the orientation shown in the diagram.
(7) The radius is used to indicate the radius of the pulley, but is not used for the purpose of the calculation. The radius of the pulley will be displayed in the Aqwa Graphical Supervisor.
(8)-(9) There are two possible formulations for the friction. In each case the friction of the pulley is
represented by T2/T1, where T2 is the larger tension and T1 the smaller. T2/T1 should be defined for the
situation where the line turns through 180 around the pulley.
T2/T1 in columns 51-60 represents bearing friction of a pulley rotating around an axle
T2/T1 in columns 61-70 represents sliding between the rope and the pulley, for example if the pulley
represents a fairlead.
If values are entered in both fields the 2nd definition overrides the 1st.
Pulley with bearing friction: a friction factor is calculated such that = (T2-T1) / (T2+T1). The friction
is then varied depending on how far around the pulley the line passes.
Pulley with sliding friction: a friction factor is calculated such that (T2/T1) = exp(). The friction is
then varied depending on how far around the pulley the line passes.
In each case T2/T1 must be in the range 1 T2/T1 2.
Pulleys - Assumptions and Restrictions

A PULY data record must be preceded by a LINE data record.
Maximum of 2 pulleys per pulley set.
The radius of the pulley is ignored for the purpose of the calculations.
If distance from start of pulley mooring line to end point is less than the total length, then the whole line
is slack.
The pulley lines are assumed to be in contact with the pulleys at all times.
Distances between pulley points are assumed to be scalar quantities. For example, a structure may be
'drawn through' a pulley to appear on the other side.
179
Examples of Connectivity
The following three cases demonstrate the required input of connectivity for systems including pulleys.
CASE 1 Is a standard LINE connected between a single structure and earth. The typical connectivity input
for this system would be:
LINE
101
201
...
CASE 2 Is a LINE connected between a single structure and earth. A pulley is inserted on the line and
extends the line to node 102. The typical connectivity input for this system would be:
LINE
PULY
1
1
101
101
0
1
201
102
...
...
CASE 3 Is a LINE connected between a two structures and earth, with a 2 pulley set on the LINE. The
typical connectivity input for this system would be:
LINE
PULY
PULY
1
1
1
101
101
102
0
1
2
201
102
201
...
...
...
19.12. The DWT0/LNDW/DWAL Data Records - Linear Drum Winches

These data records are used to model a winch or drum which winds in or pays out a linear elastic line
starting at a user specified time. The line has a start length, a final length and a winch speed.
This is considered a time-history feature, and therefore is only available in Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut.
All other programs will treat this as a normal linear elastic line.
19.12.1. The DWT0 Data Record

This data record specifies the time when the winching action starts and must be input before the LNDW
data record.
180
The DWT0/LNDW/DWAL Data Records - Linear Drum Winches
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------X|
| |DWT0|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_ (2) Starting Time of the Winching Action
|
|
|
|
(2) The line will will be treated as a standard linear elastic line until this time is reached or exceeded at
any particular timestep.
19.12.2. The LNDW Data Record

The format of the LNDW data record is the same as that for a LINE mooring line but with three additional
parameters.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
71
81
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------X|
| |LNDW|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(10)T_Max. Maximum Tensi
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(9) Speed. Non-zero positive
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
or negative winch speed (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(8) L_End. Final Length (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(7) L_Beg. Initial Length (F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(6) K_Beg. Initial Stiffness (E10.0)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(5) 2nd Node Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4) 2nd Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3) 1st Node Number (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) 1st Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Compulsory Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
|
(6) K_Beg: stiffness at the beginning of the winch action.

This is equal to EA/L_Beg for the line (E=Youngs' modulus, A = cross sectional area). The stiffness of the
line during the winch action will change as the length changes; i.e. the stiffness during the simulation,
assuming that the length varies from L_Beg to L_End, will be EA/L_Beg to EA/L_End; where EA =
K0*L_Beg.
(7) L_Beg: unstretched length at the beginning of the winching action.
181

This can also be considered as the initial length and will be the length used if there is no winch action.
This value must greater than 0.1m (in S.I. units) or 0.3ft (in Imperial units). Values less than this will be
set to the minimum values.
(8) L_End: unstretched length at the end of the winch action.
If the drum speed is positive (i.e. paying out) this is the maximum length of the line and can at no time
be exceeded. If this length is reached, or L_Beg is greater than L_End, then all winching action will
cease for the rest of the simulation.
If the drum speed is negative (i.e. winding in) this is the minimum length of the line and it can at no
time be less than this. If this length is reached, or L_Beg is less than L_End, all winching action will
cease for the rest of the simulation.
(9) Speed: paying out (positive speed) or winding in (negative) speed.
In mathematical terms the speed is dl/dt, where l is the unstretched length of line and t is time. For
lines which have significant strain() (this precludes steel which yields at about 0.001), the user may
wish to consider the speed of the drum in terms of stretched length.
When winding in, the line wound onto the drum will have the same tension as the free line itself at
any particular time. This means that in order to wind a length of unstretched line the effective speed
must be increased by a factor of (1+). This is done automatically. If the user wishes to simulate a
stretched line speed for winding in, then the speed specified should be input with a speed reduction
factor of 1/(1+), where is the average strain.
When paying out, the adjustment of speed is not straightforward. The elastic energy of the line on the
drum will depend on exactly how the line was wound on the drum originally. This 'energy' stored on
the drum is unknown and is assumed to be zero. i.e. the line on the drum when paying out is assumed
to be unstretched. The effective winch speed, (effectively with only 1 side of the line stretched) is (1+/2).
If the user wishes to simulate a stretched line speed for paying out, then the speed specified should
be input with a reduction factor of 1/(1+/2), where is the average strain.
(10) T_Max:The maximum tension causing the winch to lock.
If at any time the tension exceeds this value, all winching action of the drum will cease until the tension
reduces below this value.
CAVEATS/ASSUMPTIONS
Note
The exact length of the line at any time will depend on the previous motions which have been
encountered by the structure connected to this line. This in turn means that the length of the
line has 'memory'. The implication of this is that in situations where initial or specific positions
are used in Aqwa, the line length cannot be determined and will be assumed to be the initial
length. An example of this is the hot start. A warning message to this effect will be issued in
these cases.
The resolution of switching on and off the drum winch can only be the same as the time step.
This means that the winch drum can only be switched at the beginning or the end of a time
step and not in the middle. In order to conserve energy/momentum in the equations of motion,
the length of the line can only be changed in steps of (time step)(speed of the winch). The
182
The FEND/FLIN Data Records - Fenders

tension resolution will therefore be (stiffness)(time step)(speed). Large stiffnesses or drum speed
should therefore be specified with appropriately small time steps.
Drum winches are not available with PULY lines.
19.12.3. The DWAL Data Record - Drum Winch Additional Length

This data record specifies an additional length of line to be used when calculating the line stiffness. It
has no effect on the distance between the start and end points of the line. The stiffness is calculated
as AE/(additional length + actual length) and therefore the maximum stiffness is AE/(additional length).
This data record must be input before the LNDW data record and each LNDW data record that follows
this data record will have the specified additional length.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------X|
| |DWAL|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_ (2) Additional length required.
|
|
|
|
19.13. The FEND/FLIN Data Records - Fenders

These data records are used to define a fender mooring element between two structures or between
a floating structure and a fixed point. They are included in the total number of moorings in the input
data.
These data records must be preceded by a POLY data record to define the stiffness properties of the
fender (see The POLY Data Record - Polynomial Nonlinear Properties (p. 165)).
19.13.1. The FEND Data Record - Fender properties

2
5 7
31
41
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------|X|
| |FEND|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|XXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
(1) Size (E10.0)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
51
61
71
| |
|
--------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|XXXXXXXXX|
|
| |
|
--------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
(3) Damping coefficient (E10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
(2) Friction coefficient (E10.0)
| |
|
183

| |
| |
|
(1) The size of the fender is the distance between the contact planes at which the fender just touches
both of them.
(2) This is the friction coefficient . The friction force is given by F = R, where R is the normal reaction.
The maximum value of is 0.5. See note below.
(3) Material (or structural) damping coefficient . Damping is modeled as linear material damping, where
the damping coefficient is ()(stiffness). Damping is only applied in the direction perpendicular to the
contact points.
Note
Fender friction works best in situations where the friction force is smaller than other forces
in the same direction. Friction will slow down relative motion between two structures, but
is not suitable for keeping them fixed together - there is no "stiction". When the relative velocity changes sign the friction force must also change sign, but to avoid an instantaneous
change in force (and therefore an instantaneous change in acceleration) a smoothing function
is applied. This means that when the relative velocity is very small the friction force is also
small, and the structures can move relative to each other.
19.13.2. The FLIN Data Record - Fender connections

2
5 7
11
16
21
26
31
36
41
46
51
55
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------------|X|
| |FLIN|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- --------------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2) Type (I5)
| |
|
| |
|_(1) Fender Mooring Code (A4)
| |
|
When an FLIN data record is input, the program assumes that the nonlinear properties correspond to
those specified by the most recently input nonlinear properties (POLY and FEND) data records. Failure
to input these properties before a FLIN data record means that they are undefined and will result in an
error. Note that one nonlinear properties data record may apply to several FLIN data records. This not
184
The LE2D/*RNG Data Records - 2-Dimensional Load Extension Database

only avoids repeating the same properties for several similar fenders, but also enables the user to make
a single change to apply to all those properties.
Parameters on the FLIN data record are:
(1) Mooring line code FLIN indicates a fender whose properties are specified by the preceding POLY
and FEND nonlinear properties data records.
(2) Fender type 1 is a fixed fender, type 2 is a floating fender.
(3) The number of the structure to which the fender is attached. A fixed fender is fixed to a specified
node on this structure. A floating fender is associated with a specified node on this structure.
(4) The 1st node on structure 1 which the fender is fixed to or associated with. For a fixed fender this
is the contact point on structure 1.
(5) 2nd node on structure 1 which defines the direction of the normal to the contact plane on structure
1. The direction from node 1 to node 2 points outwards from the structure, through the fender. This
node is optional for structure 1; if omitted the fender will act uniformly in every direction.
(6) The number of the structure that the fender will make contact with.
(7)-(8) Two nodes on structure 2 which define the contact plane. The plane passes through node 1 with
its normal in the direction from node 1 to node 2. As for structure 1, the direction from node 1 to node
2 points outwards from the structure, through the fender.
19.14. The LE2D/*RNG Data Records - 2-Dimensional Load Extension

Database
N.B. These data records are used to define a set of load extension characteristics of a nonlinear mooring
line in 2 dimensions. In order to use these values, one or more NLIN data records must follow the set.
The maximum number of 2D load/extension characteristics/composite lines is 100. Note also that the
total number of all nonlinear data records (including POLY, etc) may not exceed 1000.
The first data record of the set after the LE2D data record must be a ZRNG data record.
19.14.1. The LE2D Data Record

2
5 7
11
16
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----|X|
| |LE2D|
3|
12|11112|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Warning flags and Symmetry forcing (I5)
| |
|
|
|
(Default = all warnings issued)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Number of X/H/V values (I5)
| |
|
|
(Default = 12, Maximum = 40)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Number of Z coordinates (I5)
| |
|
(Default = 5, Maximum = 5)
| |
|
| |
| |
185

|
(1) The number of values of Z to be input on the ZRNG data record and hence the number of values
on each XRNG, HRNG and VRNG data records.
(2) The number of values XRNG, HRNG and VRNG data records making up the load extension curves.
This data record together with (1) form a database which is represented by a matrix of values, e.g. for
the default size of the database Z(5), X(12,5), H(12,5), V(12,5) would be created.
(Further details may be found in The 2 Dimensional Load Extension Characteristics (p. 187).)
(3) This parameter indicates whether warnings should be issued when the position of the attachment
point of the mooring line relative to the anchor point is outside of the range specified in the ZNRG and
XRNG data records. In addition, warnings about the degree of symmetry of the resulting stiffness matrix
can also be issued, omitted or the matrix can be forced to be symmetrical. This is explained further
below.
The parameter should be thought of as five separate flags which indicate the following:
If flag 1 = 0 or is blank, Warnings are issued when the X position exceeds the range specified
If flag 2 = 0 or is blank, Warnings are issued when the X position is below the range specified
If flag 3 = 0 or is blank, Warnings are issued when the Z position exceeds the range specified
If flag 4 = 0 or is blank, Warnings are issued when the Z position is below the range specified
If flag 5 = 0 or is blank, Warnings are issued when the degree of asymmetry of the stiffness matrix
formed from the database is considered unacceptable.
If any flag value is non-zero then warnings are not issued for that flags conditions.
For the stiffness asymmetry, if the value is greater than unity, symmetry of the stiffness matrix will be
imposed. Clearly in this case no warning asymmetry warning message will be issued. Note that in time
history programs (Aqwa-Naut/Drift) the stiffness matrix is not used except for output of information to
the user.
Stiffness Matrix Asymmetry

The stiffness matrix which can be formed from the 2-D load/extension is evaluated as follows:
K =
DH
-DX
DH
-DZ
H
X
DV
-DX
DV
-DZ
where
H = the horizontal force
V = the vertical force
D/DX, D/DZ = differential operators
186
The LE2D/*RNG Data Records - 2-Dimensional Load Extension Database

The values of DH/DZ and DV/DX for a completely elastic mooring line must be equal. It is the responsibility of the user to input values of z, x, H and V which obey this condition. Failure to do so will result
in a mooring system which will generate or absorb energy - impossible for a real mooring system.
19.14.2. The ZRNG/XRNG/HRNG/VRNG Data Records

2
5 7
11
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |ZRNG|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |XRNG|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |HRNG|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ------------- ------ --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |VRNG|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|_________|_________|_________|_________|
| |
|
|
| |
|
(1)-(5) Up to 5 Values of Z Coordinates
(5F10.0)
| |
|
X Coordinates
(5F10.0)
| |
|
Horizontal forces (5F10.0)
| |
|
Vertical
forces (5F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(5) ZRNG-Values on this data record represent values of Z in the Fixed Reference axis at which the
load extension characteristics are defined on the XRNG, HRNG, VRNG data records. This value is the
expected range of the attachment points in the analysis. These values will normally be the Z distance
between the attachment point on the vessel and the anchor plus or minus the expected amplitude of
motion of the NLIN line using this composite, i.e. if the sea bed and anchor are at -100 and the Z position
of the attachment point when the vessel is in equilibrium is at -10, ZMIN and ZMAX would be 80 and
100 respectively assuming a maximum amplitude of motion of 10.
XRNG-Values on this data record represent values of X (horizontal distance in the fixed reference axis
FRA) between the attachment and anchor position axis at which the horizontal and vertical forces are
defined on the HRNG, VRNG data records.
HRNG/VRNG-Values on these data records represent values of the horizontal/vertical forces at the previously specified X and Z values.
The 2 Dimensional Load Extension Characteristics

This facility enables the user to input the tension/extension curve of any mooring lines with known
characteristics in 2 dimensions. Note that these data records do not define a mooring line per se but
define a property which may be referred to by NLIN data records which follow. Note also that although
a 2-D characteristic has been input, as the structure moves the plane in which the database has been
defined rotates with the attachment point in the FRA.
The mooring line properties defined on this set of data records will apply to all NLIN data records that
follow until another set of nonlinear property data records is input. (Note that SWIR and POLY data records
are also nonlinear property data records.). The difference between this and the other nonlinear property
data records is that this facility requires a GROUP of data records to define the characteristics of a
mooring line.
187

This facility is particularly useful for defining elastic catenaries or composite mooring lines whose
modeling characteristics are not otherwise available in the Aqwa suite. (See also the COMP data record
The COMP/ECAT Data Records - Composite Catenary Mooring Line (p. 168))
Each of the above Z-coordinate may be thought of as the "Values at which a 1 dimensional load/extension
curve for 2 orthogonal forces is specified",
i.e. at Z range = Z value 1:
HORIZONTAL^
*
FORCES |
IN
|
COLUMN 1 |
*
|
|
|
*
|
|
*
|* *
*
|____________________>
X-VALUES IN COLUMN 1
VERTICAL
FORCE
IN
COLUMN 1
^
|
|
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
|*
*
|
|____________________>
VERTICAL
FORCE
IN
COLUMN 2
^
|
|
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
|*
*
|
|____________________>
VERTICAL
FORCE
IN
COULMN 3
^
|
|
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
|
*
| * *
|
|____________________>
i.e. at Z range = Z value 2

HORIZONTAL^
FORCES |
IN
|
COLUMN 2 |
*
|
|
*
|
|
*
|
*
|* * *
|____________________>
i.e. at Z range = Z value 3

HORIZONTAL^
FORCE
|
IN
|
COULMN 3 |
|
*
|
|
*
|
*
|
*
|* * *
|____________________>
If the above graphs represent a complete set of values to define the 2-D load extension characteristics
of a mooring line then the ZRNG data record will contain three values (there is only 1 ZRNG data record
in each set). If the number of values of X, H and V are 7 (as shown above) then the complete set of data
record required to define the 2-D load/extension curve is as follows:
Values of Z, X, H, V
1-Data Record
ZRNG . . . . . . . xxx
xxx
xxx
7-Data Records (3 values on each) XRNG . . . . . . . xxx

7-Data Records (3 values on each) HRNG . . . . . . . xxx
7-Data Records (3 values on each) VRNG . . . . . . . xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
1-Data Record
188
LE2D
(3 values)
7 . . .
The FILE Data Record - Mooring Description
19.15. The PRIC Data Record - Print Initial Condition of Mooring Lines
This data record causes details of the mooring lines to be printed in the initial position at the start of
the analysis.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---- --X|
| |PRIC|
- --- -- ---- --|
|
|
19.16. The FINI Data Record - Mooring Configuration Separator

This facility is used to separate different mooring configurations defined in Data Category 14. The
mooring lines defined before a FINI data record and after the data record will be regarded as different
mooring configurations and will be analyzed separately.
2
5 7
- --- -- ---- -X|
| |FINI|
- --- -- ---- -| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
19.17. The FILE Data Record - Mooring Description

The FILE data record allows the user to specify that a data set normally input in Data Category 14 should
be read from a file. This is particularly useful in parametric studies where the user may have some 100
data files to test a particular mooring configuration. This might include Aqwa-Drift/Fer/ Librium runs.
If the effect of changing, say, the chain size is required for all 100 runs, then a single change can be
made to 1 file, and the runs performed again.
The FILE data record specifies that normal mooring line (Data Category 14) data is to be read from another file, e.g. AQCONF1.MOR (the extension MOR is recommended). The file AQCONF1.MOR will contain
data in identical format to the input in Data Category 14. When all the data in AQCONF1.MOR is read
the program will revert to reading from the .DAT file.
All programs which accept data from Data Category 14 can use the FILE data record.
The format of the FILE data record is as follows:
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- ------------------X|
| |FILE|XXXXXXXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ------------------|
|
|
|
|
|_(1)Name of the file containing mooring data
189

|
|_FILE Data Record Keyword
(1) The name can include the path of the file. If no path is specified, the local directory will be assumed.
19.18. The SWIR Data Record - Steel Wire Nonlinear Properties

The steel wire SWIR facility allows modeling of the nonlinear properties of a new steel wire rope. However
it is possible to model steel wire using linear (LINE) or nonlinear (NLIN) lines.
This data record defines a nonlinear property of a mooring line. In order to use these defined values,
one or more NLIN data records must follow. The maximum number of nonlinear properties that may
be defined is 50.
2
5 7
31
41
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------|X|
| |SWIR|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- -------------------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Asymptotic Offset (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Asymptotic Stiffness (E10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) These fields contain the values of the two constants in the equation defining the tension of the
line as a function of the extension (see below). Values must be specified for both fields.
This facility enables the user to input the physical properties (constants defining the tension/extension
curve) of a steel wire mooring line. Note that this data record does not define any mooring lines having
these properties. This information must be supplied on following NLIN data records.
The mooring line properties defined on the SWIR data record will apply to all NLIN data records that
follow until another nonlinear property data record is input. (Note that POLY is also a nonlinear property
data record.)
Tension in a steel wire mooring line is given by:
T = k (x - d (tanh(x/d)))
where
x = extension of mooring line
k = asymptotic stiffness (constant)
d = asymptotic offset (constant)
The names of the constants k and d arise from the fact that, at large values of extension, tanh(x/d) tends
to unity and the equation tends to the asymptotic form:
T = k (x - d)
190
Tether Additional Data Requirements
19.19. Tether Additional Data Requirements

This section describes the additional data requirements for the input of tether elements for Aqwa-Librium,
Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut (not valid in Aqwa-Fer).
19.19.1. The TELM Data Record - Tether Element

The maximum number of tether elements for all tethers is 180.
The maximum number of tether elements for a single tether is 24.
If an eigenvalue analysis is requested, the maximum number of tether elements per tether is reduced
to 14.
Tether elements must be contiguous; on all but the first TELM data record, the first node input must
be the same as the second node of the previous TELM data record.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----|X|
| |TELM|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4) Geometric Group Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) Material Group Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Node Number 2 (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Node Number 1 (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1)-(2) These are the nodes input in Data Category 1 and define the length of the tether element only.
The first element is considered to have Node 1 attached to the anchor, for installed tethers. It is the
trailing node for towed tethers.
(3) The material group number (input in Data Category 3) for this element. There are two parameters
input for the material properties of tether elements. These are density and Young's Modulus of elasticity,
i.e.
2
5 7
16
21
31
- --- -- --------- ----- ---------- ---------|X|
| |XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- --------- ----- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3) Young's Modulus (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Material Density or Mass (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Material Group Number (I5)
191

|
|
(4) The Geometric Group for this element. Geometric properties for tether elements are the same as for
TUBE elements, except that tether elements cannot be free flooding or have end cuts, i.e. they have
diameter, wall thickness, drag and added mass coefficients specified.
19.19.2. The TSPA/TSPV Data Records - Tether Anchor and Vessel Springs
Only one TSPA and one TSPV data record may be input for each tether.
2
5 7
11
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ... ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TSPA|
1|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ... ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TSPV|
1|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ... ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) 3 Spring stiffnesses (3E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Non-tension element flag (I5)
|
|
|
|
(1) For installed tethers, this should be left blank. For towed tethers, a '1' should be entered in Column
15.
(2) The values of the stiffnesses of the springs at the anchor end should be specified on the TSPA data
record. The stiffnesses of the springs at the vessel end should be specified on the TSPV data record.
For installed tethers, the spring stiffnesses are the inline/vertical stiffness and the two rotational stiffnesses
at the ends of the tether. Default values of 1.0E15 are used, if this data record is omitted. A default
value of 1.0E15 for the inline stiffness is used if the 1st field is left blank or a negative or zero values is
input. For the rotational fields, any value may be entered (except negative values which will be set to
zero).
For towed tethers, the stiffnesses are assumed to represent soft mooring line stiffness and are the three
stiffnesses in the translational directions. Note that the higher the stiffnesses input here, the smaller
the time steps will need to be in Data Category 16. This data record should always be present for towed
tethers.
19.19.3. The TEIG Data Record - Tether Eigensolution

This data record should be input for all preliminary runs.
The TEIG data record request that an eigenvalue analysis of the tether at zero displacement from the
TLA axis system should be performed.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- -----
192

|X|XXX| |TEIG|
|
- --- -- ---- ----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Number of Modes (I5)
|
|
|
|
(1) The number of modes to be output for the pre-processing eigensolution. The total number of modes
available:
= total number of degrees of freedom
= number of nodes * number of degrees of freedom/node
= number of nodes * 4
19.19.4. The TFAT Data Record - Tether Fatigue Parameters (Aqwa-Drift only)
This data record may be omitted, in which case the default values shown below will be used.
2
5 7
11
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---...
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TFAT|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---...
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) 4 Fatigue parameters( 4E10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) The four fatigue parameters are:

1. Reserved (leave blank)
2. Stress concentration factor (default value 1.24)
3. SN Curve intercept coefficient (default value 1.3367E24) (Units are consistent with stress in kN/m2)
4. SN Curve slope m (default value 3.5)
Fatigue life (days) = 1/(damage per day)
The formula used to calculate the fatigue life is

=
=

where
R(i) = stress range (computed from rainflow count of time history stresses)
193

N(i) = number of cycles per day for this stress range (from probability distribution by rainflow count)
SCF = stress concentration factor
m = SN curve slope
A = SN curve intercept coefficient
NBIN = number of bins in the stress probability distribution
19.19.5. The TPSH Data Record - Tether Peak Stress Hours (Aqwa-Drift only)
This data record may be omitted, in which case the default value of 3 hours will be used.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ----|X|XXX| |TPSH|
|
- --- -- ---- ----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Number of Hours (I5)
|
|
|
|
(1) The number of hours for which the expected peak stress is calculated
The extreme values of stress are based on the assumption that stress has a Rayleigh distribution. The
peak stress is given by
where
n = the number of cycles/hour, based on the stress time history calculation of the mean of the number
of positive and negative peaks
19.19.6. The TSLK Data Record - Tether Printing when Slack

This data record should only be input for installed tethers which are expected to go slack.
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TSLK|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Time (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
194

(1) Duration of time for which the user requires listing file output of the tether motions, forces and
stress after the tether goes slack.
This data record controls the listing file time history output for installed tethers. It should be used when
the user ONLY wants tether time history output when the tether goes slack. The TPRV data record in
Data Category 18, which requests listing file output at specified time intervals, should be omitted as it
OVERRIDES this data record.
The user specifies the time for which the time history of tether motion, forces and stresses should be
output to the listing file when the tether goes slack; for example, if 20 secs is input, then printing starts
when the tether goes slack and continues every time step for 20 seconds. It is then switched off until
the tether goes slack again.
This data record does not affect the output to the graphics backing file or statistics post-processing.
19.19.7. The TEGR Data Record - Tether Group Factor

This data record should only be input for installed tethers.
The TEGR data record specifies that a single tether should be considered as a group of tethers.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|XXX| |TEGR|
|
- --- -- ---- ----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Tether group factor (F10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) Number of tethers in this group.

This enables a group of tethers to be calculated as a single tether by the program and has the effect
of multiplying the forces exerted on the vessel by the tether by a specified factor. It has no other effect.
19.19.8. The TCAP Data Record - Tether End Cap Areas

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TCAP|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Vessel Cap Area (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Anchor Cap Area (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
195

(1)-(2)The area which is not subject to external pressure by the water at the anchor and vessel ends.
These values are used to calculate the tether effective/wall tensions.
19.19.9. The TIFL Data Record - Tether Internal Fluid Properties

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TIFL|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Density (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Pressure (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) The internal pressure of the tether

(2) The density of the internal fluid of the tether
These values are used to calculate the tether effective/wall tensions.
19.19.10. The TIMP Data Record - Tether Impact Parameters

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TIFL|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Half Life (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Impact Factors (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) The stress impact factor.

The initial stress caused by tether impact is assumed to be proportional to the velocity of impact. The
stress impact factor is the constant of proportionality, in other words.
initial axial stress = (stress impact factor)(impact velocity)
(2) The half life duration of the impact.
As the shock wave is reflected at the vessel and anchor ends it is assumed that the decay is exponential.
If the half life input above is t2, the axial stress due to the impact at a time t after impact is given by:
196

axial stress = initial axial stress * exp ( -0.69315 t/t2)
19.19.11. The TLOW Data Record - Tether Lower Stop Position

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|XXX| |TLOW|XXXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(1) Lower Stop Position (E10.0)
|
|
|
|
(1) The distance of the lower stop below the anchor. If the end of the tether is below this point, a
warning will be issued. Note that, if the lower stop distance is input as zero, the tether can never be
free hanging.
19.19.12. The TETH Data Record - Tether Vessel and Anchor/Trailing End Position
This data record should be input after the tether has been fully described i.e. all the previous data records
have been input.
For towed tethers this should be the *last* and *only* TETH data record in Data Category 14.
For installed tethers, where in general there is more than one tether, a complete tether description may
be duplicated by inputting a TETH data record immediately following another. In this case, the previous
tether will be duplicated at the positions specified by the structure/node numbers.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----|X|XXX| |TETH|
|
|
0|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(4) Node 2 (I5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(3) Fixed position specification (I5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_(2) Node 1 (I5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1) The number of the structure/vessel to which the tether is attached. This must correspond to one of
the structures defined in Data Category 2. If '1' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in
Data Category 'ELM1'. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category 'ELM2',
etc. Structure number '0' (i.e. a fixed node) is an illegal structure (in this position) and will produce an
error.
197

For towed tethers, the structure number must be 1.
(2) This is the node number of the attachment point at the vessel end of the tether line on the structure
specified (1). The position of this node on the vessel must have been defined in Data Category 1.
(3)-(4) Specify structure number 0 (i.e. fixed in the FRA) and its corresponding node number (4) to define
the anchor/trailing end of the tether. The position of this node (4) must have been defined in Data
Category 1.
19.19.13. The TLAC/TROC/TLAV/TROV Data Records -Tether Constraint Data

Records
The user may specify up to four constraints on an installed tether. The constraints may be fixed:
TLAC - Tether fixed LAteral Constraint
TROC - Tether fixed ROtational Constraint
or attached to the vessel:
TLAV - Tether LAteral Vessel constraint (passes though 'gap' in structure)
TROV - Tether ROtational Vessel constraint (encastre condition on vessel)
The format of the input is as follows:
5 7
11
21
31
---- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- ---XXXX| |TROC|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXX
---- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- ---XXXX| |TROV|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXX
---- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- ---XXXX| |TLAC|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|XXXX
---- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- ---XXXX| |TLAV|XXXXXXXXX|XXXXXXXXX|
0.100|XXXX
---- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- ---|
|
|
|
|
|_(3) Gap between tether and structure
|
|
|
|_(2) Mandatory Data Record Keyword
|
|_(1) Optional 2 letter user identifier
(2) Note that the rotational constraints, TROC and TROV, are rarely used, as this will cause large bending
moments at the attachment points. Weak/zero stiffness spring are normally used (see The TSPA/TSPV
Data Records - Tether Anchor and Vessel Springs (p. 192)).
(3) For a lateral constraint on the vessel, a gap can be specified, representing an opening which is wider
than the tether. It is assumed to be a frictionless circular gap in the structure, vertically below the
tether attachment point. If the total lateral movement relative to the center of the gap is greater than
the gap distance specified, the program will assume that the node at the gap is constrained laterally
by the structure.
As forces on the tether are by definition in the XY plane of the tether axis system (TLA), the reaction
on the structure must be at right angles to the TLA, i.e. for a vertical tether, the reactive force will be
in the horizontal plane of the FRA. For a sloping tether, i.e. when the TLP is offset, there will be a small
198

vertical (in the Z FRA) component equal to the total reaction multiplied by the sine of the slope of the
Z axis of the TLA.
199
200
Chapter 20: Starting Conditions Definition - STRT (Data Category

15)
Data Category 15 is used in all programs in the Aqwa suite, except Aqwa-Line, to input the 'starting
conditions' for the analysis. Although data categories for each type of analysis are similar, they are
documented separately as each requires information appropriate to the type of analysis. This description
of Data Category 15 is appropriate to Aqwa-Fer and Aqwa-Librium only.
The programs Aqwa-Fer and Aqwa-Librium solve equations of motion that are in the frequency domain
or quasi-static respectively. The programs therefore require the initial position of the body/bodies
globally. These initial conditions or initial positions are referred to as starting conditions.
Starting Conditions - Defaults

Aqwa-Librium
The equations to be solved require only the specification of initial positions. These positions are given
for each body and for each of the 6 body degrees of freedom. Default starting conditions will be assumed
by Aqwa-Librium if the user omits any, or all (the latter by entering NONE for the Data Category Keyword)
of the data records in this data category.
The default starting position is the position of the structure(s) as originally defined by the user in Data
Categories 1 to 4. (See Motion Constraints on Structures - CONS (Data Category 12) (p. 127) if constraints
are present.)
Aqwa-Fer
The equations to be solved require the specification of initial positions and articulation reactions (if
there are any articulations in the model). The positions are given for each body and for each of the 6
body degrees of freedom. Default starting conditions will be assumed by Aqwa-Fer if the user omits
any, or all (the latter by entering NONE for the Data Category Keyword) of the data records in this data
category.
The default initial position is the position of the structure(s) as originally defined by the user in Data
Categories 1 to 4.
The default initial articulation reactions are zero. Incorrect articulation reactions can affect the stiffness
matrix and lead to inaccurate results. Therefore it is strongly recommended that the reactions are specified
on the REA* data record, or read in from an EQP file created by Aqwa-Librium.
Starting Conditions with the RDEP Option

If the RDEP option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)) is used with a
filename given on the RESTART data record (e.g., FILE01), then the positions and reactions in the file
201
Starting Conditions Definition - STRT (Data Category 15)

FILE01.EQP will override the default positions and reactions. However, if starting positions or reactions
are defined in Data Category 15 these will in turn override the data in the .EQP file.
Starting Conditions specified in Data Category 15

If the POS*, VEL* or REA* data records are used in Data Category 15 the values on these data records
will override the defaults or the values in the .EQP file. Note that blank fields on these data records
are treated as zero values.
Slow velocity and position are not used in Aqwa-Librium or Fer. If the SLP* or SLV* data records are
used they will be ignored.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|STRT|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
20.3. The POS* Data Record - Starting Positions

* denotes structure number (see (1) below)
See Starting Conditions Definition - STRT (Data Category 15) (p. 201) for a discussion of the interaction
between the RDEP option and the POS* and REA* data records.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |POS1|
|
|
|
|
|...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|-----------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)6 Starting Positions (default as
| |
|
|
|
defined in Data Categories 1-4)(6F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|______(3) Mooring Configuration number (I5) (default =1)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_______(2) Spectrum number (I5) (default=1)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The data record keyword indicates the corresponding structure number for the positions in columns
21-80; for example, enter POS1 for Structure 1, POS2 for Structure 2, .... PO10 for Structure 10.
(2)-(3) This is to indicate which spectrum and mooring configuration the structure position is defined
for, only needed for multiple spectra/mooring configuration cases.
(4)-(9) This is the position of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of the
analysis. The position is defined by three translations and three successive rotations. Angles are in degrees.
202
The REA* Data Record - Initial Articulation Reactions
20.4. The REA* Data Record - Initial Articulation Reactions

* denotes articulation number (see (1) below)
between the RDEP option and the POS* and REA* data records.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------|X|
| |REA1|
|
|
|
|
|...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|-----------------------------------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4)-(9)6 Reactions in Starting Position (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|______(3) Mooring Configuration number (I5) (default =1)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_______(2) Spectrum number (I5) (default=1)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The data record keyword indicates the corresponding articulation number for the positions in columns
21-80; for example, enter REA1 for Articulation 1, REA2 for Articulation 2, .... RE10 for Articulation 10.
(2)-(3) This is to indicate which spectrum and mooring configuration the reaction is defined for, only
needed for multiple spectra/mooring configuration cases. If omitted the same initial reactions will be
used for all spectra and /mooring configurations.
(4)-(9) These are the initial reactions applied by the articulation to the 1st structure on the relevant
DCON data record (The DCON Data Record - Define Constraint Position (p. 129)) in Data Category 12.
The reactions are three forces and three moments. The reactions are applied in the global axis system.
The LAAR (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)) and LSAR (Administration
and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)) options, if used, apply only to output reactions.
203
204
Chapter 21: Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Drift) - STRT (Data

Category 15D)
Note that this chapter has separate sections for analyses at Drift frequency only and those with both
Drift and Wave frequencies.

of Data Category 15 is appropriate to Aqwa-Drift only.
Aqwa-Drift solves the second order differential equations of motion by integrating them to form a timehistory of motions. The program requires the initial conditions in order to begin the integration. These
initial conditions are referred to as starting conditions.
As the differential equation is second order, the solution requires two initial conditions which may be
input by the user. These are the position and velocity at the start of the time-history in all 6 degrees of
freedom. However, default starting conditions will be assumed by Aqwa-Drift if the user omits any, or
all (the latter by entering NONE for the Data Category Keyword) of the data records in this data category.
'Fast', 'Slow' and 'Total' Positions and Velocities

The total motion of a structure in Aqwa-Drift is the sum of its 'slow' drift motion and the 'fast' wave
frequency motion. The program, in general, needs the initial conditions of the structure for both the
fast and slow motions. Also it is important that the structure experiences as small a transient as possible.
This can only be achieved if the program has appropriate values of slow and fast initial conditions. This
is not as complicated as it sounds since the program automatically performs the difficult calculations.
The initial conditions for the slow motion are relatively intuitive since these relate to the general motion
of the structure about its equilibrium position as predicted by Aqwa-Librium. The fast motions, however,
are in response to the wave frequency forces which are randomly phased, so that the user is generally
unable to specify them. In this case, the program automatically computes the correct fast motion from
the information it has concerning the random waves and the response amplitude operators of the
structure.
21.1.1. Analysis Type - Drift only

The default starting slow position is the position of the structure as originally defined by the user in
Data Categories 1 to 4. The default starting slow velocity is zero in all 6 degrees of freedom.
fast position and velocity are not used in a drift frequency analysis. They are assumed to be zero so the
total position and velocity are the same as the slow values.
205
Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Drift) - STRT (Data Category 15D)
Starting Conditions with the RDEP option

filename given on the RESTART data record (e.g FILE01), then the position in the file FILE01.EQP will
override the default slow position. However, if starting positions are defined in Data Category 15 these
will in turn override the data in the .EQP file. The default starting slow velocity is zero in all 6 degrees
of freedom.
The total position and velocity are the same as the slow values.
POS* or VEL* Specified

The POS* (The POS* Data Record - Starting Positions (p. 207)) and VEL* (The VEL* Data Record - Starting
Velocities (p. 208)) data records define the total position and velocity respectively; in a Drift-only analysis
they also define the slow position and velocity. The POS* data record will overwrite any values read in
from an EQP file.
The POS* and VEL* data records will be over-written by the SLP* and SLV* data records, if they exist.
SLP* or SLV* Specified

The SLP* (The SLP* Data Record - Slow Starting Positions (p. 208)) and SLV* (The SLV* Data Record Slow Starting Velocities (p. 209)) data records define the slow position and velocity respectively; in a
Drift-only analysis they also define the total position and velocity. The SLP* and SLV* data records will
overwrite any values read in from an EQP file or from POS* and VEL* data records.
Initial Reactions
It is not possible to specify the initial articulation reactions in Aqwa-Drift. If the positions are correct
the articulation reactions will reach equilibrium in the 1st time step.
21.1.2. Analysis Type - Drift + Wave Frequency (WFRQ on JOB data record)
The default starting slow position is the position of the structure as originally defined by the user in
Data Categories 1 to 4. The default starting slow velocity is zero in all 6 degrees of freedom.
The fast position and velocity are calculated by the program and added to the slow position and velocity
to form the total position and velocity. If any two structures are connected by an articulation this calculation is omitted for those structures, the fast position and velocity are zero and the total position and
velocity are the same as the slow position and velocity.
Starting Conditions with the RDEP option, but NONE in Data Category 15
filename given on the RESTART data record (e.g FILE01), then the position in the file FILE01.EQP will
override the default slow position. However, if the slow position is defined in Data Category 15 this will
in turn override the data in the .EQP file. The default starting slow velocity is zero in all 6 degrees of
freedom.
to form the total position and velocity. If any two structures are connected by an articulation this calcu-
206
The POS* Data Record - Starting Positions

lation is omitted for those structures, the fast position and velocity are zero and the total position and
SLP* or SLV* specified, but not POS* or VEL*

The SLP* (The SLP* Data Record - Slow Starting Positions (p. 208)) and SLV* (The SLV* Data Record Slow Starting Velocities (p. 209)) data records define the slow position and velocity respectively. The
SLP* data record will overwrite any values read in from an EQP file.
to form the total position and velocity. If any two structures are connected by an articulation this calculation is omitted for those structures, the fast position and velocity are zero and the total position and
This is the most usual starting condition for this analysis type
POS* or VEL* specified, but not SLP* or SLV*

The POS* (The POS* Data Record - Starting Positions (p. 207)) and VEL* (The VEL* Data Record - Starting
Velocities (p. 208)) data records define the total position and velocity respectively.
If the RDEP option is used the slow position will be read from the specified EQP file, otherwise the slow
position is the same as the total position. The slow velocity is the same as the total velocity.
Both POS* and SLP* or VEL* and SLV* specified

The slow position is as specified on the SLP* data record. The RDEP option is ignored.
The total position is as specified on the POS* data record.
The slow velocity is as specified on the SLV* data record.
The total velocity is as specified on the VEL* data record.
The initial values of fast position and velocity are calculated from the difference between the slow and
total values.
Initial Reactions
It is not possible to specify the initial articulation reactions in Aqwa-Drift. If the positions are correct

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|STRT|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|

207
Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Drift) - STRT (Data Category 15D)

See General Description (p. 205) for a discussion of the interaction between the RDEP option and the
POS*, VEL*, SLP* and SLV* data records.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- |X|
| |POS1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- | |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2)-(7) This is the total position of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of
the time-history simulation. Angles are in degrees.
21.4. The VEL* Data Record - Starting Velocities

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |VEL1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|--------------------------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Starting Velocities (default zero) (6F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
21-80; for example, enter VEL1 for Structure 1, VEL2 for Structure 2, .... VE10 for Structure 10.
(2)-(7) This is the total velocity of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of
the time-history simulation.
21.5. The SLP* Data Record - Slow Starting Positions

208
The SLV* Data Record - Slow Starting Velocities
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- |X|
| |SLP1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- | |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Starting Slow Positions (default as
| |
|
defined in POS* data record in the same data category)(6F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
21-80; for example, enter SLP1 for Structure 1, SLP2 for Structure 2, .... SP10 for Structure 10.
(2)-(7) This is the slow position of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of
21.6. The SLV* Data Record - Slow Starting Velocities

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |SLV1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
|
...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|--------------------------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Starting Slow Velocities (default zero) (6F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
21-80; for example, enter SLV1 for Structure 1, SLV2 for Structure 2, .... SV10 for Structure 10.
(2)-(7) This is the slow velocity of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of
209
210
Chapter 22: Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Naut) - STRT (Data

Category 15N)
of Data Category 15 is appropriate to Aqwa-Naut only.
Aqwa-Naut solves the second order differential equations of motion by integrating them to form a
time-history. The program therefore requires the initial conditions in order to begin the integration.
These initial conditions are referred to as starting conditions.

As the differential equation is second order, the solution requires two initial conditions which may be
input by the user. These are the position and velocity at the start of the time-history in all 6 degrees of
freedom. However, default starting conditions will be assumed by Aqwa-Naut if the user omits any, or
all (the latter by entering NONE for the Data Category Keyword) of the data records in this data category.
The default starting position is the position of the structure as originally defined by the user in Data
Categories 1 to 4. The default starting velocity is zero in all 6 degrees of freedom.
Starting Conditions with the RDEP option

filename given on the RESTART data record (e.g FILE01), then the positions in the file FILE01.EQP
will override the default positions. However, if starting positions are defined in Data Category 15 these
will in turn override the data in the .EQP file.
The starting velocity will be zero.
Starting Conditions specified in Data Category 15

If the POS* or VEL* data records are used in Data Category 15 the values on these data records will
override the defaults or the values in the .EQP file. Note that blank fields on these data records are
treated as zero values.
Slow velocity and position are not used in Aqwa-Naut. If the SLP* or SLV* data records are used they
will be ignored.
Initial Reactions
It is not possible to specify the initial articulation reactions in Aqwa-Naut. If the positions are correct
211
Starting Conditions Definition (Aqwa-Naut) - STRT (Data Category 15N)

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|STRT|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|

between the RDEP option and the POS* and VEL* data records.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- |X|
| |POS1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- | |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|---------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2)-(7) This is the position of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of the
time-history simulation. Angles are in degrees.
22.4. The VEL* Data Record- Starting Velocities

between the RDEP option and the POS* and VEL* data records.
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----|X|
| |VEL1|XXXXXXXXX|
|
|
|
| ...
- --- -- ---- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- -----| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|--------------------------------------------| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(2)-(7)6 Starting Velocities (default zero)
| |
|
(6F10.0) Data Categories 1-4)(F10.0)
| |
|
| |
| |
212
The VEL* Data Record- Starting Velocities

|
21-80; for example, enter VEL1 for Structure 1, VEL2 for Structure 2, .... VE10 for Structure 10.
(2)-(7) This is the velocity of the structure indicated by the data record keyword (1) at the start of the
time-history simulation.
213
214
Chapter 23: Time Integration Parameters - TINT (Data Category 16)

This data category is used for the two time-history solution programs Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut, to
input the parameters relating to the numerical integration scheme used in the analysis.
As the programs use a timestep technique in the analysis, the cost of the analysis is directly proportional
to the number of timesteps specified, and NOT the length of the time simulation. The user should
therefore be aware of the criteria for the specification of the value of the timestep, which will vary with
the problem being analyzed (see the Aqwa-Drift User Manual and The TIME Data Record - Time Integration Parameters (p. 215)).

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|TINT|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
23.3. The TIME Data Record - Time Integration Parameters

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |TIME|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
(3) Start Time (F10.0) (default zero)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Value of Time-step (F10.0) (default 0.1s)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Time-steps (I10) (default 10)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This number (NT) governs the length of real time simulated, i.e. simulation time is given by (NT-1)
DT (see (2)). The maximum number of time-steps is 1,000,001.
(2) This important parameter (DT) governs the accuracy of the integration of the equations of motion.
This value must be small enough to enable an accurate representation of the highest frequency present
in the motion of a structure. Failure to do so will at best give an inaccurate simulation, and at worst
will cause divergence of the integration scheme and the program will abort.
For pure sinusoidal motion, this value should not be greater than 1/10th of the period of that motion.
For non-sinusoidal motion, the user should consider how accurately a set of discrete points (whose in-
215
Time Integration Parameters - TINT (Data Category 16)

terval is the value of the time-step) would represent the motion of the structure (see the Table of Time
Integration Parameters).
(3) This is the time (ST) at the start of the time-history simulation period, so that the time at the end of
this period is given by ST + (NT - 1) DT. It is normally left blank or set to zero except when starting
the simulation from a previous analysis or when the user wishes to alter the initial phase of frequencydependent parameters.
To change the time-step during the analysis, multiple TIME data records may be used, up to a maximum
of 10. The total number of steps per data record is limited to 1,000,001. It is not possible to vary the
time-step if convolution is used.
General Points Regarding the Time Integration Parameters

The values of all of the time integration parameters are dependent on the type of analysis, but with
experience the user should have no difficulty in estimating their value for any particular problem.
In addition, it should be pointed out that more program automation of these values (e.g. the automatic
variation of time-step based on accuracy of the integration of the equations of motion) has deliberately
been avoided. This is intended to make the user more aware of the approximations necessary when
representing discontinuities in the motion of a structure which are typically present in non-linear simulation analysis.
The following table shows typical values of time integration parameters for a large barge or tanker. This
must not be considered as an accurate guide but an indication of values to be input by the user. If the
user's values are considerably different from these, then it is likely that an error has been made in their
estimation.
Table 23.1: Time Integration Parameters
Program
Number of TimeSteps
Value of Time-Step
(Seconds)
Simulation Time
(Seconds)
Aqwa-Drift (Slow Drift Analysis)
2000
9,995
Aqwa-Drift (With Wave Frequency)
400
0.5
199.5
(8 Second Wave Period)
200
0.40
79.6
(16 Second Wave Period)
200
0.75
149.25
Aqwa-Naut
23.4. The HOTS Data Record - For Hot-Start Run

The HOTS data record allows the user to start a time domain analysis from a particular time in a previous
time history analysis. The program will extract the positions and velocities of the structures at that time
from the previous results and use them as the start positions and velocities for the hot-start run. It is
advisable for the user to create a separate data file for each hot-start run, and consequently, the *.POS
and *.RES files from the previous run should be copied to the new name.
When the HOTS data record is used there may not always be complete continuity between the two
runs.
The convolution calculation in Aqwa has a 120 second "memory", but after a hot restart this memory is
lost.
216
The HOTS Data Record - For Hot-Start Run

In analyses with tethers or cable dynamics, the instantaneous position of the cable or tether is lost.
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |HOTS|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------|
|
|
|_(1)Time Step Number at which Hot-Start run beings (I10)
|
(1) This is the time step number in a previous run at which the user wants the hot-start run to begin.
This is only needed when the start time is not defined in a subsequent TIME record; see (3) below.
When the HOTS data record is defined, the parameters for the TIME data record are now as follows:
2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------|X|
| |TIME|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
_ (3) Start Time of the Hot-Start Run
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Value of Time-step (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Time-steps for The Hot-Start Run(I10)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The number of time steps for this hot-start run only.
(2) This defines the time step size for this hot-start run.
(3) The start time of the hot-start run. This is only needed when the starting time-step number is not
defined on the HOTS card.
217
218
Chapter 24: Aqwa-Librium Iteration Parameters - LMTS (Data

Category 16B)
This data category is used to input parameters which are required for the iteration solution within the
program Aqwa-Librium.
The iteration parameters are used to find the body's position of equilibrium. The progression towards
an equilibrium state may also be controlled via input in this data category.
If the user does not specify particular convergence limits, etc., then the program will use default values.
The appropriate default for each iteration parameter is given in the following section.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|LMTS|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|_(1)Compulsory Data Category Keyword(A4)
|
(1) If NONE is entered for the data category keyword, the program assumes default values.
24.3. The MXNI - Maximum Number of Iterations

2
5 7
16
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |MXNI|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Maximum Number of Iterations in Search of Equilibrium (Default 100)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
| |
|
|
(1) If the user does not specify the maximum number of iterations, then the default value of 100 is used.
24.4. The MMVE Data Record - Maximum Movement Per Iteration

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- |X|
| |MMVE|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- Release 15.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
219
Aqwa-Librium Iteration Parameters - LMTS (Data Category 16B)

| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Maximum Movements Allowed in Each Iteration (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Structure Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2) These are the maximum movements allowed per iteration, for each degree of freedom. Rotations
are in degrees. The default values are shown below.
Default values are: 2.00, 2.00, 0.50, 0.573, 0.573, 1.432
(G=9.81)
To take account of different unit systems Aqwa multiplies the default translation values only by G/9.81,
where G is the value of gravity input in Data Category 5. These defaults will be over-written by any
values input on the MMVE data record, but Aqwa does not apply any additional factors; i.e. the value
on the data record is the value that is used.
24.5. The MERR Data Record - Maximum Error Allowable for Equilibrium
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |MERR|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Maximum Errors for System to
| |
|
|
be Considered in Equilibrium (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(2) These are the maximum errors allowed in the final equilibrium position, for each degree of freedom.
I.e. if the calculated movement is less than this, the structure is assumed to be in equilibrium. Rotations
are in degrees. The default values are shown below.
Default values are: 0.02, 0.02, 0.02, 0.057, 0.057, 0.143
(G=9.81)
To take account of different unit systems Aqwa multiplies the default translation values only by G/9.81,
where G is the value of gravity input in Data Category 5. These defaults will be over-written by any
values input on the MERR data record, but Aqwa does not apply any additional factors; i.e. the value
on the data record is the value that is used.
24.6. The STRP Data Record - Output Stability Report

This data record is used when a stability report is requested from an Aqwa-Librium analysis. The report,
written in AB*.LIS file, gives a list of positions of the structure and the corresponding forces at each
position. The positions of the structure are calculated by the program at a number of rotations about
one or more hinges defined by the user.
220
The STRP Data Record - Output Stability Report

Stability reports are only available for Structure 1 and for hydrostatic forces only. The program will
produce errors if any other forces are present. The LSTF option is not compatible with this facility.
2
5 7
11
16
21
31
41
51
61
71
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |STRP|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|_(5) The Angular Increment
| |
|
|
|
|
|
of the Hinge about
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Global Z (default=1 deg)
| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|_(4)The Angular Increment about
| |
|
|
|
|
the Hinge (default=1 deg)
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(3) The Definition of Hinge Axis Vector (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Number of Rotations of the Hinge (default=1) (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Number of Rotations about the Hinge (default=30) (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This is the number of angular positions (typically roll angles) for which the forces are calculated.
(2) It is possible to calculate stability about a number of axes. Typically rotation about the X-axis will
give roll stability. The stability axis (the hinge) can itself be rotated about the global Z axis, so that pitch
stability, or stability for any intermediate position, can be obtained. This parameter is the number of
positions of the hinge. If only 1 hinge vector is required, the number of rotations of the hinge and angular increment of the hinge can be omitted.
(3) This is the initial direction of the hinge axis defined as a vector in the FRA. For example, for typical
roll stability this would be (1, 0, 0).
(4) This is the increment between the angular positions defined in (1).
(5) This is the increment between the hinge positions defined in (2).
221
222
Chapter 25: Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data

Category 16L)
This data category is used to scale and/or change the geometric or mass characteristics of a single body
or system of bodies. When scaling or changing body characteristics the results are output to the hydrodynamic data-base, and hence over-write the original data-base file. This data category may also be
used to define a new hydrodynamic reference point. This gives the user the fluid forces, etc about a
point other than the center of gravity. This data category may be omitted and NONE entered for the
data category keyword.
Scaling by Length or Mass

The user may scale various hydrodynamic and response parameters either directly by using a length
scale factor, or indirectly by using a mass scale factor. The scaling factors are as follows:
Length Scale Factor = Lengthnew / Lengthold
The user inputs the Length Scale Factor directly in this data category.
Mass Scale Factor = (Massnew/ Massold)^(1/3)
The user inputs the new Mass directly in this data category.
The parameters that are scaled are as follows:
hydrodynamic coefficients and forces
body responses
wave frequencies
water depth
Changes to Mass Distribution and/or Center of Mass

The following changes may be made to a body's mass characteristics:
The user may define new mass inertia values about the body's center of gravity.
The user may define a new position of the body's center of mass.
The new coordinates of the center of gravity must relate to the originally defined position of the body.
The above changes in mass characteristics require a new solution for the body's responses. Also note
that a change in center of gravity in the lateral direction, will cause an originally equilibrated freely
floating body to move away from the original equilibrium position.
223
Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data Category 16L)
New Hydrodynamic Reference Point

If the user requires the hydrodynamic coefficients, fluid forces and body response about a new reference
point then this point may be input in this data category. Note that again the new reference point must
relate to the originally defined position of the body.
Note
The results obtained for the new reference point are not written to the database backing
files.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|GMCH|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|_(1)Compulsory Data Category Keyword(A4)
|
25.3. The SCAL Data Record - Length Scale Factor

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |SCAL|
|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1) Length Scale Factor (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_Number(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The Length Scale Factor is given by:

Length Scale Factor = (new length of structure / old length of structure)
25.4. The MASS Data Record - Mass Scaling Parameter

2
5 7
11
21
31
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |MASS|
|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1) New Mass (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
224
The REFP Data Record - New Hydrodynamic Reference Point

(1) The new mass value is specified directly.
25.5. The INER Data Record - New Inertia Values

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |INER|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1) The new inertia values w.r.t. the CG (6F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The new inertia values are input in the following order:
Ixx, Ixy, Ixz, Iyy, Iyz, Izz
25.6. The NCOG Data Record - New Center of Gravity

This Data Record Has Been Withdrawn
2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |NCOG|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1) The New Center of Gravity (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The new coordinates of the center of gravity are given with respect to the original definition position
of the structure.
25.7. The REFP Data Record - New Hydrodynamic Reference Point

2
5 7
11
21
31
41
51
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------|X|
| |REFP|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------- --------- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(1) The New Hydrodynamic Reference Point (3F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
225
Change Geometric/Mass Characteristics - GMCH (Data Category 16L)

(1) The coordinates of the new hydrodynamic reference point are given with respect to the originally
defined position of the structure.
226
Chapter 26: Hydrodynamic Parameters for Non-Diffracting Elements

- HYDC (Data Category 17)
This data category is used to input two types of parameter which affect non-diffracting elements with
hydrodynamic coefficients. The first is a scale parameter which only affects Morison elements, e.g. TUBE
elements, whose drag coefficient is dependent on Reynolds Number. The second is a simple multiplying
factor for the drag, added mass and slam coefficients affecting all Morison elements.
As the input in this data category only applies to non-diffracting elements, it follows that only those
programs which use these elements will accept this data category. This point is clarified below.
Aqwa-Drift: Accepts all elements and parameters.
Aqwa-Fer: Not yet implemented. Note that Morison drag is a non-linear force which must be linearized
before a frequency domain solution can be applied.
Aqwa-Librium: Accepts all elements. Note that only the drag parameters are relevant, as a steady state
solution has zero ADDED MASS and slam force.
Aqwa-Line: Not yet implemented. At present will only accept diffracting and point mass elements.
Aqwa-Naut: Accepts all elements and parameters.
Note
The default value for the factor multiplying the slam coefficient is zero, as there are no general formulae documented in the literature (see The SLMM Data Record - Slam Multiplying
Factor (p. 230)).
The scale factor is commonly used where the effects of Morison drag on TUBE elements is considered
important (e.g. simulating tests at model scale). The multiplying factor is used for parametric studies
where the effect of the hydrodynamic coefficients is of particular interest.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|HYDC|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
227
Hydrodynamic Parameters for Non-Diffracting Elements - HYDC (Data Category 17)
26.3. The SC1/ Data Record - Scale Factor for Model Test Simulation
If this data record is used the RNDD option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa
Suite (p. 252)) is also needed in the preliminary data category.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |SC1/|
|XXXXX|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Scale Factor (I5) (default implies constant drag coefficients)
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) This scale factor applies to all elements on all structures but in the present version of the program
only affects Morison TUBE elements on those structures.
If this data record is omitted the program assumes that the Reynolds Number is sufficiently large for
the drag coefficient to be considered constant. If this is not a reasonable assumption then this data
record should be input with a value of unity.
The user should read the following sections before using this facility.
Effect of the Scale Factor on Reynolds Number

Experimental evidence shows that the Reynolds Number is not a simple function of the velocity and
diameter for cylinders with arbitrary orientation to the direction of the fluid flow. However, considerable
improvement in agreement with model tests has been obtained by using the Scale Factor to obtain a
local Reynolds Number and interpolating from classic experimental results,
where
Local Reynolds Number = (U.D/)/(Scale Factor3/2)
U = Local velocity transverse to the axis of the TUBE
D = The diameter of the TUBE
= Kinematic viscosity of water
Effect of the Scale Factor on Hydrodynamic Coefficients

If this data record is omitted then the drag coefficients used are those input in Data Category 4 by the
user, or default coefficients assumed by the program if the user inputs zero. However, when this data
record is input, these coefficients for all Morison tube elements on all structures are ignored. The program
will instead interpolate coefficients from the Wieselburger graph of drag coefficient versus Reynolds
Number (as shown below) for a smooth cylinder, where the Reynolds number is calculated in the
manner shown above.
Drag Coefficient Variation with Reynolds Number
228
The DRGM/ADMM Data Record - Drag/Added Mass Multiplying Factor

Note that the following curve is only used when the SC1/ data record is defined in data category 17
and is only for TUBE elements in a time domain analysis, mainly for transient motions. The instantaneous
relative flow velocity normal to the tube is used in the calculation of the Reynolds Number Re.
26.4. The DRGM/ADMM Data Record - Drag/Added Mass Multiplying

Factor
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |DRGM|
|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |ADMM|
|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2)Value of Multiplying Factor (Default 1.0) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Structure Number (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The structure number must correspond to one of the structures defined in Data Category 2. If '1' is
input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, etc (see note 1).
(2) This value is the multiplying factor for all drag/added mass coefficients for non-diffracting elements
on the structure specified (1).
Note
The multiplying factors relate to drag/added mass coefficients for the structure specified on
this data record only. The program does NOT multiply the values in the Geometric Properties
229
Hydrodynamic Parameters for Non-Diffracting Elements - HYDC (Data Category 17)

Table (Table 2.4.1) by this factor. It uses the original values in the table and THEN multiplies
them by this factor.
This factor applies to the drag/added mass coefficients input in Data Category 4 by the user,
or the Data Category 4 default coefficients assumed by the program if the user inputs zero.
26.5. The SLMM Data Record - Slam Multiplying Factor

2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------|X|
| |SLMM|
|XXXXX|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- --------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) slam Multiplying Factor (Default zero) (F10.0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The structure number must correspond to one of the structures defined in Data Category 2; in other
words, if '1' is input then this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is
input then this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, etc. Note that this
multiplying factor relates to slam coefficient for the structure specified on this data record only.
(2) This value is the multiplying factor for all slam coefficients for MORISON elements on the structure
specified (1).
Effect of the Multiplying Factor on Slam Coefficients

If this data record is not input, the default multiplying factor of zero, is assumed by the program. This
means that all the slam forces, which only exist for Morison elements, are automatically zero.
The effect of a non-zero multiplying factor is primarily to bring the slam forces into effect, i.e. the values
of the slam coefficients for each element are simply multiplied by this factor.
Slam Coefficients and the Time-Step

The value of the slam coefficient, for each element, is based on the premise that the slam force is equal
to the rate of change of the added mass tensor (with time) multiplied by the velocity.
This means that the time-step (specified in Data Category 16) must be sufficiently small to accurately
represent the added mass at each stage of immersion/emergence. In general this will depend on the
geometry of each element and its orientation to the water surface.
In practice, this severe restriction of the size of the time-step means that this facility is only used when
specifically investigating the effects of slam forces on individual elements during critical stages of the
simulation period, as the momentum change due to slam forces are normally small and have little effect
on the overall motion of the structure.
230
Chapter 27: Additional File Output - PROP (Data Category 18)

This Data Category is used to input requests for additional listing file output where specific information
is required to define its extent and format. It is supplementary to the output obtained from the general
printing requests of the Options List in the Preliminary Data Category, as the requests in this Data Category are necessarily more detailed. The requests for additional output fall into the following main
categories.
Output of Nodal Positions/Motions

This output is related to positions and/or motions of nodes on a structure which are of particular interest
to the user (e.g. a helicopter deck, mooring line attachment points, or crane tip). Additional information
at these positions (a maximum of 35) is obtained by simply specifying the node number (see Geometric
Properties - GEOM (Data Category 4) (p. 65)) of those nodes in this data category. The difference
between the positions/motions on two different structures or a structure and any fixed node may also
be obtained.
Output of Positions/Motions and Forces at the CG

This gives more information about the positions/motions and the individual forces in the equations
governing the position of the center of gravity of a structure at any stage in the analysis.
Please note that the program will output default information essential to the analysis automatically.
This facility is available in order that the user may request additional information to:
Simply clarify results obtained
Obtain a deeper understanding of the results
Find out reasons for unexpected results
Detect errors in the modeling
The user should be aware of the information applicable to a particular analysis, as (Introduction (p. 1))
explains this in detail. However, the user can request all information to be output, and no errors will
occur if a request is encountered for information which is not available for the particular analysis. In
the event that the information requested is not available, the program will inform the user but will not
produce an error message.
Note
This data category is optional. Enter NONE if no additional information is required.
231
Additional File Output - PROP (Data Category 18)

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|PROP|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
27.3. The NODE Data Record - Nodal Position for Listing file Output
Maximum of the total number of NODE data records that may be input is 35.
2
5 7
11
16
21
26
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----|X|
| |NODE|
|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
input then this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input then this
will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, etc. As the NODE data record is a request
for output of the position/motion of the node number specified (2), structure number '0' (i.e. a fixed
node) is illegal in this field and will produce an error, since zero structure indicates a fixed node.
(2) This is the node number whose position/motions are requested during the analysis. The position of
this node on the structure (1) must be defined in Data Category 1.
Note that these motions are with respect to the position defined by (3) and (4).
(3)-(4) This structure number and its corresponding node number (4) define the reference point for the
positions/motions defined by parameters (1) and (2).
Both these fields may be left blank, in which case the program will assume that the output at the position defined by (1) and (2) is with respect to the origin of the Fixed Reference Axes, i.e. the ABSOLUTE
values.
If '0' is input as the structure number (3), together with a node number (4), the program will recognize
that this node number (4) references the fixed position as defined in Data Category 1 in the Fixed Reference Axis System (FRA). Note that a non-zero structure number (3) must be followed by a valid node
number (4) on that structure.
Information Output at Nodal Positions

The input of the NODE data record is designed to enable the user to request the positions/motions of
any point on a structure with respect to any other point, whether on a structure or fixed in space (i.e.
232
The PCGP Data Record - Print Center of Gravity Parameters

the difference between the positions/motions of two points). For each NODE data record, the program
will output the following:
|---------------------------------------------------------|
|
|The difference between |
|------------+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
| AQWA-LINE |The RAOs of the NODAL POSITIONS specified. |
|
|Note that AQWA-LINE must be run for stages |
|
|1 to 5, and the NRNM option must also be
|
|
|used.
|
|------------+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
| AQWA-DRIFT |The positions/velocities/accelerations of
|
|
|the NODES at each step in the time-history |
|
|
|
|------------+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
| AQWA-FER |The RAOs and significant motion of the
|
|
|NODAL POSITIONS specified.
|
|
|
|
|------------+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|AQWA-LIBRIUM|The positions of the specified NODES at
|
|
|each static equilibrium position found.
|
|
|
|
|------------+--------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
| AQWA-NAUT |The positions/velocities/accelerations of
|
|
|the NODES at each step in the time-history |
|
|
|
|---------------------------------------------------------|
27.4. The ALLM Data Record - All Motions

2
5 7
- --- -- ---|X|
| |ALLM|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
The ALLM data record enables the user to expand or limit the information output associated with the
positions on the NODE data record. The default information, at these positions specified (where the
output format is freedom dependent), is displacement only in the X, Y, and Z translational freedoms.
Input of this data record, which is optional, has the following effect:
ALLM expands the output associated with the positions specified on all NODE data records to include
velocity and acceleration as well as displacement. When this information is not available this data record
has no function and is ignored.
27.5. The PCGP Data Record - Print Center of Gravity Parameters

Please note that this optional facility has not yet been implemented.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -|X|
| |PCGP|
|XXXXX|
|
|
|
| ...
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- --
233

| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|-------------------------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Up to 12 Parameter Numbers (12I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2 etc.
(2) Not yet implemented.
Information Output at Center of Gravity

A general classification of additional information available for output by each program is as follows:
Aqwa-Drift: The position/velocity/acceleration and each individual force in the equation of motion at
each step in the time-history.
Aqwa-Fer: Wave spectrum values, force spectrum values and their significant values.
Aqwa-Librium: The individual forces acting on the structure at each equilibrium position found (static
equilibrium). Tabulated values of dynamic stability boundaries (dynamic stability).
Aqwa-Naut: The position/velocity/acceleration and each individual force in the equation of motion at
each step in the time-history.
27.6. The PREV Data Record - Print Every nth Timestep

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |PREV|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1)Timestep increment(I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The timestep increment determines how often the full printout of positions and forces is printed to
the output listing file. For example, if the timestep increment was five then the printout would contain
information on each structure at timesteps 1,6,11,16 etc. This facility can be used to limit the size of
the printout to a manageable size for long simulations.
Note that recording of positions and forces in the graphics file is independent of the parameter on this
data record. See the GREV data record for more information.
234
The PRNT/NOPR Data Record - Print/No Print Parameters Values
27.7. The PRNT/NOPR Data Record - Print/No Print Parameters Values

These data records are used to change the list of variables to be output on the listing file and on
backing file for graphics post processing. Note that they are not applicable to Aqwa-Line and AqwaFer. The default selection of parameters to be printed for all possible types of Aqwa-Drift/Librium/Naut
analysis is shown in the table below.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----|X|
| |PRNT|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----|X|
| |NOPR|
|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|_(4) Articulation Number (I5)
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(3) Parameter Number (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_(1)Compulsory Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
|
(1) PRNT causes the specified parameter to be added to the list of output. NOPR causes it to be removed
from the list.
input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, etc.
(3) The parameter number refers to a type of output as shown in the list below. If the parameter number
is omitted all the parameters for the specified structure will be output (PRNT) or omitted (NOPR).
(4) For articulation reactions, the 3rd number on the data record is the number of the articulation (150) for which reactions are required.
The FROUDE-KRYLOV and DIFFRACTION forces are sub-divided differently for Aqwa-Drift and Naut, as
shown in the table below.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| PARAMETER (#)
|
AQWA-DRIFT
|
AQWA-NAUT
|
|---------------------------------------------------------|------------------------|
| DIFFRACTION (16) | Diffraction and Froude-Krylov force | Diffraction force on
|
|
| on diffracting panels
| diffracting panels
|
|
|
|
|
| FROUDE-KRYLOV (20)| Froude-Krylov force on Morison
| Froude-Krylov force on |
|
| elements only
| all elements
|
|
|
|
|
| WAVE INERTIA (23) | Diffraction force on
| Diffraction force on
|
|
| Morison elements
| Morison elements
|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| FULL LIST OF AVAILABLE

| AQWA-DRIFT DEFAULT FOR | AQWA-DRIFT DEFAULT FOR |
|
PARAMETERS
| DRIFT MOTION ONLY
| PLUS W/FREQUENCY MOTION |
|--------------------------|-------------------------|-------------------------|
| 1. POSITION
| 1. POSITION
| 1. POSITION
|
| 2. VELOCITY
| 2. VELOCITY
| 2. VELOCITY
|
| 3. ACCELERATION
| 3. ACCELERATION
| 3. ACCELERATION
|
235

| 4. RAO BASED POSITION
|
|
| 5. RAO BASED VELOCITY
|
|
| 6. RAO BASED ACCEL
|
|
|
| 7. WAVE FREQ POSITION
|
|
| 8. WAVE FREQ VELOCITY
|
|
| 9. WAVE FREQ ACCEL
|
|
|10. SLOW POSITION
|
|1O. SLOW POSITION
|
|11. SLOW VELOCITY
|
|11. SLOW VELOCITY
|
|12. SLOW ACCEL
|
|12. SLOW ACCEL
|
|13. SLOW YAW
|
|
|
|14. MOORING
|14. MOORING
|14. MOORING
|
|15. GYROSCOPIC
|
|
|
|16. DIFFRACTION
|
|16. DIFFRACTION
|
|17. LINEAR DAMPING
|17. LINEAR DAMPING
|17. LINEAR DAMPING
|
|18. MORISON DRAG
|
|
|
|19. DRIFT
|19. DRIFT
|19. DRIFT
|
|2O. FROUDE KRYLOV
|
|
SEE NOTE ABOVE
|
|21. GRAVITY
|21. GRAVITY
|21. GRAVITY
|
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|
|23. WAVE INERTIA
|
|
|
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|
|25. WIND
|25. WIND
|25. WIND
|
|26. SLAM
|
|
|
|27. THRUSTER
|27. THRUSTER
|27. THRUSTER
|
|28. YAW DRAG
|28. YAW DRAG
|28. YAW DRAG
|
|29. SLENDER BODY FORCES
|
|
|
|3O. ERROR PER TIMESTEP
|
|31. TOTAL REACTION FORCE |31. TOTAL REACTION FORCE |31. TOTAL REACTION FORCE |
|33. L/WAVE DRIFT DAMPING |33. L/WAVE DRIFT DAMPING |33. L/WAVE DRIFT DAMPING |
|34. EXTERNAL FORCE
|
|
|
|35. RADIATION FORCE
|
DEFAULT WITH CONV OPTION, ZERO WITHOUT
|
|36. FLUID MOMENTUM
|
|
|
|38. FLUID GYROSCOPIC FORCE|
|
|
|39. ADD STRUCT STIFF FORCE|
|
|
|47. ARTICULATION REACTION |
SEE (3) ABOVE
|
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| FULL LIST OF AVAILABLE

| AQWA-LIBRIUM DEFAULTS | AQWA-NAUT DEFAULTS
|
|
PARAMETERS
|
|
|
|--------------------------|-------------------------|-------------------------|
| 1. POSITION
| 1. POSITION
| 1. POSITION
|
| 2. VELOCITY
|
| 2. VELOCITY
|
| 3. ACCELERATION
|
| 3. ACCELERATION
|
|
|
|
|
| 6. RAO BASED ACCEL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|1O. SLOW POSITION
|
|
|
|11. SLOW VELOCITY
|
|
|
|12. SLOW ACCEL
|
|
|
|13. SLOW YAW
|
|
|
|14. MOORING
|14. MOORING
|14. MOORING
|
|15. GYROSCOPIC
|
|
|
|16. DIFFRACTION
|
|16. DIFFRACTION
|
|17. LINEAR DAMPING
|
|17. LINEAR DAMPING
|
|18. MORISON DRAG
|
|18. MORISON DRAG
|
|19. DRIFT
|19. DRIFT
|
|
|2O. FROUDE KRYLOV
|
|20. FROUDE-KRYLOV
|
|21. GRAVITY
|21. GRAVITY
|21. GRAVITY
|
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|22. CURRENT DRAG
|
|23. WAVE INERTIA
|
|
|
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|24. HYDROSTATIC
|
|25. WIND
|25. WIND
|25. WIND
|
|26. SLAM
|
|
|
|27. THRUSTER
|27. THRUSTER
|
|
|28. YAW DRAG
|
|
|
|29. SLENDER BODY FORCES
|
|
|
236
The ZRON/ZROF Data Records - Print Z Coordinate Relative to Wave Surface ON/OFF
|
|
|31. TOTAL REACTION FORCE |
|31. TOTAL REACTION FORCE |
|34. EXTERNAL FORCE
|
|
|
|35. RADIATION FORCE
|
|
|
|36. FLUID MOMENTUM
|
|
|
|38. FLUID GYROSCOPIC FORCE|
|
|
|39. ADD STRUCT STIFF FORCE|
|
|
|47. ARTICULATION REACTION |
SEE (3) ABOVE
|
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|5O. TOTAL FORCE
|
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is the full list of output parameters for Aqwa-Librium, Drift and Naut. Further output can be requested
using additional data records in Data Category 18.
27.8. The PTEN Data Record - Print Cable Tensions

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |PTEN|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The structure number indicates that the tensions in all cables, catenaries and hawsers attached to
this defined structure are to be printed in the listing file (how often is governed by the PREV data record)
and written to backing file for plotting in the AGS.
27.9.The ZRON/ZROF Data Records - Print Z Coordinate Relative to Wave

Surface ON/OFF
The ZRON and ZROF data records enable the user to output the position of one or more nodes relative
to the undiffracted wave surface, with all other nodes output as normal values. The data record has no
parameters and consists only of the data record keyword, for example:
2 5 7
11
- --- -- ---|X|
| |ZRON|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_ZRON or ZROF Data Record Keyword
| |
|
Note
The ZRON and ZROF data records act as switches during the input of the NODE data records
and have the function of switching the Z relative to the wave surface option on and off.
The ZRWS data record is global, and may be input anywhere in Data Category 18, these data
records therefore replace the existing ZRWS data record when only some nodes with Z relative
237

to the wave surface are required. The use of the ZRWS data record with either the ZRON or
ZROF will cause an error.
The simplest usage would be input all nodes which are NOT required to be output with Z relative to the wave surface and then to use the ZRON data record before inputting the remainder
of the nodes which are required to have Z relative to the wave surface.
27.10. The ZRWS Data Record - Print Z Coordinate Relative to Wave Surface
This data record is used to output the relative vertical distance from the undiffracted wave surface to
a node defined in a NODE data record. All nodes defined in NODE data records in Data Category 18
will be affected except those for relative distances between two nodes.
2 5
7
11
- --- -- ---|X|
| |ZRWS|
- --- -- ---| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|_Data Record Keyword (A4)
| |
|
27.11. The PPRV Data Record - Print POS Every nth Timestep
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |PPRV|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The timestep increment determines how often the program will print positions and velocities etc
to the output *.POS file. For example, if the timestep increment was five then the printout would
contain information on each structure at timesteps 1,6,11,16 etc. Note that this data record only affects
the output in the *.POS file.
This facility can be used to limit the number of position/velocity output within the given period of time,
which is particularly useful in creating an animation (sequence file) without having to have one picture
for each time step.
27.12. The GREV Data Record - Graphics Output Every nth Timestep
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |GREV|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
238
The PMST Data Record - Print Mooring Section Tensions

| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The timestep increment determines how often the full graphics and plotting results are output. For
example, if the timestep increment was five then the backing files would contain information on each
structure at timesteps 1,6,11,16 etc.
This facility can be used to limit the size of the printout to a manageable size for long simulations.
In order to limit the size of the files the default maximum number of timesteps on the .PLT file is
10,000. If the GREV data record is not used the program will calculate a timestep increment such that
the number of timesteps does not exceed 10,000. For example, if a run has 20,000 timesteps and it is
required to plot every step, a data record "GREV 1" is required. If this is not included, the .PLT file will
contain results for every 2nd timestep.
The absolute maximum number of timesteps on the .PLT file is 100,000.
27.13. The PRMD Data Record - Print Mooring Drag

This data record causes the drag force on all tethers and dynamic mooring lines to be printed to the
listing file, for cable dynamics analyses in Aqwa-Librium, Drift and Naut.
In Drift and Naut the frequency of printing is governed by the PREV data record.
In Librium the PBIS option is also required.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |PRMD|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
27.14. The PMST Data Record - Print Mooring Section Tensions

This data record causes the tensions between sections of dynamic mooring lines to be output. The
frequency of printing is defined by the PREV (The PREV Data Record - Print Every nth Timestep (p. 234))
and GREV (The GREV Data Record - Graphics Output Every nth Timestep (p. 238)) data records respectively.
This is only applicable to cable dynamics analyses. The behavior for each program is as follows:
Aqwa-Librium: Tensions written to .LIS file only. The PBIS option (Printing Options for Output of Calculated Parameters (p. 250)) must also be used.
Aqwa-Fer: Significant tensions written to .LIS file only. If the PRTS option (Printing Options for Output
of Calculated Parameters (p. 250)) is also used, response spectra will also be printed.
Aqwa-Drift and Naut: Written to .LIS and .PLT files.
239
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |PMST|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
27.15. The SSPC Data Record - Print Sub-Spectrum Response

This printing option is applicable in Aqwa-Fer only.
This data record causes the RAOs and transfer function matrix for a specified sub-spectrum to be output
in the .LIS and .PLT files as appropriate. The default is that the main sub-spectrum is used. The main
sub-spectrum is the one that has the highest significant wave height.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |SSPC|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Sub-Spectrum number (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) If this number is '0', blank or a number greater than the number of spectra in the group, the main
sub-spectrum number of each wave spectral group is used.
27.16. Tether Additional Data Requirements

This section describes the additional data requirements for the printing, graphics, and statistics postprocessing of tether elements for Aqwa-Librium, Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa-Naut (not valid in Aqwa-Fer).
For a full description of Data Category 18, see Additional File Output - PROP (Data Category 18) (p. 231).
A summary of the data record input with parameters required is shown below. An * indicates data required.
-------------------------------------------------Data Record Description
Integer (I5)
-------------------------------------------------Start Column
11
-------------------------------------------------AQWA-DRIFT/NAUT
TPRV - Tether L/Printer Printing Interval *
TGRV - Tether Graphics/Statistics Interval *
AQWA-DRIFT Only
TSTS - Start timestep for statistics
*
TSTF - Finish timestep for statistics
*
--------------------------------------------------
240
27.16.1. The TPRV Data Record - Tether Printing Interval

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |TPRV|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Number of steps (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) Enter a non-zero integer 'N' where listing file time history output for tethers is required every 'N'
timestep.
27.16.2. The TGRV Data Record - Tether Graphics/Statistics Interval

2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |TGRV|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Number of steps (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) Enter a non-zero integer 'N' where graphics output and statistics post-processing for tethers is required
every 'N' timesteps.
27.16.3. The TSTS/TSTF Data Record - Tether Start/Finish Timesteps for Statistics
Input for Aqwa-Drift only.
If these data records are not input tether statistics post-processing will be on all records specified by
the TGRV Data Record.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |TSTS|
|
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |TSTF|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Start/Finish Timestep (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
241

(1) Enter the timestep at which the tether statistics post processing should start (Default =1) on the
TSTS data record and the timestep at which the tether statistics post processing should finish (Default
= last step) on the TSTF data record.
242
Chapter 28: Element and Nodal Loads - ENLD (Data Category 21)
This data category is used to input the request for output of loads on Morison elements. At present,
this is only available for TUBE elements in Aqwa-Drift and Aqwa.
The loads are output in the form of loads at the nodes joining each element. The user should input
"RESTART 6 6" on the RESTART data record in Data Category 0. The *.RES file and *.POS file from a preceeding Drift or Naut run (stages 4 to 5) should be copied before this run can be performed.
There are two basic forms of nodal load output. The first is for space frames where all elements are assumed encastre-encastre and more than two elements can be joined at a single node. The second is
for riser-type structures, where riser geometry is assumed and, by definition, only two tube elements
can join at a node. In addition, there are rules concerning the element description, which the user must
be aware of in order to obtain the correct riser-type format (see The RISR Data Record - Nodal Load
Output for a Riser Structure (p. 244)).
The user should note that the post-processing Stage 6 graphics output overwrites any previous graphics
output. This means that if the user wishes to keep the output from Stage 5, then Stage 6 post-processing
must be carried out as a separate run.

5
11
---- -- ---- ---|XXXX| |XXXX|ENLD|
---- -- ---- ---|
|
|
|
28.3.The ISEL and LSEL Data Records - Element/Nodal Load Record Selection
These two data records perform the same function, however the LSEL data record allows input of timestep numbers with more than 5 digits.
2
5 7
11
16
- --- -- ---- ----- ----|X|
| |ISEL|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ----- ----| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Terminal Record for output (I5)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Initial Record for output (I5)
| |
|
| |
| |
243
Element and Nodal Loads - ENLD (Data Category 21)

|
2
5 7
11
21
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------|X|
| |LSEL|
|
|
- --- -- ---- ---------- ---------| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|_(2) Terminal Record for output (I10)
| |
|
|
| |
|
|_(1) Initial Record for output (I10)
| |
|
| |
| |
|
(1) The initial record is the first record (starting time step number) that the user wishes to include in
the output and statistical post-processing of the nodal loads.
(2) The terminal record is the last record (finishing time step number) that the user wishes to include
in the output and statistical post-processing of the nodal loads. Thus the total number of records for
post-pressing is Terminal-Initial+1.
28.4. The RISR Data Record - Nodal Load Output for a Riser Structure
The riser data record specifies that inter-element forces are to be calculated assuming that a riser-type
structure has been defined.
When this card is input, the program makes the following assumptions:
Only tube elements are used to describe the riser in Data Category 2.
The first node of the first tube describing the riser is the node at the seabed end. The first node of all the
other elements must be the second node of the previous element.
If there is a connection to a fixed point this must be at the seabed end of the riser.
2
5 7
11
- --- -- ---- ----|X|
| |RISR|
|
- --- -- ---- ----| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
| |
|
input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM1. If '2' is input, this will correspond to the structure defined in Data Category ELM2, etc.
28.5. The TUBE Local Axes

The local axes used for output of element loads from Stage 6 are defined as follows:
244
The TUBE Local Axes

Local X-axis - along the TUBE axis from Node #1 to Node #2
Local Y-axis - perpendicular to the local X-axis, in the global XY plane
Local Z-axis - orthogonal to the local X- and Y-axes with vertical component in the positive
global Z-direction
For the special case of a vertical tube:
Local X-axis - along the TUBE axis from Node #1 to Node #2
Local Y-axis - forms a right-handed set with local X- and Z-axes
Local Z-axis - in the negative global X-direction
The local axis vectors are output in the .LIS file.
245
246
Chapter 29: Options for Use in Running Aqwa Programs

There are 3 types of options that can be used to control an Aqwa analysis.
Command line options. These can be used when running from a command prompt.
Job options. These are input on the JOB data record and control the type of analysis carried out.
Program options. These are input on the OPTIONS data record in the preliminary data category.
29.1. Command Line Options

Command line options can be specified on the command line when running Aqwa from a command
prompt. They are preceded by a forward slash, for example:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\aqwa\bin\<platform>\aqwa.exe /nowind altest
would run the data file ALTEST.DAT using the option NOWIND.
At present there are only two command line options available.
/NOWIND - No Windows
This option automatically closes all windows that may be opened during a run. This means that no response is required from the user at the end of a run.
/STD - Use Command File
This option instructs Aqwa to accept commands from an Aqwa command file. For compatibility with
previous versions of Aqwa this option (only) may be entered without the leading forward slash.
29.2. Job Type Options

Each program has more than one type of possible analysis. These options are used on the JOB data
record to indicate which type is required. If no option is input then the default analysis type will be
used. These defaults and the optional analysis types are listed below. See also the JOB data record (The
JOB Data Record (p. 33)).
Aqwa-Drift Default - Drift frequency motions only
Option 1 - WFRQ - Drift frequency and wave frequency motions
Aqwa-Fer Default - Drift frequency and wave frequency motions
Option 1 - DRFT - Drift frequency motions only
Option 2 - WFRQ - Wave frequency motions only
Aqwa-Line Default - Radiation/Diffraction analysis
Option 1 - FIXD - All structures fixed
247
Options for Use in Running Aqwa Programs

Aqwa-Librium Default - Static and dynamic stability
Option 1 - STAT - Static stability only
Option 2 - DYNA - Dynamic stability only
Aqwa-Naut Default - Time history regular wave response
Option 1 - IRRE - Time history analysis in irregular waves. This applies to both diffracting structures
(when convolution is used) and Morison structures. Note that in Aqwa-Naut, wave drift force is not included in either regular or irregular waves.
29.3. Program Options for Use in Aqwa Program Suite

The options in this section may be used when running the indicated programs within the Aqwa suite.
They should appear on the OPTIONS data record (The OPTIONS Data Record (p. 34)) in the Administration
Data Category 0.
The options are valid for more than one program in the Aqwa suite and the applicability is indicated
by a string of characters shown in parentheses at the beginning of the description of each option, using
the following code:
A = All programs
B = Aqwa-Librium
D = Aqwa-Drift
F = Aqwa-Fer
L = Aqwa-Line
N = Aqwa-Naut
For example, the string (BDL) at the beginning of an option description means that the option is valid
for Aqwa-Librium/Drift/Line
Since many options are related to printing of output on the listing file, these are listed in separate
sections.
29.3.1. Printing of the Expanded Input Data List for each Data Category
By default, the printing of the expanded input data list for each data category is output to the listing
file at the end of the three data record image input Stages (1, 2, 4). Default output is therefore
For a run of Stages 1 to 5 - Output of expanded data list for Data Categories 1 to 18
For a run of Stages 3 to 5 - No output
For a run of Stage 5 - No output
248
Program Options for Use in Aqwa Program Suite

PRDL - Print Data List from Backing File
When a restart is performed, by default, the expanded data list is NOT output for the previous stages,
which have already been performed. This option requests that the expanded data list for all data categories
for previous stages be printed. This option is normally used to confirm that the correct backing files
have been assigned for a particular analysis.
NODL - No Data List
Switching of Output of All Data Categories

The user may also switch off all output of expanded data by using the NODL option. Note that
output involving calculations, for example calculation of the mass and inertia of the structure, will
still be output.
Switching of Output of a Single Data Category

The user may switch the output flag of a single data category by including the name of the data
category keyword in the options list. The function will depend on whether the NODL option is
present or not:
If the NODL option is not present in the options list, the expanded data list for that data category will
be switched off.
If the NODL option is present in the options list, the expanded data list for that data category will be
switched ON again.
For example, the user may switch off the output for one or more data categories by including the
data category keyword(s) and not using the NODL option or the user may switch off all but the
output for one or more data categories by including the data category keyword(s) and the NODL
option.
As the data category keyword may be dependent on the structure number, the data category
keywords used in the options list are as follows:
Data Category 1 - COOR
Data Category 2 - ELEM
Data Category 3 - MATE
Data Category 4 - GEOM
Data Category 5 - GLOB
Data Category 6 - FDRN
Data Category 7 - WFSN
Data Category 8 - DRCN
Data Category 9 - DRMN
Data Category 10 - HLDN
Data Category 11 - ENVR
249

Data Category 12 - CONS
Data Category 13 - SPEC
Data Category 13N- WAVE
Data Category 14 - MOOR
Data Category 15 - STRT
Data Category 15D- STRT
Data Category 15N- STRT
Data Category 16 - TINT
Data Category 16B- LMTS
Data Category 16L- GMCH
Data Category 17 - HYDC
Data Category 18 - PROP
29.3.2. Printing Options for Output of Calculated Parameters

PBIS - Print Force Components at Each Iteration Step
(B) This option causes the program to output the component forces acting on each structure (e.g.
gravity, hydrostatic, current, and mooring forces) for each iteration in the search for equilibrium.
(DN) Prints out positions and forces on each structure at each integration stage; i.e. twice per
timestep. The scope of the printout can be controlled by selections in Data Category 18.
PFLH - Print Fer Low & High Frequency
(F) With this option Aqwa-Fer will output separate drift (low) and wave frequency (high) significant values
of all parameters. Drift (low) frequencies are defined as those below the lowest frequency in the wave
spectrum.
PPEL - Print Properties of Each Element
(BDFLN) This option allows the user to output complete details of each element used in the body modeling. All important details of the body elements are output together with the resultant properties of
the bodies. It is only applicable when running Stage 1 of the analysis.
PRAF - Print All Freedoms
(BDFN) This option allows the user to output results for all freedoms, even if some have been de-activated
using the DACF data record in Data Category 12.
PRAS - Print Articulation (Reaction) Spectrum
(F) Prints spectrum of articulation reactions, in GLOBAL axes.
PRCE - Print Data Record Echo for Data Categories 1 TO 5
(BDFLN) This option informs the program to output the input received by the program in reading Data
Categories 1 to 5. This is the body modeling.
250

PRCS - Print Coupled Spectra
This Option has been Withdrawn
(F) Prints fully-coupled matrix for force spectrum (PRFS), response spectrum (PRRS) and the transfer
matrix (PRTI).
PRFS - Print Force Spectral Density Matrix at Spectrum Integration POINTS
(F) This option is used to output the wave force spectra for both drift and wave frequency at the integration points of the response spectrum for the direction of the corresponding wave spectrum. By default,
this option only outputs the leading diagonal of this matrix, which therefore omits the information relating
to the phase between the freedoms of the structures.
The forces are in the fixed reference axis system.
PRPR - Print Pressures
(L) This option is used to output the total hydrostatic and hydrodynamic fluid pressures at each plate
in an Aqwa-Line model.
PRPT - Print Potentials
(L) This option is used to output the modified and unmodified values of the potential at the diffraction
element centers and at the field points. This information may be used to define the fluid flow field about
the body.
PRRI - Print RAOS at Spectra Integration Points
(F) This option is used to output the fully coupled RAOs which are used to calculate the response spectrum.
The peak values will, in general, not be contained in the output, as it is not necessary for accurate integration of the response spectra, which is achieved in Aqwa-Fer within one percent. However, the peak
value will never exceed the values output by more than 80 percent, as long as the damping exceeds
one half percent critical.
Note that these RAOs are calculated for the direction of the corresponding spectra in the fixed reference axis system.
PRRP - Print Recalculated Parameters
(F) Informs Aqwa-Fer to print certain parameters where they are recalculated for each spectrum. At
present, this applies to the CRAO option and also causes the undamped and damped natural frequencies
to be output, for each spectrum, for each mooring configuration.
PRRS - Print Response Spectrum at Spectra Integration Points
(F) This option is used to output the response spectrum at the integration points of the response spectra
for the fully coupled system of the equations of motion. By default, this option only outputs the leading
diagonal of this matrix, which therefore omits the information relating to the phase between the freedoms
of the structures.
The response is in the fixed reference axis system.
PRSS - Print Source Strengths
(L) Informs Aqwa-Line to output the singularity strengths for both the modified and unmodified values,
the modified strengths being a linear combination of the unmodified values. The actual relationship is
a function of the number of body symmetries being utilised.
PRST - Print Global Stiffness Matrix
(B) This option causes the global stiffness matrix, which is computed in equilibrium analysis (Stage 5),
to be output.
251

PRTI - Print Transfer Matrix at Spectra Integration Points
(F) This option is used to output the transfer matrix at the integration points of the response spectra for
the fully coupled system of the equations of motion. By default, this option only outputs the leading
diagonal of this matrix, which therefore omits the information relating to the phase between the freedoms
the structures. Do not use this option if the information is not required, as the computing costs are
substantially increased during integration of the wave frequency motions.
PRTS - Print Tension and Reaction Spectra
(F) This option is used to output significant value, Tz and spectral density for tension in composite
moorings and articulation reactions. These results are written to the .LIS file only; they are not yet available
for plotting in the AGS.
29.3.3. Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa Suite

AHD1 - Print ASCII Hydrodynamic Database
(L) Instructs Aqwa-Line to print the hydrodynamic database (the .HYD file) in a compact ASCII format to
a new file with a .Atitle extension. If the option AHD? is ALSO used, a file will be printed that explains
the format.
AHD? - Print Annotated ASCII Hydrodynamic Database
(L) When used with the AHD1 option, instructs Aqwa-Line to print a sample of the .Atitle file, with annotation to explain the format.
AQTF - ASCII Output of Full QTF Matrix
(L) The AQTF run-time option for Aqwa-Line will output an ASCII file AL*.QTF which can be used for external post- processing. The file is in fixed format as follows:
AQTF-1.0 :Example - Fully-Coupled SUMM/DIFF QTF
1 4 3
0.00000
30.00000
45.00000
90.00000
0.3490659
0.4188791
0.5235988
1 4 2 3 -1.4695E-03 4.8995E+05 -7.4829E+03 -1.0434E+07
-5.0714E-03 3.1427E+03 -2.0972E+03 -3.4310E+04
1.3916E-01 1.1357E+06 1.2190E+03 -8.1649E+06
1.0582E-01 7.0678E+05 1.2178E+03 -4.6883E+06
etc.
2.9763E-01
5.3036E-02
6.3355E-01
1.0078E+00
-2.1092E+04
-2.4030E-01
-1.9725E+04
-7.8328E+03
Header Record#1:
Columns 1-10 - Reserved for Version Header (AQTF-1.0 :)
Columns 11-80 - Run Title
For each structure:
Logical Record#1:
Columns 1-2 - Structure Number.
Columns 3-4 - Number of Directions for this structure.
Columns 5-6 - Number of Frequencies for this structure.
Columns 9-80 - 6 Directions (degrees) PER LINE in field widths of 12.
NB:If more than 6 directions are input then columns 9-80 are used on the next line.
Logical Record#2:
252

Columns 9-80 - 6 Frequencies (radians/sec) PER LINE in field widths of 12.
NB:If more than 6 frequencies are input then columns 9-80 are used on the next line up to the total
number of frequencies.
Next N*N Logical Records (N=Number of frequencies):
These are 4 lines each where:
Line#1 - Columns 1-2 - Structure number.
Line#1 - Columns 3-4 - Direction number.
Line#1 - Columns 5-6 - First Frequency number.
Line#1 - Columns 7-8 - Second frequency number.
Line#1 - Columns 9-80 - Real part of difference frequency QTF, for 6 d.o.f. (= PD)
Line#2 - Columns 9-80 - Imaginary part of difference frequency QTF, for 6 d.o.f. (= QD)
Line#3 - Columns 9-80 - Real part of sum frequency QTF, for 6 d.o.f. (= PS)
Line#4 - Columns 9-80 - Imaginary part of sum frequency QTF, for 6 d.o.f. (= QS)
Note that the QTF coefficients, normally referred to as P (real) and Q (imaginary), are in 'standard
format'. If i is the 1st frequency and j is the second, then P(i,j) coefficients are symmetric and Q(i,j)
coefficients are anti-symmetric i.e. P(i,j)=P(j,i) and Q(i,j)= - Q(j,i).
The force time history is therefore given by:
F = FD cos((w2-w1)t+P1) + FS*cos((w1+w2)t+P2)
where:
FD = SQRT(PD**2+QD**2)
FS = SQRT(PS**2+QS**2)
w1 = 1st frequency
w2 = 2nd frequency
P1 = ATAN2(QD,PD)
P2 = ATAN2(QS,PS)
CONV - Convolution
(DN) Instructs Aqwa-Drift or Naut to use convolution method in radiation force calculation. This is a more
rigorous approach to the radiation force calculation in time domain and will enhance the capability of
handling non-linear response of structures.
CQTF - Calculation of Full QTF Matrix
(L) The CQTF run-time option for Aqwa-Line requests calculation of the full QTF matrix. Note that this
option does not give printed output; the AQTF option (AQTF - ASCII Output of Full QTF Matrix (p. 252))
is needed to obtain this.
253

CRAO - Calculate RAO Option
(F) Instructs Aqwa-Fer to calculate and output the RAOs for each structure, INCLUDING the mooring
lines, but assuming each body is independently moving. These may be used to assess the effect of the
coupling of the complete system by comparing these RAOs with those for the fully coupled system (see
option PRRI PRRI - Print RAOS at Spectra Integration Points (p. 251)). This is done for the first spectrum
of each mooring line combination only, unless the PRRP option is used.
CRNM - Calculate RAOs with No Moorings
(BDFLN) This option may be used with Aqwa-Line but is more useful with the program Aqwa-Fer. This
option instigates the calculation of RAOs using the values of added mass, wave damping, stiffness and
wave forcing specified by the user. The RAOs are then written into the database.
DATA - Data Check Only
(BDFLN) This option is used to check the data input to the program and provides a means by which the
user may check all input data whilst incurring minimum cost of the program run. This option is equivalent
to performing the analysis up to the end of the second stage in Aqwa-Line, and up to the end of Stage
4 in Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut. If the data proved to be correct, then the program would be restarted
at next stage of the analysis by using the RESTART option.
END
- This is used to indicate the end of the option list.
FDLL - Call Routine "user_force"
(DN) This option instructs the program to call a routine called "user_force" at each stage of the calculation.
This routine can be used to add externally calculated forces to the simulation.
FQTF - Use Full QTF Matrix
(FD) This option specifies that the full matrix of difference frequency QTFs is to be used when calculating
slowly varying drift forces. See also SQTF option (Administration and Calculation Options for the Aqwa
Suite (p. 252))
GLAM - Output Significant Motions in Global Axis
(F) This option switches the axis system in Aqwa-Fer output into the global system.
GOON - Ignoring Modeling Rule Violations
(L) This option allows the analysis go on in spite of the modeling rule violations. Most of the modeling
errors will be turned into warnings by this option. Users are advised not to use this option unless the
violations are minor and difficult to correct
LAAR - Local Articulation Axis System for Articulation Reaction Force Output(LAA)
(BFDN) This option is used to output articulation reaction forces in the local articulation axis system. This
means that the moments in unconstrained freedoms, e.g. the hinge axis, will always be zero within
roundoff. Note that for fixed articulations or ball-joints the local axes are parallel to the FRA.
LDOP - Load Output
(L) This option is used in Aqwa-Line to create two files, *.POT and *.USS, containing potential and source
strength for each diffracting element. These two files are needed for transferring loads for stress analysis.
From v12.0 the *.POT and *.USS files are always created by default, so this option is redundant.
LDRG - Linearized Morison Drag
(L) This option is used in Aqwa-Line to output RAOs including linearized Morison drag. It is only available
for a single spectrum which must be defined in Data Category 13. Although multiple structures can be
analyzed they must not be connected by an additional structural stiffness matrix. The run must include
stage 5.
254

(F) This option is used in Aqwa-Fer to include linearized drag in the calculations. Unlike Aqwa-Line,
it is available for multiple spectra.
LNST - The Linear Starting Conditions
(N) This is used to start a simulation with the motions and velocities derived from the Aqwa-Line results.
This can be used to limit the transient at the start of a simulation.
LSAR - Local Structural Axis System (LSA) for Articulation Reaction Force Output
(BFDN) This option is used to output articulation reaction force in the local structural axis system. This
means that the direction of the output reaction force will follow the structure.
LSTF - Use Linear Stiffness Matrix to Calculate Hydrostatic Forces
(BN) This option should be used when the user wishes to use the linear stiffness matrix (calculated by
Aqwa-Line or input in Data Category 7) as opposed to the program recalculating the hydrostatic stiffness
from the hydrostatic element model. This normally will reduce the time to run the program substantially.
MCNV - Calculate C.I.F. Using Added Mass and Damping
(DN) From version 5.3K onward the default method for calculation of the Convolution Integral Function
uses the radiation damping only. This option forces the program to use the previous method based on
both added mass and damping.
MQTF - Calculate QTF Matrix with Directional Interaction
(L) The MQTF run-time option for Aqwa-Line requests calculation of QTF coefficients including interaction between different wave directions. This will result in output of a new
binary file with a .MQT extension.
(29.1)
MRAO - Calculate Motions Using RAOs Only

(DN) This option instructs Aqwa-Drift or Naut to calculate motions using RAOs only. These may be defined
by the user in Deck7. Note that this option suppresses all motion except that defined by the RAOs. In
particular current, wind, drift forces, moorings etc. have no effect on the motions of the structure.
NASF - No Additional Structural Stiffness
(LBFDN) This option will cause any additional structural stiffness, whether in the database or input in
Data Category 7, to be ignored. Its purpose is to allow an Aqwa-Line run including additional stiffness
to be followed by stages 3 - 6 in another module which may include moorings with an equivalent stiffness.
NGGQ - No Gauss Quadrature
(L) This option will cause Aqwa-Line to use the old method (pre 5.5D) for integration of the Green's
Function. It has been added for compatibility with previous versions.
NOBL - No Blurb. Do Not Print .LIS Banner Page
(BDFLN) This option switches off printing of the banner page in the *.LIS file.
NOCP - No Current Phase Shift
(ND) This option switches off the wave phase shift due to a current speed.
NODL - No Data List
(BDFN) This option switches off all extended data output in the *.LIS file.
NODR - No Drift Calculations
(L) This option flags the program not to perform the Mean Wave Drift Force calculations.
NOFP - No Free Wave Elevation Output at Field Points
(L) This is to switch off the output of field point wave elevation in the LIS file.
255

NOLL - No Progress Window
(LFDN) This option stops the progress window being displayed.
NOMG - Do Not Merge Databases
(L) This option stops the merging of hydrodynamic databases and re-calculation of QTFs. It is required
if a .HYD file is imported (into Aqwa-Line only) but the .PAC and .VAC files are not available.
NOST - No Statistics
(D) This option stops the automatic calculation of statistics at the end of each simulation run. Statistical
processing can be lengthy for long simulations. This option can be used to reduce processing time if
statistics are not required.
NOWD - No Automatic Wave Drift Damping Calculation
(D) This option stops the automatic calculation of wave drift damping for a floating structure in AqwaDrift. When this option is used, the wave drift damping should be defined in data category 9. Note that
the wave drift damping calculated by the program is only for the floating structure defined in AqwaLine, damping from risers, etc is not included. The NYWD option stops calculation of wave drift damping
for yaw motion only.
NPPP - No Pressure Post-Processing
(L) This option tells the program that there will be no pressure post-processing and therefore the connectivity warnings can be omitted.
NQTF - Near Field Solution for Mean Drift Force Calculation
(L) This option invokes Aqwa-Line to use the near field solution in the calculation of mean drift force.
By default the far field solution is used which only calculates the mean drift force in three horizontal
degrees of freedom (i.e. surge, sway and yaw). The far field solution is also unable to consider the hydrodynamic interaction between structures.
NRNM - Calculates Nodal RAOs With No Moorings
(L) This option is used to output in Aqwa-Line run RAOs at particular nodes defined in Data Category
18. The run stages should be from 1 to 5.
NYWD - No Yaw Wave Drift Damping
(D) This option suppresses the calculation of wave drift damping for yaw motion. To prevent the calculation of ALL wave drift damping use the NOWD option.
PLFS - Plot Free Surface. (This option is no longer necessary in version 5.2C and later versions)
(L) This option is used in conjunction with field point data records FPNT in Data Category 2 to output
free surface elevation at specified field points.
RDDB - Read Database
(BDFN) Read the hydrodynamics database from the restart (.RES) file created by a previous Aqwa-Line
run.
This option is used if the user wishes to modify the hydrodynamic data calculated in a previous
Aqwa-Line run, without having to re-run the Aqwa-Line radiation/diffraction analysis.
Note
The RDDB option is only needed if the hydrodynamics file from the previous Aqwa-Line
run has been accidentally deleted.
256

As the model definition has to be read from the restart file before the hydrodynamics
can be read, there is no possibility to change the model definition, when using this option.
RDEP - Read Equilibrium Position
(BFDN) This option can be used in Librium, Fer, Drift and Naut to read in the structures equilibrium position from a previous Librium run as the start position. An AB*.EQP file should be copied to AF*.EQP
before a Fer run, to AD*.EQP before a Drift run or to AN*.EQP before a Naut run. The .EQP file will be
copied automatically if the file root is entered on the RESTART data record (The RESTART Data Record (p. 35)).
REST - Restart
(ALL) This option is used when the program is being restarted at any stage greater than the first (see
Analysis Stages (p. 9)). A restart data record must follow the options list when the restart option is used
This data record indicates the stage at which the program is to continue and the stage at which the
program is to stop (see The Restart Stages (p. 10)).
RNDD - Reynolds No Drag/C for Morison Elements
(Switched by SC1/Data Record)
(BDN) Together with the SC1/ data record in Data Category 17 this option causes drag coefficients
to be calculated using the Wieselburger curve for Reynold's number dependent drag coefficients.
Drag coefficients in Data Category 4 (including defaults) are set to zero.
SDRG - Use Slow Velocity for Hull Drag Calculation
(D) This option is used if users wish to use the slow velocity (drift frequency velocity) for the hull drag
calculation, instead of the total velocity (drift frequency velocity + wave frequency velocity) which is the
default.
SFBM - Calculate Shear Forces and Bending Moments
(L) This option instructs Aqwa-Line to calculate shear forces and bending moments in Stage 5. A .SHB
file is produced which can be read by the AGS.
SQTF - Use Sum Frequency QTFs
(D) This option specifies that the full matrix of sum frequency QTFs is to be used when calculating slowly
varying drift forces. Note that this option also sets the FQTF option (Administration and Calculation
Options for the Aqwa Suite (p. 252)); it is not possible to perform an analysis using only the sum QTFs.
TRAN - Transient Analysis
(DN) This option switches off the slow axis system and stops printout of harmonic analysis at the end
of a simulation run. This option should not in general be used. It is only provided as a workround for
Drift analysis for both drift and wave frequency motions if it diverges in the time integration.
TRAO - Transient RAO Motion
(D) When this option is used Aqwa-Drift will re-calculate the forces based on the RAOs, which can be
input by the user in Data Category 7. This allows RAOs obtained from tank tests (for example) to be used
with the CONV option in transient analyses. If the RAOs are not modified this option has little effect.
WHLS - Use Wheeler Stretching
(N) This option specifies that Wheeler stretching should be used in Aqwa-Naut when calculating the
Froude-Krylov force based on the instantaneous wave surface.
257

Regular Waves
For the default second order Stokes wave theory, Wheeler stretching is used.
If the AIRY data record is used, Airy wave theory and Wheeler stretching is used.
Irregular Waves
Wheeler stretching is always used in irregular waves.
With the WHLS option, linear wave theory is used.
Without the WHLS option, Wheeler stretching is used together with linear wave theory and a
second order correection on wave elevation, pressure, and fluid particle velocity and acceleration.
258
Chapter 30: External Force Calculation

Aqwa Drift and Naut can accept forces calculated in an external routine, at each timestep. This is done
by calling the routine user_force, which is stored in a dll file. Users can write and compile their own
routine as long as it follows the requirements in this chapter.
For 32-bit Aqwa:
The name of the dll file must be user_force.dll, and the file must be located in the same directory
as the Aqwa executables (typically C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\aqwa\bin\win32).
For 64-bit Aqwa:
The name of the dll file must be user_force64.dll, and the file must be located in the same directory
as the Aqwa executables (typically C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\aqwa\bin\winx64).
The standard Aqwa installation includes the following example files in the directory C:\Program
Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\aqwa\doc, and it is recommended that users copy and modify these as
appropriate:
user_force.f90 - example Fortran subroutine
user_force.c - example C routine
Euler_to_LSA.mcd - PTC Mathcad worksheet which illustrates the transformation from LSA to FRA
axes and vice versa
Example of Fortran Subroutine user_force (p. 259) is a copy of the Fortran subroutine user_force.f90.
Conversion of Euler Angles to LSA (p. 261) is a text version of the Mathcad worksheet Euler_to_LSA.mcd.
For output, the forces are included in the external forces, which can be printed in the .LIS file or
plotted in the AGS.
This capability is activated by using the option FDLL, as described in Options for Use in Running Aqwa
Programs (p. 247).
Up to 100 integer and 100 real control parameters can optionally be input in Data Category 10. These
are passed to user_force at each call and can be used to define variables such as control constants or
calculation options. The input format is shown in The IUFC/RUFC Data Records - External Forces (p. 118).
30.1. Example of Fortran Subroutine user_force

SUBROUTINE USER_FORCE(MODE,I_CONTROL,R_CONTROL,NSTRUC,TIME,TIMESTEP,STAGE, &
POSITION,VELOCITY,COG, &
FORCE,ADDMASS,ERRORFLAG)
!DECLARATION TO MAKE USER_FORCE PUBLIC WITH UN-MANGLED NAME
!DEC$ attributes dllexport , STDCALL , ALIAS : "USER_FORCE" :: user_force
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES REFERENCE :: I_CONTROL, R_CONTROL
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES REFERENCE :: POSITION, VELOCITY, COG, FORCE, ADDMASS
259
External Force Calculation

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES REFERENCE :: MODE, NSTRUC, TIME, TIMESTEP, STAGE
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES REFERENCE :: ERRORFLAG
IMPLICIT NONE
INTEGER MODE, NSTRUC, STAGE, ERRORFLAG
REAL TIME, TIMESTEP
INTEGER, DIMENSION (100) :: I_CONTROL
REAL, DIMENSION (100) :: R_CONTROL
REAL, DIMENSION (3,NSTRUC) :: COG
REAL, DIMENSION (6,NSTRUC) :: POSITION, VELOCITY, FORCE
REAL, DIMENSION (6,6,NSTRUC) :: ADDMASS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
260
Input Parameter Description:

MODE(Int)
- 0 = Initialisation. This routine is called once with mode 0

before the simulation. All parameters are as described
below except for STAGE, which is undefined. FORCES and
ADDMASS are assumed undefined on exit.
IERR if set to > 0 on exit will cause
the simulation to stop.
1 = Called during the simulation. FORCE/ADDMASS output expected.
99 = Termination. This routine is called once with mode 99
at the end of the simulation.
I_CONTROL(100)- User-defined integer control parameters input in .DAT file.

R_CONTROL(100)- User-defined real control parameters input in .DAT file.
NSTRUC(Int)
- Number of structures in the simulation
TIME
- The current time (see STAGE below)
TIMESTEP
- The current timestep
STAGE(Int)
- The stage of the integration scheme. AQWA time integration is

based on a 2-stage predictor corrector method. This routine is
therefore called twice at each timestep, once with STAGE=1 and
once with STAGE=2. On stage 2 the position and velocity are
predictions of the position and velocity at TIME. e.g. if the
initial time is 0.0 and the step 1.0 seconds then calls are as
follows for the 1st 2 integration steps:
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
USER_FORCE(.....,TIME=0.0,TIMESTEP=1,STAGE=1
...)
...)
...)
...)
COG(3,NSTRUC) - Position of the Center of Gravity in the Definition axes.

POSITION(6,NSTRUC) - Position of the structure in the FRA; angles in radians
VELOCITY(6,NSTRUC) - Velocity of the structure in the FRA
angular velocities in radians/s
Output Parameter Description:

FORCE(6,NSTRUC) - Force on the Center of gravity of the structure. NB: these
forces are applied in the Fixed Reference axis e.g.
the surge(X) force is ALWAYS IN THE SAME DIRECTION i.e. in
the direction of the X fixed reference axis.
ADDMASS(6,6,NSTRUC)
- Added mass matrix for each structure. As the value of the
acceleration is dependent on FORCES, this matrix may be used
to apply inertia type forces to the structure. This mass
will be added to the total added mass of the structure at
each timestep at each stage.
ERRORFLAG
- Error flag. The program will abort at any time if this
Conversion of Euler Angles to LSA

!
!
error flag is non-zero. The values of the error flag will

be output in the abort message.
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------! MODE=0 - Initialize any summing variables/open/create files.

!
This mode is executed once before the simulation begins.
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------IF (MODE.EQ.0) THEN
CONTINUE
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------! MODE=1 - On-going - calculation of forces/mass

!-----------------------------------------------------------------------ELSEIF (MODE.EQ.1) THEN
FORCE = (-1.0E6 * POSITION) - (2.0E5 * VELOCITY)
ADDMASS = 0
ERRORFLAG = 0
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------! MODE=99 - Termination - Output/print any summaries required/Close Files

!
This mode is executed once at the end of the simulation
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------!
ELSEIF (MODE.EQ.99) THEN
!-----------------------------------------------------------------------! MODE# ERROR - OUTPUT ERROR MESSAGE

!-----------------------------------------------------------------------ELSE
ENDIF
RETURN
END SUBROUTINE USER_FORCE
30.2. Conversion of Euler Angles to LSA

Aqwa defines the orientation of a structure using "Euler" angles. These are the angles which are printed
in the .LIS file and passed in the argument list to the subroutine user_force. They are the angles by
which the structure has to be rotated about the FRA axes to reach its given position, applied in the
order rx, ry, rz (or roll, pitch, yaw). This worksheet shows how to obtain the direction cosines of the LSA
axes from these angles.
Assume the Euler angles are 1 2 3 for rotations about the x (roll) y (pitch) and z (yaw) axes.
Euler angles
Unit vectors in
LSA
Roll about FRA x axis
Pitch about FRA y

axis
261
External Force Calculation
Yaw about FRA z axis
Overall motion
The columns of q.p.r give the direction cosines of the LSA x,y,z axes in the FRA, e.g.
Note that the inverse of qpr is the same as its transpose, so use qprT to convert from FRA to LSA.
If the position of the CoG in the FRA is CG, then the position of x in the FRA is given by
Expanding multiplication, using cx = cos(x), sx=sin(x):

Rotations applied in the order roll, pitch,
yaw
Equivalent single transformation matrix
262

AQWA Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AQWA Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AQWA Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aqwa Reference Manual

Copyright and Trademark Information

U.S. Government Rights

1.1.1. Axes Systems

Fixed Reference Axes (FRA)X,Y,Z in the free-surface with Z pointing vertically

1.1.2. Wave/Wind/Current Direction

The Structure Definition and Analysis Position

1.1.3. Phase Angle

1.2. The Structure Definition and Analysis Position

1.4. Aqwa Files

Chapter 2: Analysis Stages

2.1. General Description

2.2. The Restart Stages

2.3. Restart Stage 1

Input for Towed Tethers

Input for Installed Tethers

2.4. Restart Stage 2

Input for Aqwa-Line with no previous Aqwa-Line runs

Input for Aqwa-Line adding additional frequencies to a previous Aqwa-Line

Input for Aqwa-Line specifying known values of the radiation/diffraction

Input for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut with results from a previous AqwaLine run

Input for Aqwa-Drift/Fer/Librium/Naut with results from a source other than

Input for Towed Tethers

Input for Installed Tethers

2.5. Restart Stage 3

2.6. Restart Stage 4

Additional Data Requirements for Towed and Installed Tethers

2.7. Restart Stage 5

2.8. Restart Stage 6

Chapter 3: Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

3.1. Features Common to All Data Categories

Features Common to All Data Categories

3.1.1. Optional User Identifier

3.1.2. Compulsory Data Category Keyword

3.1.3. Compulsory 'END' Statement

3.1.4. Format Requirements

Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

3.2. Classification of Data Categories 1 TO 18

3.2.1. Stopping and Starting the Program During an Analysis

3.2.2. Data Categories 1 to 5 - Geometric Definition and Static Environment

Default Values Assumed by the Program

3.2.3. Data Categories 6 to 8 - The Radiation/Diffraction Analysis Parameters

3.2.4. Data Categories 9 to 18 - Definition of Analysis-Dependent Parameters

3.3. Default Values Assumed by the Program

Data Preparation for the Aqwa Suite

3.3.1. Omission of Data Categories

3.3.2. Omission of Data Records within a Data Category

3.3.3. Omission of Fields on a Data Record

3.3.4. Default Values

The Data Category Series for One or More Structures

3.4. The Data Category Series for One or More Structures

3.4.2. The Data Category Series Terminator - FINI

3.4.3. Omission of Data Categories within a Data Category Series

Chapter 4: The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0)

4.1. The JOB Data Record

The Preliminary Data (Data Category 0)

4.2. The TITLE Data Record

4.3. The OPTIONS Data Record

The RESTART Data Record